EN 01

Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Chapter 2
Read First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Before Examination. . . . . . . . . . 69
How to use this document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Organization of the operation manual . . . . . . . . 9
2.1.1 Moving the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Notational conventions used in this
2.1.2 Connecting the Transducer. . . . . . . . 72
document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1.3 Three-Port Probe Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . 74
About notational convention of the system . . . 10
2.2 Power Supply Cord Connection and
About operating procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
How to view the screens / images plotted in Battery Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.2.1 Connecting the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Trademarks and copyrights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.2.2 Connecting the AC Adapter. . . . . . . . 75
2.2.3 Battery Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Safety Precautions & Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety Alert Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.3 Power ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Warning Notice (Signal Words) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.3.1 Turn ON the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Notice relating to information security . . . . . . . 13 2.3.2 Turn OFF the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.3.3 Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3.4 Security Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Main unit of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Transducer (Option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.4 External Device Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Pole Cart2 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.4.1 ImagePilot Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Power Extension Unit2 (Option). . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.4.2 Reader Device Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
CW kit (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.4.3 DICOM Worklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Foot Switch (Dual) (Option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Foot Switch (Triple) (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Chapter 3
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Starting Examination. . . . . . . . . 85
Three-port probe unit (Option). . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Reference Signal Unit (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.1 Study Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Keyboard kit (Option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.1.1 Layout of the Study Screen. . . . . . . . 86
VESA attachment (Option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.1.2 Displaying Common Data . . . . . . . . . 88
Acoustic Standoff (Option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.2 Examination Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Description of symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.3 Registering Patient Information . . . . . . . . . 96
Description of graphic symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.3.1 Layout of the Patient Screen. . . . . . . 96
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.3.2 Entering Letters Using the Software
Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Software License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.3.3 Entering Patient Information . . . . . . . 99
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3.4 Exam Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.4.1 Select Preset / User Preset to Start
Chapter 1 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.5 Patient Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3.5.1 Archive Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1.1 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 3.5.2 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.1.1 Indication for Use Statements. . . . . . 44 3.6 Edit and Delete Patient Information . . . . . 109
1.1.2 Contraindication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 3.6.1 Editing Patient Information . . . . . . . 109
1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3.6.2 Deleting Patient Information and
Study Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
1.3 Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.4 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 3.7 Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.7.1 Backup / Restore Screen. . . . . . . . 111
1.5 Patient Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.8 Resuming Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name . . . . 49
3.9 Emergency Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.6.1 Standard Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.9.1 Examination by Auto ID. . . . . . . . . . 121
1.6.2 Part Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1.6.3 Mini Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1.6.4 Side Panel / Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.6.5 Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.6.6 Compatible Peripheral Devices. . . . . 63
1.6.7 Connectable Transducers and
Biopsy Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1.6.8 List of Optional Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

3
Contents

Chapter 4 Chapter 5
Diagnosis Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Common Function
4.1 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 in Ultrasound Images . . . . . . . 181
4.1.1 Menu Pop-up Window. . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.1 Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4.1.2 Operation Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.1.1 Cine Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4.1.3 Display of Ultrasound Image and
5.1.2 Cine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.1.3 Cine Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4.2 Changing Exam Type or Preset during
5.1.4 Cine Clip Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.2 Body Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.2.1 Changing Exam Type Using the
5.2.1 Body Mark Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Shortcut Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.2.2 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4.2.2 Registering User Preset . . . . . . . . . 132
5.3 Text (Annotation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3 Diagnosis Mode Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.3.1 Start of Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.3.2 Text Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
4.4.1 B-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.3.3 Extended List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4.4.2 M-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.3.4 Entering Registered Annotation. . . . 192
4.4.3 Color Flow-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.3.5 Entering Annotation Using Software
4.4.4 Power Doppler-mode. . . . . . . . . . . 146
Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.4.5 2D-TDI-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.3.6 List of Other Operations . . . . . . . . . 193
4.4.6 SCF-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
5.4 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.4.7 Elastography-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5.4.1 Measurement Basic Operation . . . . 194
4.4.8 PW Doppler-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
5.4.2 Basic Measurement Items List . . . . 196
4.4.9 PW-TDI-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
5.4.3 Application Measurement and
4.4.10 CW Doppler-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.5 Mixed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.5 RA Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
4.6 Multi-image Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.6 Common Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.6.1 Dual Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.6.1 Operation Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.6.2 Split Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
5.6.2 Direct Touch and Drag. . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.6.3 Trace Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5.6.3 Full display mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.7 ECG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.6.4 Touch invalidation mode . . . . . . . . . 209
4.7.1 Connecting the optional Reference
5.6.5 Left/right Layout Switch Function . . 210
Signal Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5.6.6 Map editing function . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4.7.2 ECG Cable and Electrode
5.6.7 Library Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.6.8 Voice Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.7.3 Starting the ECG Display. . . . . . . . 171
5.6.9 Hypoechoic Region
4.7.4 ECG Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Characterization Function. . . . . . . . 217
4.7.5 ECG Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.7.6 ECG Finishing Procedure . . . . . . . . 174
4.8 Panoramic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Chapter 6
4.8.1 Capturing Panoramic Images . . . . . 175 Reviewing, Printing,
4.8.2 Various Operations for Panoramic
Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
and Transferring Images. . . . . 219
6.1 Storing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
6.1.1 Storing Still Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
6.1.2 Storing Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
6.2 Thumbnail Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
6.2.1 Displaying Thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . 223
6.2.2 Browsing and Editing Images . . . . . 225
6.2.3 Deleting or Transferring Images
during Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
6.3 Printing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6.4 Transferring Image Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

4
 Contents

Chapter 7 Chapter 9
Maintenance / Inspection . . . . 233 MI/TI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.1 Maintenance Checks Before and After 9.1 Basic Knowledge of MI/TI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 9.2 MI/TI Display Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.1.1 Check before Turning ON the 9.3 Parameters Affecting the MI/TI Values . . . 275
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 9.4 Display Layout of MI/TI Values . . . . . . . . . 276
7.1.2 Check after Turning ON the 9.5 MI/TI Output Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 9.5.1 Transmit Level Control . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.1.3 Check after Turning OFF the 9.5.2 Transmit Level Display . . . . . . . . . . 278
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 9.6 Imaging Functions that Change Acoustic
7.2 Maintenance Check and Cleaning . . . . . . 236 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.2.1 Maintenance Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 9.7 Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7.2.2 Cleaning Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . 237 9.8 Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
7.3 Periodic Inspection Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 9.9 References for MI/TI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.4 Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
7.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Chapter 10
Chapter 8 Acoustic Output. . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Transducer and Biopsy. . . . . . 243 10.1 Acoustic Output Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
10.1.1 Transducer Technical Data and
8.1 Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Acoustic Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
8.1.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for
Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Chapter 11
8.1.2 Specifications of Transducer. . . . . . 246
8.1.3 Transducer Part Names . . . . . . . . . 250 Others. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
8.1.4 Daily Inspection of Transducer . . . . 253
11.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
8.1.5 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
11.2 Error Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection . . . . . . . . 254
11.3 Accuracy of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
8.2 Biopsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
11.3.1 Causes of Measurement Errors. . . 297
8.2.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for
11.3.2 Accuracy of Each Clinical
Biopsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Measurement Parameter. . . . . . . . . 298
8.2.2 Attachment of Biopsy Bracket and
11.4 Conformance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Needle Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
11.5 Safety Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
8.2.3 Display of Biopsy Guide . . . . . . . . . 258
11.6 Electromagnetic Emissions and
8.2.4 Layout of Guideline. . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Electromagnetic Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
8.2.5 Biopsy Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 260
8.2.6 Simple Needle Visualization . . . . . . 261 11.7 Check List for Maintenance Check:
8.2.7 SNV Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Before and after use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
8.2.8 Selection of Biopsy Bracket. . . . . . . 264
8.3 Acoustic Standoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
8.3.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for
Acoustic Standoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
8.3.2 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8.3.3 Cleaning and Disinfection of
Acoustic Standoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

5
6
Introduction

7
 Read First

CAUTION

Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

Thank you for purchasing the ultrasound system SONIMAGE HS2 series (hereinafter described "the system").

This operation manual describes the precautions, procedures and instructions for use / operation of the system. Be-
fore using the system, thoroughly read and understand this operation manual.
Keep this document handy for easy future reference.

How to use this document

This document is intended for persons who are familiar with diagnostic ultrasound systems. Make sure that the sys-
tem is used by a doctor or under the supervision of a doctor. Clinical trial guidance and medical procedures are not
provided in this document.
There is no reference made to diagnostic outcomes or assessments in this document. Before making a final diagno-
sis, confirm the measurement result obtained from each application by measurement data.
To help a user acquires optimal images, the system is preset before shipping. Normally, it will be unnecessary for a
user to make major adjustments to the system. If a user wishes to change image settings, the user can reconfigure
the appropriate items.
Konica Minolta shall in no event be liable for any defect that arises in connection with the system software being run
on any computer other than the system.
Before using the system, carefully read and thoroughly understand Safety Precautions & Warnings in the beginning
of this operation manual.
For safe use of the system, make sure to read "Introduction" and "Chapter 7 Maintenance / Inspection" in this docu-
ment before using.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This document contains all the options available in the system.
Some of the options may not be usable depending on the combination of the selected options.
• The optional functions and specifications listed in this document are subject to change without prior notice.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

8
 Read First

Organization of the operation manual

The operation manuals consist of the following volumes.

zz Operation Manual: Fundamentals

It describes basic information on the system, such as setup for the system, part names, basic operations, common
operations, the description of each mode, and maintenance. After completing initial setups, use it as a procedure
manual for starting an examination and also as a measurement manual.

zz Operation Manual: Applications

Mainly focusing on measurement functions, the mode-specific procedures of an examination are described. In addi-
tion, the general scope of applications of the system, including Compare View or Review of study data and various
setups, are described.

zz Acoustic Power Manual

Data and reference concerning acoustic output are summarized. Refer to it as necessary.

zz Start-up Guide
A flow of operations, basic operations, frequently used functions, etc. are excerpted. For details, refer to the "Opera-
tion Manual: Fundamentals" and "Operation Manual: Applications".

zz Notes on safety
Describes safety precautions so they can be easily understood.

Notational conventions used in this document

DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may also
be used to indicate hazardous situation where only physical damage is likely to occur.

IMPORTANT
Information concerning the installation, operation, maintenance, points to note, etc. of the system. It does not de-
scribe any possible dangerous procedures.

HINT
Description of operational reference information.

Reference
Indication of items and pages to be referred to. Refer to them as necessary.

9
Read First

About notational convention of the system

Options, such as screen names / button names / on-screen choices, are surrounded by [ ].
Buttons are composed of the push buttons on the mini console and those selective buttons to be touched for the
desired operation on the LCD monitor screen. However, button assignments are mentioned based on the default set-
tings.
For a push button on the mini console → XX button
For an on-screen button → [ ] button
Example)

FREEZE → FREEZE button

About operating procedure

Operations are numbered in order of operational order for illustrative purposes.

The description of the procedures does not always start on the top study screen.
">" is used to show which button or option on the top screen a user should select to switch to the target screen.
Example)
For an operating procedure to be started by pressing the [ ] button in the menu section on the [ ] screen and by
pressing [ ] button
[ ] screen > [ ] button > [ ] button

How to view the screens / images plotted in this document

The figures and images listed in this document are developed as a form of sample image, non-ultrasound figure or
image, or illustration. Settings, such as a screen menu layout and the number of on-screen buttons, vary depending
on the presets of the system, and the extraction conditions of an ultrasound image differ according to the transducer
and mode used or the observed area. Use the plotted figures and images as a guide to understand the procedures.

10
 Read First

Trademarks and copyrights

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
CIDEZYME® and CIDEX® OPA are registered trademarks of Advanced Sterilization Products.
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Company names, logos, and product names in the manual other than the above are trademarks or registered trade-
marks of corresponding companies.
CAB32.DLL
Copyright © 1998-2002 K.Miyauchi
This library is based in part on the Microsoft Cabinet Software Development Kit.
VS-FlexGrid
Copyright © 2001-2007 ComponentOne LLC.
libHaru
Copyright © 1999-2006 Takeshi Kanno
Copyright © 2007-2009 Antony Dovgal
The program has been modified partially.
• This manual may not be reprinted in part or in whole without prior consent.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

Copyright © 2020 Konica Minolta, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

11
 Safety Precautions & Warnings

zz There are DANGERs, WARNINGs, and CAU-

Safety Alert Symbol TIONs at following pages.

DANGER
• "1.1 Intended Use"
• "8.1.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for Trans-
This is the "safety alert symbol". This symbol alerts
ducer"
you to matters and/or operation potentially hazardous
• "8.3.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for Acous-
to yourself and other people. Read these messages
tic Standoff"
and follow the instructions carefully.

WARNING
Warning Notice (Signal Words) • "1.1 Intended Use"
• "2.2 Power Supply Cord Connection and Battery
Signal words indicate the degree of potential hazards Capacity"
in the use of the product. • "4.7 ECG Mode"
Signal words include the following three types, which • "7.2.2 Cleaning Procedures"
are used according to risk of damage caused by dan- • "8.1.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for Trans-
ger and the severity of damage. ducer"
• "8.1.4 Daily Inspection of Transducer"
DANGER • "8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection"
• "8.2.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for Bi-
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if opsy"
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. • "8.2.6 Simple Needle Visualization"
• "8.3.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for Acous-
WARNING tic Standoff"
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
CAUTION
• "1.6.3 Mini Console"
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
• "2.1 Installation"
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
• "2.1.1 Moving the System"
It may also be used to indicate hazardous situation
• "2.1.2 Connecting the Transducer"
where only physical damage is likely to occur.
• "2.3.1 Turn ON the Power"
• "3.3.3 Entering Patient Information"
• "4.7 ECG Mode"
• "4.8 Panoramic View"
• "5.4 Measurement"
• "5.6.8 Voice Control"
• "7.2.2 Cleaning Procedures"
• "8.1.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for Trans-
ducer"
• "8.1.4 Daily Inspection of Transducer"
• "8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection"
• "8.2.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for Bi-
opsy"
• "8.3.1 Safety Precautions & Warnings for Acous-
tic Standoff"
• "9.7 Caution"

12

CALIFORNIA, USA ONLY
This product contains a CR Lithium Battery
which contains
Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply.
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/per-
chlorate
This symbol means: Do not
dispose of this product together
with your household waste!
Please refer to the information
of your local community or con-
tact our dealers regarding the
proper handling of end-of-life
electric and electronic equip-
ments.
Recycling of this product will
help to conserve natural re-
sources and prevent potential
negative consequences for the
environment and human health
caused by inappropriate waste
handling.
0197
This symbol indicates that this device is in conformity
with the European Directive 93/42/EEC.
13
Safety Precautions & Warnings
Notice relating to information security
WARNING
• Systems that have sustained cyber attacks, such
as an attack via networks, wireless interception or
website browsing, or that are infected by computer
viruses through external storage devices, which
are potentially harmful to computers (hereunder
referred to as "malware") may result in the erasure,
corruption, or unwanted disclosure of data stored
within this device, including personal and sensitive
patient information. Infections by malware may also
result in malfunction of the device, as well as caus-
ing the infection to spread to other products.
• This device may only be used in combination with
software confirmed to be safe and compatible, and
installed according to predetermined installation
procedures.
• The application of the latest security updates to the
Operating System on a periodic basis, as well as
providing for anti-virus software and updating virus
definition files on a regular basis, are considered ef-
fective in preventing cyber attacks and the infection
of the system by malware.
• Please take appropriate measures in accordance
with the application notices for security patches and
the procedural manual. Please refer to a Konica Mi-
nolta service representative for details.
• To prevent cyber attacks, including the infection of
the device by malware, take note of the following:
–– Do not connect the device to any equipment not
certified for connection to the device.
–– Do not install any software that we have not ap-
proved for use.
–– Do not uninstall software that has already been
installed.
–– Do not delete the OS (operating system) or any
files and folders associated with the OS.
–– Always confirm external storage media to be free
of malware prior to use.
–– Use the device in a safe network environment
incorporating adequate security measures for the
prevention of malware infection.
–– Refrain from any hazardous activity leading to
potential vulnerability against malware infection.
• Before you change the settings of any operating
system or application software that are not de-
scribed in this notice, please check with the Konica
Minolta service representative.
Safety Precautions & Warnings

• Take precautions not to allow others to see the de-

vice screen displaying sensitive patient information.
Privacy protection display filters should not be used
as such filters may adversely affect the appearance
of displayed images
• Take precautions not to allow others to operate the
device.
• Be sure to implement the following cyber-security
measures:
–– Provide for an adequate level of information se-
curity measures within the facility using this de-
vice, and other facilities connected to the facility
via networks.
–– Isolate the device from the connected network
immediately upon infection by malware, concur-
rently prohibiting the use of the infected device.
–– Upon infection of the device by malware, or the
potential infection thereof, promptly contact Koni-
ca Minolta service representative.
• Please set a password that consists of several char-
acters, and include at least one special character.
In addition, when specifying the management policy
for your IDs and passwords, you should consider
recent trends in information security measures.

14
 Labels

For safety use, labels that alert you to precautions for use are affixed on the system.
Symbols on the warning labels ( , etc.) affixed on the system refer to precautions regarding safety.
Information about labels is described in "Description of symbols" and the labels correspond to the numbers in the fol-
lowing figure. Read the Operation Manual carefully before using the system.
Location, appearance, and details of each warning label are as follows.
Please read following markings getting closer to a distance of approximately 30 cm.

(3)

(5) (7)

(1) (13)
(10) (8)
(2)
(12) (4)
(14) (11)
(6)
(9)
(15)

(16)

15
Labels

Main unit of the system

No. Label Description

Affix on the back side of the main unit.

**** - *****
(1) Model label **** - **
0197 GS1
(01) **************
(21) **** - *****

Affix on the back side of the main unit.

(2) Windows label

(3) WARNING / CAUTION label

Affix on the back side of the main unit.

(4) Hot surface label

Transducer (Option)

No. Label Description

Example: Convex transducer

Safety standards / Model label / WARN-

(5)
ING label

16
 Labels

Pole Cart2 (Option)

No. Label Description

Affix on the back side of the tray.

This marking can be read from the bottom part of the Pole Cart2.

(6) Label of origin

(7) CAUTION label

Maximum total mass

(8) System total weight label of the system
45 kg (99 lbs)

(9) Basket maximum load label

17
Labels

Power Extension Unit2 (Option)

No. Label Description

(10) Back side label

(11) Rating label

(12) CAUTION label

(13) PSE label (Power Extension Unit2)

CW kit (Option)

No. Label Description

Affix on the back side of the main unit.

SONIMAGE HS1 CW Kit

SONIMAGE HS1 CWय़ॵॺ

(14) Label of origin 㻜㻝㻥㻣

Foot Switch (Dual) (Option)

No. Label Description

SONIMAGE HS1 Foot Switch (Dual)

SONIMAGE HS1 ‫ڮ‬৴ইॵॺ५ॖॵॳ

(15) Label of origin 㻜㻝㻥㻣

18
 Labels

Foot Switch (Triple) (Option)

No. Label Description

SONIMAGE HS1 Foot Switch (Triple)

SONIMAGE HS1‫گ‬৴ইॵॺ५ॖॵॳ

(16) Label of origin 㻜㻝㻥㻣

Battery

(17)
(20)

(18) (19)

No. Label Description

(17) WARNING label

(18) Label of origin

(19) Label RoHS

(20) Rating label

19
Labels

Three-port probe unit (Option)

(22)
(21) Printed on
the surface

No. Label Description

SONIMAGE HS1 Three-Port Probe Unit 㻜㻝㻥㻣

SONIMAGE HS1 এ‫ॺش‬উট‫ش‬ঈఁ୑ঘॽॵॺ
(21) Label of origin

Reference Signal Unit (Option)

(25)

(23)

(26)
(24)

No. Label Description

(23) Part number

(24) WARNING label

20
 Labels

No. Label Description

(25) Rating label

(26) Label of origin

Keyboard kit (Option)

(27)

No. Label Description

SONIMAGE HS1 Keyboard Kit

SONIMAGE HS1 य़‫ش‬঎‫ॻش‬य़ॵॺ
(27) Label of origin, WARNING label 㻜㻝㻥㻣

21
Labels

VESA attachment (Option)

(28)

No. Label Description

SONIMAGE HS1 VESA Attachment

SONIMAGE HS1 VESA॔ॱॵॳওথॺ
㻜㻝㻥㻣
(28) Label of origin

Acoustic Standoff (Option)

(29)

No. Label Description

(29) Label of origin

22
 Labels

Description of symbols

Symbols written labels are described.

No. Symbol Description Remarks

(1), (5), (6),

(11), (13),
(14), (15),
Serial No.
(16), (18),
(21), (23),
(27), (28)

(1), (5), (6),

(11), (14),
(15), (16),
Date of Manufacture
(18), (21),
(23), (27),
(28), (29)

(1), (5), (6),

(11), (14), (15),
(16), (21), (23),
(27), (28), (29)
0197CE Mark

(1), (5), (21) Manufacturer

(1), (5),
WEEE Mark
(25)

DANGER: Do not operate this system in a flammable or

(3) Risk of explosion if used in the presence explosive atmosphere.
of flammable anesthetics. Doing so may cause an explosion or burning.

CAUTION:
Do not lift or move the system by the Do not lift or move the system by the holder to
holder to prevent it from falling or being prevent it from falling or being damaged.
damaged.
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the system on a flat surface
Place the system on a flat surface. Oth-
(3) under stable conditions to prevent it from
erwise, the system may become unbal-
becoming unbalanced.
anced.

CAUTION:
Do not move the system in unstable Do not carry the system in an unstable condi-
condition to prevent it from falling or being tion, as it may cause it to fall or drop.
damaged.

(3), (17),
Be sure to read the operation manual.
(24), (29)

Risk from hot surface A burn or low-temperature burn injury may re-
(4)
Do not touch for a long period of time. sult from contact with the possible hot surface.

Continued on the next page

23
Labels

No. Symbol Description Remarks

Do not give an impact to the transducer, do not

forcibly press it against hard items, and do not
CAUTION:
drop it. Do not forcibly twist or bend the cable.
(5) Do not give an impact to the transducer.
Doing so may cause damage to the transducer
Risk of transducer breakage.
and cause an electric shock or injury to the
patient.
Transducer
Classification of protection against harmful
(5) The structure of the connector is not made
ingress of water or particulate matter
waterproof.

(5), (15),
RoHS Mark
(16), (25)

Transducer is the Type BF applied part.

(5), (22), (24) Type BF applied part
ECG cables are the Type BF applied part.

Do not apply pressure to the side of the sys-

(7) Do not push. tem when attached to a Pole Cart2 unless the
system is being transported.

(10) Protective earth

Terminal to connect to the potential equaliza-

(10) Potential equalization terminal
tion conductors.

(12) CAUTION

(12), (22) Be sure to read the operation manual.

Foot switch
Classification of protection against harmful
(15), (16) The structure of the connector is not made
ingress of water or particulate matter
waterproof.

To avoid a risk of explosion, never throw the

(17) WARNING
battery into a fire.

(19) RoHS Mark

(20) Lithium ion

24
 Labels

No. Symbol Description Remarks

Marking requirements of the Battery Direc-

(20)
tive

ECG Unit should be connected to the speci-

(24) Caution
fied ECG cable for the Reference Signal Unit.

(25) Catalog Number

(27) Ejection Pushing this portion will eject the keyboard.

(27) Withstand load The withstand load of the keyboard is 5 kg.

Please use the keyboard carefully.

(27) Caution Do not apply the load exceeding 5 kg (11 lbs)
onto the keyboard.

(29) Batch code

25
Labels

Description of graphic symbols

Location Graphic symbols Description Remarks

Displays the start-up status.

Refer to "Status indicator LED" of "1.6.3
Status indicator LED
Mini Console" for details.
F2 Indication of the state of
readiness of the batteries

The power switch (standby switch) is

Power switch
located on the left side of the side panel of
(Standby switch)
the system.

Refer to "SD memory card" of "1.6.6 Com-

Type of SD memory card
Side panel left side patible Peripheral Devices" for details.

Do not use the system in an examination

while it is connected to any USB devices
USB connector (USB3.0)
other than the devices authorized by Konica
Minolta.

To use DICOM Storage function, the op-

Ethernet connector
tional DICOM Storage License is required.
(100BASE-T)
Please consult your service representative.
Rear panel Do not use the system in an examination
while it is connected to any USB devices
USB connector (USB2.0)
other than the devices authorized by Konica
Minolta.

26

DANGER
• To prevent the risk of injury or explosion, do not
operate this system in a flammable or oxygen-en-
riched atmosphere. Be sure to strictly observe the
following precautions. Otherwise the battery may
leak, overheat, or rupture.
–– Do not expose the battery to fire or heat it.
–– Do not allow the terminals to be connected by
metal or conducting material.
–– The battery must be charged in the system.
–– Do not dismantle or modify the battery.
–– Do not apply solder directly to the battery.
–– The installation orientation of the battery is speci-
fied. When connecting the battery to the system,
be sure not to connect it with the terminals re-
versed.
–– Do not connect the battery to a wall mounted AC
socket outlet or a car cigarette lighter socket.
–– Do not use the battery with systems other than
this system.
–– If liquid leaking from the battery comes into con-
tact with your eyes, flush them immediately with
clean water and consult a physician. Do not rub
your eyes. Failure to follow these measures may
result in blindness.
• Do not use this system for an eyeball examination
or any other examination that may require the pas-
sage of an ultrasound beam through an eyeball.
This system is not designed to be applied to eye-
balls.
• Do not use this system for intracardiac use or direct
cardiac contact. It may injure patients.
27
Labels
WARNING
• Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the main unit.
Doing so may cause an electric shock.
–– To perform repair, special techniques are re-
quired. Contact your service representative.
• Do not insert or remove the mains plug with wet
hands. It can cause an electric shock.
• Do not connect the power supply cord of this
system to a wall mounted AC socket outlet which
is connected to other important medical devices
through the same circuit breakers and fuses. In the
event of this system malfunctioning, a current surge
may occur resulting in other medical devices mal-
functioning, which may injure patients.
• Keep the power supply cord and mains plug safe
from being damaged. For example, do not scratch,
alter, place near a heater, forcibly bend, twist, pull,
place a heavy object on or bundle the power sup-
ply cord and mains plug. Use of a damaged power
supply cord or mains plug can result in an electric
shock, short circuit or fire.
–– Contact your service representative for repair of
the power supply cord and mains plug.
• Do not place devices around the mains plug. It may
pose a risk to the patient as the power is not turned
OFF when needed.
• Do not remove the covers or panels of the system,
as electric shock may result.
• When the system is powered ON, the operator
must not touch any exposed connectors. Doing so
may cause an electric shock.
• Keep liquids away from the system, options or pe-
ripheral devices. Otherwise there is a risk of electric
shock.
• When using other equipment such as an electric
scalpel, high-frequency therapy equipment or elec-
tric stimulator, make sure to keep patients away
from the ultrasound transducer. The patient may
get burned or receive an electric shock.
Labels
WARNING
• Be sure to use the power supply cord that is in-
cluded with the system, and connect the mains
plug (Hospital Grade) to a wall mounted AC socket
outlet. Do not connect the mains plug to a two-pin
socket outlet using conversion adapters, etc. Doing
so may cause an electric shock.
• Where the integrity of the external protective con-
ductor of the facility or its arrangement is doubt-
ful, the system shall be operated with the battery-
powered operation.
• Do not connect a multiple socket-outlet or an exten-
sion cord between the mains plug (with three-core
ground terminal) and a hospital grade mains socket
outlet (three-pin). Doing so may cause an electric
shock.
• Securely insert the mains plug completely in. In-
complete insertion may cause electric shock or fire
through overheat.
–– Do not use damaged plugs or loose socket out-
lets.
–– When the mains plug is not in use, pull it out from
the wall mounted AC socket outlet.
• Routinely remove dust or dirt settling on the mains
plug. Dust or dirt accumulation on the mains plug
may result in an insulation failure, causing a fire.
–– Disconnect the mains plug and wipe it clean with
a dry cloth.
• To prevent electric shock, do not connect any pe-
ripheral units other than external monitor to an ex-
ternal outlet. Peripheral units should be connected
to the service outlet of the Power Extension Unit2.
For the connection procedures, contact your ser-
vice representative.
• Do not connect peripheral units other than AC
adapter or printer authorized by Konica Minolta to
the Power Extension Unit2. Doing so may reduce
the safety of the system.
• When the potential equalization terminal on this
system is connected to the potential equalization
busbar of the facility via a potential equalization
conductor, the potential of connected equipment or
of a connected system is equalized.
28
WARNING
Reference Signal Unit
• To prevent the electric shock, be sure to confirm the
following cautions before use.
–– There should be no abnormality on the ECG cable.
–– ECG Unit should be connected to the specified
ECG cable for the Reference Signal Unit.
• Connect the Reference Signal Unit to the system
prior to attach the ECG electrodes to a patient.
Also, avoid bringing the patient with the ECG elec-
trodes attached into contact with other conductive
parts including grounding. Doing so may cause an
electric shock to the patient when the connector of
the ECG cable touches the live part.
• Do not connect the Reference Signal Unit to any
connector other than USB connector. Doing so may
cause a breakdown.
• Do not let ECG electrodes to touch patient’s heart
directly. Doing so may cause a cardiac arrest.
–– ECG is Type BF applied part, and is not intended
for direct cardiac application.
• Be sure to use the ECG cable that is included with
the Reference Signal Unit.
• The selection and use of ECG electrodes are the
responsibility of a user.
• Remove any ECG electrodes from your patient be-
fore using equipment such as an electric scalpel,
high-frequency therapy equipment, electric stimulator
or electric defibrillator. Also, make sure to keep any
ultrasound transducer away from the patient. The pa-
tient may get burned or receive an electric shock.
Battery
• Do not immerse the battery in water or seawater,
and do not allow the terminal sections to become
wet. Otherwise, the battery may overheat or the ter-
minal sections may rust.
• Do not remove the external cover from the battery
or damage the cover. Doing so may cause the bat-
tery to leak or overheat.
• If leakage, discoloration, deformation, or other ab-
normalities are found in the battery, stop using the
battery.
• If charging fails to complete after the specified re-
charging time has elapsed, immediately stop further
recharging. Otherwise, the battery may leak, over-
heat, or rupture.
• If liquid leaking from the battery comes into contact
with skin or clothing, flush the affected area imme-
diately with clean water. Otherwise, skin problems
may occur.
• The battery has a limited lifetime. If the operating
time is shorter even when the battery has been fully
charged under the specified conditions, replace the
battery with a new one.

CAUTION
• During an examination, do not touch the contact of
the connector, the device connected to the connec-
tor, and the patient at the same time. Touching them
at the same time may cause an electric shock.
• Never keep the transducer on the same region
of the patient’s body to prevent the risk of a low-
temperature burn.
• Do not use this system with a defibrillator. Doing so
may cause an electric shock.
• Do not use this system with an electrical surgical
equipment. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
• Do not place any objects on top of the system.
They may fall, causing injury.
• Do not step on or trip over the power supply cord of
the system. Doing so may cause injury or damage
to the system.
• Before disconnecting the power supply cord from the
wall mounted AC socket outlet, be sure to turn OFF
the power of the system, then clean the system.
• Check and clean the vent holes periodically to
avoid overheating inside the system and a fire.
• Turn the power OFF and disconnect the power sup-
ply cord, and remove the battery before cleaning
the system. Otherwise, there is a risk of electric
shock.
• Do not place the system within 100 mm from the
wall in order to keep the vent holes on both sides of
the system effective. Doing so may get burned or
damage to the system.
• Use new protective gloves and a new transducer
cover to prevent infection each time you use the
transducer.
–– Refer to the FDA’s March 29, 1991 Medical Alert
on Latex Products.
• Use of the Pole Cart2 is the responsibility of the
user.
–– To prevent an accident or injury, be sure to care-
fully read "Pole Cart2" of the "Operation Manual:
Applications" and to follow the instructions there-
in.
• Use a water-based ultrasound gel. Use of other
lubricants may cause transducer degradation and
electric shock.
–– Please select and use an appropriate ultrasound
gel on the market.
• Use this system with proper posture. Use with im-
proper posture by operator may cause injury due to
fatigue.
• Be sure to enter the correct data such as ID, name
and values for doing study. Incorrect data will result
in incorrect diagnosis.
–– Please read this manual to enter the correct ID,
name and values.
29
Labels
CAUTION
• Ultrasound procedures should be used for valid
reasons, for the shortest period of time, and at the
lowest mechanical/thermal index setting necessary
to produce clinically acceptable images. It may in-
jure patients.
• Note the following in regard to the terminals and
connectors on the lateral and rear sides of the sys-
tem.
–– Connect and disconnect the LAN cable after the
power is turned OFF. Its performance cannot be
guaranteed if it is connected or disconnected
while the power is ON.
–– When using a HUB, turn on the HUB first and
then the system.
• Pay attention to the following points when installing
this system.
–– You can operate this system, using the touch
panel. Be sure to place the system on a flat sur-
face under stable conditions. Otherwise, the sys-
tem may become unbalanced and it is likely to
fall when you press on the touch panel and may
cause an injury.
–– When you have installed this system on the Pole
Cart2 etc., operation of the touch panel may
move the system to injure you. Lock and fix the
casters so that the system does not move during
an examination.
–– To raise the height of a Pole Cart2, step on the
pedal while holding on to the Pole Cart2 handle.
To lower the height, step on the pedal while push-
ing both sides of the central part of the system
down from above. Do not apply excess force to
the front and back sides of the LCD monitor as it
may cause a failure of the monitor.
• Pay attention to the following points when carrying
this system.
–– Before moving a system that is not installed on
the Pole Cart2, be sure to fold down the LCD
monitor and lock the LCD latch. When carrying
the system, hold it by the handle with the trans-
ducer in your hand.
–– When moving a system that is installed on the
Pole Cart2, be sure to fold down the LCD monitor
and lock the LCD latch. When carrying the sys-
tem, hold it by the handle of the system.
If you move the system by holding any portion of
it other than the handle, it may overbalance and
cause personal injury.
–– When the system is equipped with an optional
keyboard, house the keyboard before moving the
system.
• Store the ultrasound gel as described in the instruc-
tion manual. Otherwise, there is a risk of infection.
Labels
CAUTION
• Pay attention to the following points when moving
the system.
–– When the system is installed on the Pole Cart2,
do not put heavy equipments on the basket of the
Pole Cart2. Equipments heavier than 2 kg cannot
be put on the basket of the Pole Cart2.
–– Do not lift the system by the holder to prevent it
from falling or being damaged.
–– If you move the system on a Pole Cart2, the sys-
tem may fall or drop when encountering bumps
or slopes. Do not move the system in unstable
conditions. The system may drop and cause an
injury.
• When you have installed this system on a Pole
Cart2, do not lean on the system or push it with ex-
cessive force. The system may overbalance caus-
ing injury.
• Pay attention to the following points when trans-
porting this system, Pole Cart2, or optional items.
–– When transporting this system, Pole Cart2, or
optional items, be extremely careful not to sub-
ject them to any impact referring to "Storage and
transportation environment" of "1.4 Specifica-
tions". The transportation of these is the respon-
sibility of a user. They may be damaged.
–– Do not transport the Pole Cart2 on its side. It may
be damaged.
–– Remove the main unit from the Pole Cart2 when
transporting. They may be damaged.
• Pay attention to the following points when installing
the VESA Attachment.
–– The installation and use of the system on a moni-
tor stand or arm are the responsibility of a user.
To avoid an accident or personal injury, carefully
read the instruction manual for the monitor stand
or the arm and follow safety instructions.
–– Install to any VESA-compliant (installation dimen-
sions: 100 mm x 100 mm) monitor stand and arm
that can withstand loads of 12 kg or more.
–– Connect to the AC adapter to use.
• When the trackball (Clear Ball) is left uncontrolled
in an environment at a temperature exceeding 45°C
for a long period of time, its surface can be rough,
affecting the feeling of operation. Store it in an envi-
ronment at a temperature not exceeding 45°C.
30
CAUTION
• Note the following in regard to the patient ID entry.
–– When performing a study of a new patient, make
sure to register and store the unique patient ID.
Otherwise, the measurement results and other
data cannot be saved in the system. In addition,
the new data may be confused with data for other
patients, which will result in incorrect diagnosis.
–– When starting or restarting the study of a patient,
make sure that the patient ID is correct. Other-
wise the result of the study may be recorded with
an incorrect patient ID.
–– Check the date format when entering the date of
birth to prevent a risk of miscalculation of patient
age.
• Note the following in regard to the study records.
–– When restarting a suspended study, make sure
to check the patient ID and the patient name dis-
played in the upper part of the screen to prevent
a risk of incorrect diagnosis.
Reference Signal Unit
• ECG display is information that is used strictly for
your reference. Do not use these waveforms and
the display for diagnostic or monitoring purposes.
Also, note that the heart rate of your patient may
not be displayed correctly if he/she uses a pace-
maker or an implantable electric stimulator, or has
an arrhythmia.
• Before using the Reference Signal Unit, check ca-
bles for damage, and the connector for looseness.
• Clean the ECG cable periodically.
–– Be careful not to get the ECG clips wet. ECG
waveforms will not be correctly displayed.
–– Do not soak the connector section in water. Sim-
ply wipe it clean with a dry cloth. Entry of water
into the connector can cause a failure.
–– Wipe off any dirt on the ECG cable, using a cloth
dampened with a solution of isopropyl alcohol
diluted down to 30 % to 50 % or 70 % of ethyl
alcohol.
• Wipe off any dirt on the ECG Unit and USB cable
using a soft cloth moistened with a mild detergent.
• The Reference Signal Unit is intended to connect to
a medical device complying with IEC 60601-1. Con-
nect the Reference Signal Unit only to this system.

CAUTION
EMC
• Do not use this system in locations subject to in-
tense electric or magnetic fields (such as MRI or CT
scan equipment) to prevent the risk of interference
and malfunction of this system.
• Do not use this system near equipment emitting
high frequency electromagnetic waves (such as
medical wireless telemeters or cordless phones)
as the system may malfunction or may cause prob-
lems to the equipment.
• Do not move the system closer to or place it on
other equipment. If it is necessary to do so, confirm
that the system can operate properly.
• Note the following in regard to influence of the radio
wave.
–– Do not use strong radio wave emitting de-
vices close to this system to prevent the risk
of interference and malfunction of this system.
For example, it may cause the mini console to
stop its operation. In this case, the operation
means such as the touch panel and the foot
switch can be used instead of the mini console.
Also, it functions normally by resetting the sys-
tem.
–– Portable RF communications equipment (includ-
ing peripheral devices such as antenna cable and
external antenna) should be used keeping 30 cm
(12 inch) or more away from any part of the sys-
tem, including cables specified by manufacturers.
Otherwise, it will reduce the system performance
and may cause system malfunction.
• Only use transducers and cables specified by Kon-
ica Minolta as spare parts. Use of other parts may
result in increased emissions or reduced system
performance and may cause system malfunction.
• Do not use the system in the environment occurring
of electrostatics, etc. When using the Reference
Signal Unit, the system may be into a frozen state
for protection against the interference of electrostat-
ics, etc. In this case, it functions normally by can-
celing FREEZE.
• Pay attention to the following in regard to power
quality.
Power quality should be that of a typical commer-
cial or hospital environment. If the power quality
is deteriorated, there is a risk of interference and
malfunction of the system.
31
Labels
CAUTION
Battery
• Do not throw the battery or subject it to strong im-
pact.
• The battery must be kept out of the hands of chil-
dren. Pay attention not to allow children to remove
the battery from the system while the battery is be-
ing charged or used.
• The battery should be charged in a place which
conforms to the recommended temperature condi-
tions.
• For the battery charging method, refer to "2.2 Pow-
er Supply Cord Connection and Battery Capacity"
in this operation manual.
• Do not use or leave the battery in a hot place; for
example, exposed to direct sunlight, in a hot car, or
in front of a heater. This may cause leakage from
the battery or reduced performance and battery life.
• Be sure to charge the battery before it is used for
the first time after purchase or if the battery has not
been used for a long time.
• If the battery has not been used for a long time,
charging may finish even if the battery is not fully
charged. In this case, repeat the charge and dis-
charge cycle before using the battery.
• Whenever the system is used, the battery should
be connected to the system. If the system is not
used for a long time without connecting the AC
adapter in the state of power OFF, remove the
battery from the system and store the system in a
place with low humidity and in which temperatures
are approximately 20 °C.
• Wipe off any dirt on the terminals with a dry cloth.
If the battery terminals are dirty, poor electrical
connections to the system may occur, causing the
system to be turned OFF or making it impossible to
charge the battery.
• Entrust disposal of the battery to a specialized dis-
posal/recycling company. Do not dispose of the bat-
tery in general waste.
Labels

CAUTION CAUTION
Barcode reader Mini console switch configuration
• Do not damage acrylic window of the barcode read- • Do not press two or more switches on the mini
er. Doing so may cause breakdown. console simultaneously. System malfunction may
• Do not put heavy thing on the cable of the barcode result. The operation of the USER LOG output func-
reader or close it to a heater. Doing so may cause tion (refer to the "Operation Manual: Applications")
breakdown, an electric shock or a fire. is excluded.
• Do not pour water or any liquid on the barcode • The switch configuration on the mini console of this
reader. Doing so may cause breakdown, an electric system can be changed. The switch settings may
shock or a fire. therefore differ depending on the system. Confirm
• Do not use the barcode reader in a hot place; for the switch configuration of your system before use.
example, exposed to direct sunlight, or in front of a • The descriptions in this operation manual are
heater. Doing so may cause breakdown, an electric based on the factory default switch configuration.
shock or a fire. If the switch configuration has been changed, the
• Do not use the barcode reader in dust or high differences between the current configuration and
humidity environment. Doing so may cause break- the default configuration must be understood before
down, an electric shock or a fire. use.
• Do not disassemble the barcode reader. Doing so • The guaranteed operating angle of the trackball is
may cause breakdown. 30 degrees or less with respect to the horizon. If
• Do not give long-term vibration or intense impact the angle is greater than that, do not use the track-
to the barcode reader. Doing so may cause break- ball, just operate the touch panel or the push or dial
down. buttons of the mini console.
• Do not leave the barcode reader in sudden chang-
es in temperature. Doing so may cause breakdown
or deformation of the casing.
• Do not wipe the barcode reader using chemical
agents. Doing so may cause breakdown.
• Do not connect the barcode reader to any connec-
tor other than USB connector of the system. Doing
so may cause breakdown.
• Do not look directly into a laser beam of the bar-
code reader.
• Do not disassemble and look inside of the barcode
reader. Doing so may cause damage to the eye.
• Do not connect multiple barcode readers to one
system. It causes the system to malfunction.
• Check that the patient information read by the bar-
code reader is correct.

32

CAUTION
Measurements
• Do not cancel FREEZE during measurement. Mea-
surement data will be lost.
• Do not put the system into a Shutdown / Standby /
Logout mode during measurement. Measurement
data will be lost.
• Display the most suitable image and select the
most suitable measurement tool for the intended
measurement. The appropriate measurement meth-
ods and results must be determined by a specialist.
• Press SET button to fix the data during measure-
ment or during measurement modification. Confirm
that the measurement is performed correctly.
• Be sure to perform measurement within images. If
the area outside an image is included in a measure-
ment, incorrect diagnosis may result.
• The details of precautions for each measurement
operation and function are described in each chap-
ter. Fully understand the details before using the
system.
• It is also possible to perform a measurement on a
saved image on which another measurement was
made during the examination and to print out the
result. To avoid being confused and misled by the
printed image as it will be viewed later, take ap-
propriate measures, such as keeping a record of or
making a mark on printed images, for ease of iden-
tification. In the case of black-and-white printing,
a measurement or the result of the measurement,
which was already included in a saved image, may
be confused with another measurement, which was
newly made on the saved image, or the result of
another measurement.
• Be careful of measurement errors. Because mea-
surement results include a measured value that
a user measured directly and a calculated value
based on the measured value, different results may
be obtained. Measurement values are obtained
by measurements performed by the user and are
rounded off. Calculation values, on the other hand,
are obtained by calculating measurement values
(internal values) without rounding off in order to im-
prove the accuracy of calculation and then rounding
off the calculation results.
• In two-plane volume measurement (2Pl 3Distance,
2Pl Ellipse and 2Pl Trace), measurement results
can be retained only on a channel that is measur-
ing volume (not determined) even after a FREEZE
state has been canceled. Note that the values of
other channels that have completed their measure-
ment are cleared.
33
Labels
CAUTION
Study Data Review
• Do not display ultrasound images recorded or ed-
ited by other devices on this system. (except library
function) The data may be damaged.
• Back up the saved data (image data and examina-
tion history) periodically and delete unnecessary
data. New data cannot be stored if the free space
on the internal storage is insufficient.
• Store study data after reserving necessary free
space. The free space on the internal storage is
displayed as an icon in the status area. You may
not be able to store data if the available free space
is insufficient.
• If the message "Free space of internal storage has
been small. ..." is displayed, back up the stored
data (image data). Then, delete unnecessary ex-
aminations and images.
• Confirm the dates, patient IDs, and patient names
before deleting the data.
• When using a previously acquired image for diag-
nosis, be sure to check the patient ID, the patient
name and the date of image acquisition displayed
above the image as well as the date of image ac-
quisition displayed below the image. The displayed
patient ID and name may not match the registered
ones if the image has been stored in the internal
storage and the corresponding patient/examination
information has been edited using the patient/ex-
amination information editing form.
Print
• Do not turn OFF the power of the system or put the
system into a standby mode while data is being
printed. Doing so may result in failure of saving or
printing or damage to the data. In addition, doing so
during access to the external storage media may
damage the media.
• Be sure to select the correct image before printing
it.
Labels
CAUTION
Recording devices
• When recording diagnostic images, confirm that
the displayed patient ID and patient are matched.
Recording diagnostic images with an incorrect pa-
tient ID may result in incorrect diagnosis. If the error
message is displayed, the power switches of the
peripheral units and the cables between the system
and the peripheral units must be checked. Contact
your service representative.
• Clips (AVI format) recorded in the internal storage
are always irreversibly compressed. Irreversible
compression is effective for decreasing the volume
of an image, but the quality of the image deterio-
rates in comparison with when the image is not
compressed. Use irreversible compression only
when you have assessed that it does not affect di-
agnosis.
• It is also possible to perform a measurement on a
saved image on which another measurement was
made during the examination and to print out the
result. To avoid being confused and misled by the
printed image as it will be viewed later, take ap-
propriate measures, such as keeping a record of or
making a mark on printed images, for ease of iden-
tification. In the case of black-and-white printing,
a measurement or the result of the measurement,
which was already included in a saved image, may
be confused with another measurement, which was
newly made on the saved image, or the result of
another measurement.
34
CAUTION
Wireless LAN
• Wireless LAN adapter of the system is for indoor
use only. Please remove the wireless LAN adapter
from the system in advance, if the system may be
in the outdoor locations.
• Do not use the wireless LAN adapter in the environ-
ment occurring of magnetic field, electrostatics or
electromagnetic interference, etc. If wireless LAN
connection is cut due to those interferences, use
wired LAN connection.
• When similar wireless LAN adapter exists around
the system, it may occur mutual interference.
Therefore, install the system after inspection of
other wireless LAN to avoid interference.
• For Warnings and Cautions regarding the wireless
LAN adapter, refer to the operation manual of the
wireless LAN adapter.
• Where the strength of the wireless signal is weak,
please move to a place of strong signal or use
wired LAN connection.
• It is recommended to connect the wireless LAN
adapter to the USB connector on the lateral side
of the system. The communication rate may be
reduced depending on the positional relationship
between the wireless LAN adapter and the access
point.
Regarding data transfer in weak wireless signal
connection
• When transferring several files, transfer of the cur-
rent file cannot be interrupted. Wait for the trans-
fer to be completed. After current transferring file
completes data transfer, data transfer can be inter-
rupted.
Regarding operations during start-up
• When the system is starting up, avoid touching the
LCD monitor until the start-up process is complete.
Otherwise, the sensitivity of the touch panel cannot
be adjusted accurately.
• Do not press the optional USB keyboard during
start-up. Otherwise, the system may malfunction.
 Important Information

(1) Specialized knowledge is required for proper maintenance and inspections. Maintenance of this system should
be done by qualified persons or experts.
(2) Deterioration of electrical and mechanical safety characteristics (such as generation of a leakage current or de-
formation/abrasion of mechanical parts) and of image sensitivity and resolution may occur over a period of time.
A maintenance service contract is recommended to avoid accidents and erroneous diagnosis, and to maintain
system performance.
(3) This system should only be used by fully qualified and certified medical personnel. This system should be used
only by persons conversant with the basic principles and techniques of ultrasound examinations and adequately
trained in clinical procedures.
(Please carefully read the Operation Manual for the ULTRASOUND SYSTEM before operation. This Operation
Manual includes all the information needed for using the ULTRASOUND SYSTEM. Please contact your service
representative if you have any question.)
(4) This system is designed to provide physicians with data for clinical diagnosis.
(5) Important data must be backed up to an external recording media.
(6) Do not make changes or modifications to this system (including software).
(7) Konica Minolta offers after-sales services at user's expense. Maintenance and inspection services to maintain
the performance of this system are also available. Contact your service representative for more information.
(8) This manual contains important Safety Precautions & Warnings and operating instructions to ensure the safe
and proper use of the system.
(9) Failure to comply with these warnings and cautions may result in system failure, injury or property damage.
(10) Do not connect any peripheral devices other than an SD memory card recommended for the system and the
USB devices described in this operation manual with the connector of the system. Doing so may cause an elec-
tric shock, or a failure, interference or malfunction of the system.
Selection, installation, and use of the SD memory card and the USB devices described in this operation manual
are the responsibility of the user.
Use of the SD memory card and the USB devices described in this operation manual could result in unforesee-
able risks to patients, operators or third parties. Identifying, analyzing, evaluating and controlling these risks are
the responsibility of the user attempting to use the USB port with third party hardware. Subsequent changes to
the connection of peripheral devices could introduce new risks and require additional analysis.
"Changes" include;
• changes in the configurations (structures) of peripheral devices,
• connection of additional items to the connector,
• disconnecting items from the connector,
• update of equipment connected to the connector,
• upgrade of equipment connected to the connector.
(11) Do not give mechanical shock to the transducer. (Do not forcibly press it against hard objects, and do not drop
it. Do not forcibly twist or bend the cable.)
Doing so may cause failure of the transducer.
(12) Do not forcibly press on the system.
Doing so may cause failure of the system.
(13) Do not ride, sit or lean on the system.
Doing so may cause failure of the system.
(14) Do not rub the LCD screen with a hard material or press the LCD screen with strong force.
Doing so may cause failure of the LCD screen.
(15) Do not attempt to display any ultrasound images which were recorded or edited on a different system.
Doing so may cause damage to the images. (except library function)
(16) To prevent damage, do not use or keep the system in locations that are:
• exposed to direct sunlight or X-rays
• subject to sudden changes in temperature
• dusty
• subject to vibration or shock
• near heat generators
• high humidity
• environment with fear of infection

35
Important Information

(17) Use the system under the specified environmental conditions.

Otherwise, it may cause failure of the system.
(18) The following instructions must be observed in order to prevent this system from being infected with malware
(malicious software, such as a computer virus or worm that harms computers).
If the system is infected with malware, the data stored in the system may be lost, tampered with, or leaked; the
system may malfunction; or the system may become a source of malware infection to other products.
• When external storage media are to be used, confirm in advance that the media are not infected with malware.
• The network to connect to should be secure from malware infection.
• Do not perform any other actions that may result in malware infection.
(19) Before disconnecting the power supply cord from the wall mounted AC socket outlet, make sure that the power
to the system is turned OFF or that the battery is fully charged.
Otherwise, the system may fail.
(20) For measurement, use the ultrasound images displayed on the LCD screen.
An incorrect diagnosis may occur when you make a guess at what lies outside the currently-displayed ultra-
sound image on the LCD screen to make a measurement.
(21) Note the following when using or storing the transducer.
• Always place the transducer into the holder with its acoustic lens facing upward to prevent damage.
• Do not sterilize when cleaning and disinfecting the transducer. Doing so may cause failure of the transducer.
• Do not place the transducer in heated water exceeding 40 °C (104 °F). Doing so may cause failure of the
transducer.
• Do not expose the transducer to fluids that contain organic solvents (excluding, however, the cleaners and dis-
infectants described in this manual).
Doing so may damage it. There is also a risk of electric shock.
(22) Note the following in regard to output setting of the acoustic power level.
Before using the system, users need to thoroughly understand the basic workings of the ultrasound biological
cause and effect. Users also need to fully understand that introduction of MI/TI will improve the diagnostic ability
of a patient’s condition.
For details on MI/TI, refer to "Chapter 9 MI/TI".
(23) To avoid damage, note the following when cleaning the system.
• Turn the power OFF and disconnect the power supply cord, and remove the battery.
• Do not apply strong pressure to the LCD screen.
• Do not wipe the LCD screen with a hard cloth.
• If necessary, wipe the LCD screen with a soft damp cloth. Do not use detergents or chemical agents.
• Do not use organic solvents (such as benzine, paint thinner, and alcohol) or abrasive cleaners.
• Do not leave water drops on the LCD screen as it may cause failure of the LCD screen.
(24) Note the following in regard to external storage media or peripheral devices.
• Do not connect any broken external storage media or printer. Doing so may cause failure, interference and
malfunction of the system.
• After use, disconnect the SD memory card, USB external storage media, USB microphone or printer from the
system. Do not leave devices other than the printer connected when performing a study. Doing so may cause
an electric shock, injury to the patient, failure, interference and malfunction of the system.
• When connecting external storage media or peripheral devices, choose a model that complies with the safety
standards and regulations of the device.
• Selection, installation, and use of external storage media and printer are the responsibility of the user.
• Do not connect any peripheral device to an external outlet. Doing so may cause an electric shock. To provide
power to a peripheral device, you need to connect it to a Power Extension Unit2. When making connections to
a Power Extension Unit2, contact your service representative.
• Do not connect anything other than the AC adapter or peripheral devices to a Power Extension Unit2. Doing
so may impair the safety of the system.
(25) Note the following in regard to file operations of study data.
• Confirm the patient ID and patient name before erasing the data. The data erased cannot be restored.
• Do not turn OFF the system’s power switch while printing, exporting or importing study data. Otherwise the
study data may fail or the peripheral devices may fail.

36
 Important Information

(26) Observe the instructions below to prevent damage of the user’s network environment (e.g., unstable operation
and security hole).
• Users should configure secure environment, manage risks and follow the instructions for use when using net-
work/external storage media/printer.
–– Users should identify, analyze, assess and manage the risks.
–– Repeated change of network/external storage media/printer may lead to another risk, which will require ad-
ditional analysis.
–– Change of network/external storage media/printer includes the following.
–– Change of configuration of network/external storage media/printer
–– Connection of additional device to network/external storage media/printer
–– Removal of the device from network/external storage media/printer
–– Update of the device connected to network/external storage media/printer
–– Upgrade of the device connected to network/external storage media/printer
–– Connection should be made after confirmation of the network environment.
–– Check specifications of the LAN cable. (This system supports 100BASE-T.)
–– Do not duplicate a network ID.
–– Do not share files.
–– Do not use file-sharing software.
–– Do not perform any other actions that may adversely affect the network environment.
–– Keep the environment protected from unauthorized access.
–– Do not connect the system to the Internet.
(27) Observe the instructions below in using wireless LAN.
• Turn off the system before attaching or detaching the wireless LAN adapter.
• Do not connect multiple wireless LAN adapters to the system at the same time.
(28) Observe the instructions below in using Reference Signal Unit.
• Turn off the system before connecting or disconnecting the USB cable of the Reference Signal Unit.
(29) Please observe the following instructions as cyber security controls.
• In the facility/organization this system is used, or in the operation facility of the network connected with this
system, if the information security management system has not been established, please recommend the chief
administrator of the facility to establish the system.
• In the facility/organization this system is used, or in the operation facility of the network connected with this
system, if the risk management of IT network has not been implemented, please recommend the chief admin-
istrator of the facility to implement the risk management.
• If the education about information security has not been provided to the users of this system, please recom-
mend to educate them.
• Please do not connect the devices that are not allowed to be connected with this system.
• Please use anti-virus license (optional) if a virus infection risk is assumed.
• If anti-virus license is used and the message "The handle is invalid." is displayed, there is a possibility of a se-
curity breach. In this case, promptly disconnect the system from the network, report to the chief administrator
of the facility, and then provide a response based on the information management procedures in the facility. To
continue the examination in an emergency, conduct with the system disconnected from the network.
• Please establish and maintain the operating rules for the User Account, such as the followings.
–– The password must contain some numbers, upper / lower case, the number of characters must be 8 char-
acters or more, etc. in order not to be guessed by a third party easily.
–– Do not leave the record of the password in order not to be known to a third party.
–– Set the expiration date for the password and change regularly.
• Please establish and maintain the operating rules for services account, such as the following.
–– Manage the user name and password for the Maintenance function appropriately in order not to be known
to a third party.

37
Important Information

(30) This system is intended for use in the following environment.

• Hospital facilities
• Indoor examination room that is managed equivalent to hospital facilities
• Inspection rooms
• Wards
• Emergency rooms
(31) Do not use this system in the following environment.
• Outdoor locations
• Land vehicle in transit
• Vessel and aircraft
• In the vicinity of near field radio frequency identification (RFID) system
• In the vicinity of antitheft system
• In the vicinity of high-frequency surgical equipment
• In the vicinity of magnetic resonance imaging ME system

38
 Disclaimer

(1) This manual may not be reprinted in part or in whole without prior consent.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
(3) In no event shall Konica Minolta be liable for any loss or damage resulting from the installation, relocation,
modifications, maintenance and/or repairs of the system by any persons other than Konica Minolta or service
contractors authorized by Konica Minolta.
(4) Konica Minolta shall not be liable for any loss or damage caused to Konica Minolta’s products by another com-
pany’s products other than those delivered by Konica Minolta.
(5) Konica Minolta shall not be liable for any loss or damage the system may sustain that results from maintenance
or repairs involving the use of repair parts other than the genuine parts authorized by Konica Minolta.
(6) Konica Minolta shall not be liable for any damage or loss that results from failing to follow the warnings, precau-
tions and operating instructions specified in this Operation Manual.
(7) Konica Minolta shall not be liable for any loss or damage caused by a failure to meet the installation conditions
for the system, such as the power source and installation environment described in the installation requirements
of the operation manual.
(8) Konica Minolta shall not be liable for any loss or damage caused by fire, earthquake, flood, lightning or any
other act of GOD.
(9) Konica Minolta shall not be liable for any loss or damage resulting from any use of the system other than for its
intended purposes.
(10) The responsibility for a diagnosis and a medical treatment lies with a physician who gives them. Konica Minolta
shall not be liable for the conditions for a diagnosis and a medical treatment and the results of them.
(11) Konica Minolta, Inc. is unable to assume any liability relating to the following events arising due to systems in-
fected by computer viruses, worms and other malicious software potentially harmful to computers (hereunder
referred to as "malwares"):
–– The erasure, corruption, or unwanted disclosure of data stored within this device, including personal and sen-
sitive patient information.
–– Malfunction of the device or accidents occurring as a result of the malfunction of the device.
–– Infection of other products upon connection with the device, or damages arising therefrom.
(12) Whenever you use this service, you are required to take some security or safety measures for the following
items related to the service:
Please understand that Konica Minolta, Inc. is unable to assume liability for certain events, such as malfunc-
tions or incidents of information leakage resulting from such events.
–– Client and network equipment managed by our facility
–– The network and ISP in our facility used for connection with this service
–– Your equipment to be connected to the same network as that of this service
(13) When this device is used, various user and patient data stored within the device and external storage devices
must be adequately managed under the full responsibility of the user. Konica Minolta, Inc. is unable to assume
any liability relating to damages arising due to leakage of various data at the time of disposal.
(14) Please understand that Konica Minolta, Inc. is unable to assume any liability for any troubles that result from
any change in the operating system or application software which is not described in this notice.
(15) This service is provided under the assumption that individually owned devices (BYOD) are not being used.
Please understand that we cannot take responsibility for the use of individually owned devices and any informa-
tion leakage or the like that may result from such use.
(16) Konica Minolta shall not be liable for any consequential or secondary damage resulting from any diagnostic er-
rors due to data input by the user.
(17) Konica Minolta shall not be liable for any loss of data stored in the memory of this system caused by operating
errors or accidents.
(18) When connecting the SD memory card, the USB external storage media, USB microphone or the printer to this
system, users are responsible for the use of them. Konica Minolta shall not be liable for any damage resulting
from connecting the SD memory card, the USB external storage media, USB microphone or the printer to this
system.
(19) When connecting an external monitor to the system, users are responsible for the use of it. Konica Minolta shall
not be liable for any damage resulting from connecting the external monitor.

39
 Software License

The software used for this system includes software owned by Konica Minolta and licensed to Konica Minolta by a
Licensor. Konica Minolta sells the system on which this software is installed by licensing a user of the system to use
the software.
Therefore, users are required to observe the following items when using the software of this system.

zz Definition
"Licensed software" (hereinafter referred to as software) includes all computer programs and related documenta-
tion used in the relevant system.

zz License
• The software must be used only for this system.
• The intellectual property and related documents of this software are not assigned to you.
• You may not copy the software or documents, nor modify the software in whole or in part.
• You may not recompile or reassemble the software.
• You may not assign, rent, or sublicense the software or documents to a third party.

40
 Support

For all product inquiries, contact your service representative.

41
42
 Chapter
1
Product Overview

43
 1.1 Intended Use

The Ultrasound System SONIMAGE HS2 is a portable IMPORTANT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

ultrasound system for general purposes.
• The system should not be used by persons other
This system provides ultrasound images in all its
than fully qualified and certified medical personnel.
modes of B-mode, M-mode, Color Flow-mode,
• The system should be used under the supervision
Doppler-mode, and Elastography-mode. The system
of an operator.
provides ultrasound imaging information such as used
• The method of applying or using the system is
for the purpose of diagnosing the human body, which
shown in "Chapter 3 Starting Examination" and
visually represents the internal geometry, characteris-
"Chapter 4 Diagnosis Mode" of this operation man-
tics and dynamics of the human body, and transmits /
ual.
receives ultrasound waves to obtain image data of the
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
visual representation.

This system conforms to Real Time Display of Thermal

and Mechanical Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultra- 1.1.1 Indication for Use State-
sound Equipment (Track 3). Transducers have their ments
own characteristic applications, and are brought into
The Ultrasound System SONIMAGE HS2 and its trans-
contact with the body surface. For the transducers that
ducers are products designed to collect ultrasonic im-
can be used with this system and their applications,
age data of the human body for diagnostic purposes.
refer to "1.6.7 Connectable Transducers and Biopsy
The system employs the ultrasonic pulse-echo method
Brackets". The ultrasound images displayed by this
to visualize the anatomic structures, characteristics,
system can also be used for real-time observation dur-
and dynamics of the human body, and using an image
ing biopsy procedures.
display, Doppler display and / or Doppler sound, offers
There is panoramic view as a reference display.
a procedure applied to the human body for medical di-
Intended Patient Population
agnosis or examination. The range of intended clinical
a) Age group: any patient age
applications is same as other conventional ultrasound
b) Weight range: any patient weight
imaging systems for general purpose, such as small
parts, abdomen, obstetrics, gynecology, musculoskel-
DANGER •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• etal (soft tissue), peripheral vascular, and Cardiac.
• Do not use this system for an eyeball examination
or any other examination that may require the pas-
sage of an ultrasound beam through an eyeball.
This system is not designed to be applied to eye-
1.1.2 Contraindication
balls.
• Do not use flammable or explosive gases near this This system is contraindicated for an eyeball examina-
system, or use this system in a high-oxygen envi- tion or any other examination that may require the pas-
ronment. This system is not explosion-proof. sage of an ultrasound beam through an eyeball.
• Do not use it together with a defibrillator. Doing so This system is NOT designed for use in direct contact
may cause performance degradation or failure of to central nerves and cardiac systems.
the system.
• Do not use this system for intracardiac use or di-
rect cardiac contact. It may injure patients.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

44
 1.2 Features

zz Clear B image

Chapter 1
The adoption of the full digital transmission / reception circuit allows high-definition beams, helping achieve high-
quality / high-sensitivity images.
In particular, the device structures and constituent materials of linear transducers have been improved to provide
high quality images.

zz Biopsy needle enhance display

Our own image processing technology has enabled an enhanced display of the needle being used in a biopsy proce-
dure.

zz Compact size
Small sized and battery-powered. It is also removable from the Pole Cart2 for easy carrying. Needless to say, it is
designed to allow you to conveniently move this system mounted on the Pole Cart2 in a hospital.

zz Intuitive operation
Unlike conventional diagnostic ultrasound systems that required a large number of keys, we decided to minimize the
number of keys. It has accomplished non-conventional, intuitive operation through the use of a touch panel.

zz IT cooperation
Enhanced cooperation with IT systems in medical facilities, such as PACS and RIS. It gives usability as if other
equipment were installed in it, and contributes to reducing the time required for diagnosis.

45
 1.3 Operating Principles

This system transmits ultrasound signals into the human body from an ultrasound transducer and receives the re-
flected echoes from the human body using the same transducer. It then processes the received signals to display
them as images on a display screen (LCD monitor) and to generate Doppler sound from a speaker.
Gating signals are sent from the scan control circuit through the transmission delay circuit and are input to the trans-
mission circuit. The transmission circuit then generates the transmission signals (electrical pulses) according to the
gating signals.

These electrical pulses are applied to piezoelectric elements that convert the electrical signals into mechanical vibra-
tions in the transducer. When the ultrasound signals transmitted into the human body encounter a substance with
different acoustic characteristics, they are reflected and return to the transducer as echoes. The transducer mechani-
cally vibrates due to ultrasonic vibration, converts the ultrasound signals to electrical signals through mechanical-
electrical conversion, processes these received signals, and displays them on the image display screen. Based on
the time required for the ultrasound signals to return to the transducer, the distance between the transducer surface
and the reflecting substance can be determined.

This system supports linear, convex and sector scanning techniques.

In B-mode imaging, the echo amplitudes are represented as brightness changes on the image display screen. Since
the ultrasound beam attenuates in tissue, the degree of amplification required generally increases as depth increas-
es. Regions of high reflection are displayed as brighter, while regions of low reflection appear darker.
In color flow imaging, phase detection is performed in a receive signal processing circuit to obtain I and Q signals.
These signals undergo frequency analysis with the correlational method in a color flow imaging circuit to produce the
mean velocity, variance, and power information of the blood flow. These information items are assigned color signals
and represented as real-time two-dimensional color flow images.
In Doppler imaging, the signals output from the receive signal processing circuit are frequency-analyzed by fast
Fourier transform (FFT) in a Doppler circuit to produce velocity and power information. A Doppler image is then dis-
played, plotting velocity on the vertical axis, time on the horizontal axis, and representing power as brightness.
The basic measurements are possible, including distance, time, angle, and trace. Combinations of some basic mea-
surements are also possible.

46
 1.4 Specifications

Item Description

Chapter 1
Ambient temperature :10 °C to 35 °C
Relative humidity :30 % to 80 % (no condensation)
Operation environment
Atmospheric pressure :700 hPa to 1060 hPa
Altitude :3000 m or less

Ambient temperature:
-20 °C to 60 °C (30 days)
-20 °C to 40 °C (90 days)
-20 °C to 20 °C (1 year)
Storage and transportation envi- (The following applies when the main unit is equipped with the Clear Ball (option).):
ronment -10 °C to 45 °C (30 days)
-10 °C to 40 °C (90 days)
-10 °C to 20 °C (1 year)

Relative humidity :20 % to 80 % (no condensation)

Atmospheric pressure :700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Main Unit
Line voltage :DC 24 V
Power consumption :7.5 A
AC Adapter
Line voltage :AC 100 V to 240 V
Power Input Line frequency :50 Hz / 60 Hz
Power consumption :2.5 A
Power Extension Unit2
Line voltage :AC 100 V to 240 V
Line frequency :50 Hz / 60 Hz
Power consumption :4.05 A to 1.81 A

Main Unit
Power Output Power-supply voltage :DC 12 V
Current capacity :0.6 A

Main Unit :7.9 kg (including Battery)

Mass
System :45 kg or less (including Pole Cart2)

369 mm (W) × 90 mm (H) × 452 mm (D)

Size (A height of 366 mm in a state where the LCD monitor is opened in an upright position, with its
projections excepted)

Size :15 inch (38 cm)

Display (LCD monitor)
Resolution :1024 (W) × 768 (H)

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For measurement accuracy, refer to "11.3 Accuracy of Measurement".
• For transducer specifications, refer to "8.1.2 Specifications of Transducer".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

47
 1.5 Patient Environment

This system is designed to be used in the environment specified in the figure below.
However, the external monitor should be used on the outside of patient environment. Note that, when using the ex-
ternal monitor, you have to observe the following items.
• Use an external monitor that complies with IEC 60950-1 or equivalent safety standards.
• As for the power to the external monitor, connect the mains plug to a wall mounted AC socket outlet.
• When using an external monitor, connect the system to a wall mounted AC socket outlet via the AC adapter and
the mains plug. Avoid using an external monitor with the battery-powered operation.

2.5 m
1.5 m 1.5 m

m
1.5

48
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

Chapter 1
1.6.1 Standard Configuration

No. Item Quantity (pieces)

(1) Main unit of the system (The LCD monitor is included.) 1

AC adapter (100 V to 240 V supported)

Model: ATM200T-P240 (Manufacturer: Adapter Technology)
(2) 1
Fuse (A user is not able to replace the fuse.)
Fuse size of F1 and F2 : φ 4 × 11 mm

(3) Power supply cord 1

(4) Battery 1

(5) Notes on safety 1

Operation Manuals CD-ROM (Includes Fundamentals, Applications, and Acoustic

(6) 1
Power Manual)

(7) Start-up Guide 1

(8) AIUM Book (U.S.A. only) 1

49
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

1.6.2 Part Name

zz Front (when used)

LCD monitor
Touch panel-type LCD

Air vent
Mini console

Transducer connector lock

Transducer connector
(without a transducer mounted)

Handle
• You can hold the handle for carrying the system.

zz Rear (when used)

Power supply cord

Battery

Side panel
(Right side)

LCD latch

Side panel
Rear panel (Left side)

Power switch
AC adapter

50
 1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
To open the monitor
1 Press the LCD latch, and raise the monitor.

Chapter 1
LCD latch

2 Rotate the monitor 180 degrees.

• Rotate it so the monitor surface faces the mini console.

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

51
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

1.6.3 Mini Console

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not press two or more switches on the mini console simultaneously. System malfunction may result. The opera-
tions of the USER LOG output function (refer to the "Operation Manual: Applications") and the pointer display func-
tion (refer to "5.6.1 Operation Items") are excluded.
• The switch configuration on the mini console of this system can be changed. The switch settings may therefore differ
depending on the system. Confirm the switch configuration of your system before use.
• The descriptions in this operation manual are based on the default switch configuration. If the switch configuration
has been changed, the differences between the current configuration and the default configuration must be under-
stood before use.
• The guaranteed operating angle of the trackball is 30 degrees or less with respect to the horizon. If the angle is
greater than that, do not use the trackball, just operate the touch panel or the push or dial buttons of the mini con-
sole.
The mini console has nine keys, to which various functions are assigned, and status indicator LEDs.
–– A key refers to a push button, dial button, or trackball.
–– The dial buttons can be used both as dial buttons that are rotated to the left and right, and as push buttons.

F2 button Status indicator LED F1 button

SET button Gain button

EXIT button

SET F2 F1 Gain
EXIT

1
User FREEZE

2
User

Trackball FREEZE button

User 2 button

User 1 button

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

52
 1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

zz Main functions of mini console keys

Item Functions

EXIT button Ends a currently-used application or the like.

Chapter 1
SET button Accepts the selection.
When operating with the trackball, move the cursor to the desired position and press
the SET button to accept the selection. In the procedures described in this operation
manual, "click(ing)" refers to a series of operations of this trackball and the SET button.

F1 button The function to be used differs depending on mode, etc.

Refer to "Default settings for mini console keys" of "1.6.3 Mini Console".
F2 button

Trackball Rotating the trackball makes the cursor move in the direction of the trackball rotation.
It is used to move the measurement cursor on an image or to scroll a Cine image.

Gain button Optimizes the contrast or brightness of an image to make an automatic adjustment.
Button: automatically adjusts an image.
Left rotation: reduces gain to make an image darker.
Right rotation: increases gain to make an image brighter.

User 1 button The function to be used differs depending on mode, etc.

Refer to "Default settings for mini console keys" of "1.6.3 Mini Console".
User 2 button

FREEZE button In a live state, pressing this button freezes the image being scanned. In a freeze state,
pressing this button restores the image to a live state.
Live state: the button is lit orange.
Freeze state: the button is lit blue.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can change the assignment function to customize any keys other than the trackball, F2 button and FREEZE
button.
Refer to "Key Assignment Function" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
• To check mini console key assignments, display Console Guide by pressing the [Menu] button > [Other] tab > [Console
Guide] button. Touch the screen, or operate the mini console, to hide the Console Guide again.
• When you press a mini console button or dial button, a operation sound is emitted.
• The operation sound volume is adjustable.
Refer to "System Screen"of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

53
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

zz Default settings for mini console keys

The roles of the button to which the SET *3 function is assigned and the FREEZE button do not change depending
on the image mode or functions being run when the buttons are pressed. Other key defaults are listed below.

CFM / PDI / 2D-TDI / PW / CW /

Key B-mode M-mode Elastography-mode
SCF-mode PW-TDI-mode

EXIT
[Update] -
button

F2 ∗3 Operation item switching

button Rotate function∗3

F2 Rotate 1 [Focus Position] [B Gain] [Angle Correct.] [Blend Ratio]

F2 Rotate 2 - [Ana-M Angle] - [Gate Size] -

Trackball Active function of operation item

F1 ∗1∗4
Switching of functions assigned to the dial
button

[Depth] /
F1 ∗1∗6 [Depth] / [Depth] /
[Zoom Ratio]
dial [Zoom Ratio] - [Zoom Ratio] [D Scale]
(with Zoom
function1 (with Zoom enabled) (with Zoom enabled)
enabled)∗7

F1 ∗1∗6
[Focus [Focus
dial - [C Scale] [D Baseline]
Position] Position]∗7
function2

Gain ∗1
[Simple Adjust]∗5 - [Simple Adjust]∗5 [Simple Adjust]∗5 [Simple Adjust]∗5
button

Gain ∗1
[B Gain] [M Gain] [C Gain] [D Gain] [B Gain]
dial

User 1
[Dual L]∗2 ∗8
button

User 2
[Dual R]∗2 ∗8
button

54
 1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

Body mark Compare view

Key Measure function Text function Other
function function

EXIT

Chapter 1
[EXIT]
button

F2 ∗3 Operation item switching

-
button Rotate function∗3

[Undo Measure] / [Auto Annotation] [Transducer angle

F2 Rotate 1 - -
[Redo Measure] [Rotate Arrow] rotation]

F2 Rotate 2 - - [BodyMark Select] - -

Trackball Active function of operation item Free cursor

F1 ∗1∗4
Switching of functions assigned to the dial -
button

F1 ∗1∗6
dial - - - - -
function1

F1 ∗1∗6
dial - - - - -
function2

Gain ∗1
- - - - -
button

Gain ∗1
- - - - -
dial

User 1
[Dual L]∗2 -
button

User 2
[Dual R]∗2 -
button

∗1: As the default settings, assigns [Multi. Function] to F1 , and [Multi. Gain] to Gain .
∗2: [Dual L] or [Dual R] button. Button functions vary depending on the Dual Layout setting (U/D or L/R).
∗3: The Rotate function assigned for the F2 button allows you to switch functions between "F2 Rotate 1" and "F2 Rotate 2", which
are allocated to each mode, each time you press the SET button.
∗4: Functions can be assigned to the dial in each of a live/frozen state.
∗5: Simple Adjust can be turned on by single-clicking and off by double-clicking.
∗6: When the F1 button is pressed, the F1 dial switches to the functions assigned to "F1 dial function1" and "F1 dial function2".
For information about the dial function assignments, refer to "Multi. Function Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
∗7: If the MultiFunction key has not been assigned to Elastography-mode, assign the MultiFunction key in B-mode.
∗8: Elastography-mode is enabled only in Single Display-mode.

55
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

zz Software trackball
You can use the system simply by using on-screen touch control.
Press the [Menu] button > the [Other] tab > the [Trackball] button to display the software trackball.
Another way to display the software trackball is to press the [Measure] button.
The software trackball appears at the lower left corner of the screen.
• The functions and operation procedure of its buttons are the same as the mini console’s.
• To change the software trackball display position, touch and drag any area other than the buttons and the software
trackball.
• To hide the trackball, either press the [×] button, activate the free cursor, or switch to a screen other than the study
screen.
To display the hidden trackball again, press the [Menu] button > [Other] tab > [Trackball] button.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To use the software trackball at the start of measurement, turn ON [Measurement Start with Software Trackball] in
the [Measure & Report] tab on the [Setup] screen.
Refer to "Measure & Report Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

[×] button

[SET] button*

Software trackball

[EXIT] button*

*: Operates in the same manner as the SET / EXIT button on the mini console. This is an example of assign-
ments during measurement mode.

zz Status indicator LED

The status indicator LEDs turn on / off, blink, or change color to indicate their active status to be notified.
Item Functions

Power Displays the start-up status.

• Not-yet-started: turns off
• During start-up and ready for use: turns green
• During standby: blinks in orange
Battery Displays the battery driving / AC connection status.
• Charging: turns orange
• During operation on battery power: turns off
• During operation on battery power (low battery level): blinks in orange
• Full charge: turns green

56
 1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

1.6.4 Side Panel / Rear Panel

Chapter 1
The power switch and various connectors, etc. are located on the side / rear panels.

Side panel
The peripheral devices can be connected to each side panel.

zz Left side (when used)

(1) (2) (3)

No. Name Functions

(1) Power switch (Standby switch) Power ON/OFF (Standby)

(2) USB3.0 port USB system connector

(3) SD memory card slot SD memory card connector

zz Right side (when used)

(1) (2)

No. Name Functions

(1) Transducer connector Transducer connection

(2) Transducer connector lock Lock / unlock lever for transducer connection

57
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

Rear panel
The peripheral devices can be connected to the rear panel.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (5)

No. Name Functions

(1) Power connector AC adapter cable inlet

(2) Security lock Security wire installation hole

(3) DVI-D terminal Output terminal for external imaging system

(4) Ethernet connector Output terminal for network transfer of digital images

(5) USB2.0 port USB system connector (2 locations)

58
 1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

1.6.5 Monitor

Chapter 1
The LCD monitor displays various pieces of information including ultrasound images.
The system can be operated using the touch panel, in addition to the keys on the mini console.
This section describes the displays and functions shared by screens and the handling of the keys on the monitor and
mini console.
Status indicator icon KONICA MINOLTA Logo

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• There may be some missing dots or light-emitting dots on the LCD monitor screen. This is common with LCD panels
and does not mean that the LCD monitor is defective.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Using the right/left layout switch function changes the screen layout. The screens pictured in this manual are not us-
ing the left/right layout switch function.
• For left/right layout switch function, refer to "5.6.5 Left/right Layout Switch Function".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

59
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

zz Touch panel function

You can press (touch) the desired button or option on the monitor to select it, or move (drag) a thumbnail to the de-
sired location using your finger.
• Available buttons and functions differ depending on the mode or application being used.
• Only available functions are displayed on the screen or become selectable.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When operating the touch panel, do not operate the trackball simultaneously. Also, to prevent an unintended opera-
tion, do not place your hand on the trackball when not using it.
• If there are sources of vibrations in the vicinity of the system, the vibrations may transfer to the system and may
cause the trackball to move. If there are sources of vibrations in the vicinity of the system, keep a sufficient distance
between sources of vibrations and the system so that vibrations do not transfer to the system.
• Very occasionally, even though you do not touch it, the trackball may react to small vibrations. When the touch panel
does not respond or responds slowly, this phenomenon may be happening. In this case, moving the trackball inten-
tionally will prevent this phenomenon.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

zz Monitor brightness / Contrast adjustment

Press the [Menu] button > [Other] tab > [Brightness / Contrast] button to display the [Brightness / Contrast] adjust-
ment window.
The value is adjustable within the range from 0 to 100.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The following Brightness/Contrast settings are recommended depending on the primary use location.
Room condition Brightness setting Contrast setting
Poorly lit rooms
30
(inspection rooms)
50 to 60
Brightly lit rooms
40
(consultation rooms)
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

zz Status indicator icon

Status indicator icons turn on / off, blink, or change color to indicate their active status to be notified.
In the case of an error, "!" is placed on each icon.
(1)
(2)
(3)

(6)
(5)
(4)

60
 1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

No. Item Timing of display Functions

(1) Network connection Always when you already Displays when connected to a network via wired LAN connec-
status have the network set up tion.

Chapter 1
Not connected:

Connection established:

Network error:

Refer to "Network Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applica-

tions".

(2) USB storage connec- When USB storage is con- Displays when USB storage is connected.
tion status nected

(3) Internal storage Always The remaining capacity of Internal Storage is displayed. Press-
capacity status ing an icon displays free space and capacity.

50 GB or more:

25 to 50 GB:

5 to 25 GB:

Less than 5 GB:

(4) Battery connection Always Displays when connected to the battery.

status Pressing the icon displays the battery status.

Refer to "2.2.3 Battery Capacity".

(5) SD memory card When an SD memory card is Displays when connected to an SD memory card.
connection status connected

Connected:

(6) Image store / print When an image is being In response to storing or printing an image, one of the following
status stored / printed icons is displayed.

Still images storing status:

Clips storing status:

Reports storing status:

Printing status:

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The status indicator icon may not reach 100% even when the battery is fully charged. If this happens, discharge the
battery and then charge the battery again.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

61
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

Information of service representative

zz How to show
Touch the KONICA MINOLTA logo area, or click it with a free cursor, to display the information of service representa-
tive in a pop-up window.

• [System Name]
• [System Serial Number]
• [System Version]
• [Service representative]
[Name:]
[Address:]
[TEL:]
[Service engineer:]
[E-mail address:]
• [Console Guide] button: hides the pop-
up window and displays the Console
Guide.
You can also change the panel type in
the Console Guide.

• [Power] button :

displays the shutdown confirmation

message dialog box. This button can be
used instead of the power switch.
Refer to "2.3.2 Turn OFF the Power".
• [Touch Disable] button: starts up Touch
Off mode.
Refer to "5.6.4 Touch invalidation
mode".

zz How to hide
Touch the screen while the pop-up window is displayed or operate the mini console key to hide the pop-up window.

62
 1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

1.6.6 Compatible Peripheral Devices

Chapter 1
The following external devices can be used by connecting to the system.
• Connect them to the system using the corresponding ports as necessary.
Where to connect Connection device name

System SD memory card slot SD memory card

External monitor
DVI-D port
Products complying with IEC60950-1 or equivalent safety standards
Wireless LAN adapter
Items complying with IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11b.
The compatible standard differs depending on the wireless LAN adapter.
Only the items authorized by Konica Minolta.
To use the wireless LAN connection, an optional "Wireless LAN License" is required.
For how to use the adapter, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless LAN
USB port adapter.
USB microphone
Only the items authorized by Konica Minolta.
For how to use the USB microphone, refer to the instruction manual of the USB
microphone.
Connect the USB microphone to the USB2.0 port on the rear panel.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If any external device connection is detected, an icon will be shown in the status indicator area on the monitor. An
icon for the network connection status is also shown in the status indicator area.
Refer to "Status indicator icon" of "1.6.5 Monitor".
• For details on how to operate peripheral devices, refer to their respective operation manuals.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connect an SD memory card to the slot on the left side of the side panel.
• It may not be possible to use wireless LAN depending on the country and area.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

63
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

SD memory card
Recommended SD memory cards used in this system are listed below. To purchase the SD memory card, contact
your service representative.

SDHC memory card Class10 PFS0032U series (from TOSHIBA)

PFS0032U-1DCK (32 GB), PFS016U-1DCK (16 GB), PFS008U-1DCK (8 GB)
SDHC memory card Class10 specs SD-WA series (from Panasonic)
SDHC memory card Class4 specs SD-LB series (from Panasonic)

(Example)

• Speed: Operable with Classes 4 and 10.

• SD Speed Class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing. Check it on the label side of your card.

zz To remove an SD memory card

1 Touch the icon in the status indicator area.

• A safe removal menu pops up for display.

2. Choose the icon for removing the SD memory card you wish to remove.
• It will be removed safely.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The same applies to the removal of other external devices: touch the icon and operate the system following the infor-
mation displayed on the screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

64
 1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

1.6.7 Connectable Transducers and Biopsy Brackets

Chapter 1
A transducer is a device designed for transmitting / receiving ultrasound.
The system supports the following transducers and biopsy brackets, which are all optional.
The transducer that can be used with the system varies depending on the unit.

zz Transducer
Name Main indications for use

LINEAR PROBE L18-4 Peripheral vascular, Superficial, Musculoskeletal

CONVEX PROBE C5-2 Abdomen

SECTOR PROBE S4-2 Cardiac, Abdomen

LINEAR PROBE L14-4 Peripheral vascular, Superficial, Musculoskeletal

ENDOCAVITY PROBE EC9-3 Transvaginal

LINEAR PROBE L11-3 Peripheral vascular, Superficial, Musculoskeletal

LINEAR PROBE HL18-4 Peripheral vascular, Superficial, Musculoskeletal

CONVEX PROBE MC10-3 Peripheral vascular, Abdomen, Musculoskeletal

LINEAR PROBE WL13-3 Breast, Superficial, Musculoskeletal

SECTOR PROBE S4-2A Cardiac, Abdomen

zz Biopsy bracket
Available Transducer Biopsy bracket Additional needle guide/transducer cover

Biopsy Starter Kit (L18-4) Ultra-Pro II TM Needle Guide Set

LINEAR PROBE L18-4
(Product No.: 693-004) (Product No.: 610-608)

Biopsy Starter Kit (C5-2) Ultra-Pro II TM Needle Guide Set

CONVEX PROBE C5-2
(Product No.: 693-003) (Product No.: 610-608)

Biopsy Starter Kit (L14-4) Ultra-Pro II TM Needle Guide Set

LINEAR PROBE L14-4
(Product No.: 693-005) (Product No.: 610-608)

Biopsy Starter Kit (L11-3) Ultra-Pro II TM Needle Guide Set

LINEAR PROBE L11-3
(Product No.: 693-006) (Product No.: 610-608)

Latex-Free Ultrasound Probe Covers

CONVEX PROBE MC10-3 - CIV-FlexTM Covers
(Product No.: 610-542)

Latex-Free Ultrasound Probe Covers

LINEAR PROBE WL13-3 - CIV-FlexTM Covers
(Product No.: 610-542)

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For information on how to connect a transducer, refer to "2.1.2 Connecting the Transducer".
• For other details, refer to "Chapter 8 Transducer and Biopsy".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

65
1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

1.6.8 List of Optional Items

The following options are available for this system.

• All optional items could be installed by your service representative.
• For purchasing optional items, please contact your service representative.
• Please disconnect all external USB devices "Barcode Reader, USB Printer, and so on" from the system while the
system is operating battery-powered operation.

zz Equipment
No. Name Notes

It allows easy installation / movement of the system.

(1) Pole Cart2
Refer to "Pole Cart2" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

(2) Pole Cart Basket With basket tightener (included in No.1)

100 V to 240 V supported

(3) Power Extension Unit2*1 Fuse (A user is not allowed to replace the fuse.)
Fuse size of F1 and F2 : φ 5.2 × 20 mm
It makes switching between up to three transducers possible.
(4) Three-Port Probe Unit*1
Refer to "Three-Port Probe Unit" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
It makes an ECG display possible.
(5) Reference Signal Unit
Refer to "4.7 ECG Mode".
IPX8
(6) Foot Switch (Dual) Functions can be assigned to the foot switch.
Refer to "Foot Switch Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
IPX8
(7) Foot Switch (Triple) Refer to "Foot Switch Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Functions can be assigned to the foot switch.

(8) Cable Hanger*1 A hanger that fastens a transducer cable securely.

It makes the entry of patient information, etc. with a USB keyboard possible.
(9) Keyboard Kit*1
Refer to "Keyboard" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

It allows VESA-compliant installation.

(10) VESA Attachment
Refer to "VESA Attachment" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

It makes the entry of patient information with a barcode reader possible.

(11) Barcode Reader
Refer to "Reader Device Link" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

(12) CW Kit It makes the use of CW-mode possible, and is built into the system.

It allows black-and-white printing on VCP paper.

(13) Black-and-white printer*1*2 Only the items authorized by Konica Minolta.
For details, refer to the operation manual of the USB printer.
The Clear Ball can be illuminated only after it is replaced with the trackball
(14) Clear Ball installed as the standard accessory.
Refer to "Clear Ball" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
It increases adhesion of the transducer to the body surface.
(15) Acoustic Standoff
Refer to "8.3 Acoustic Standoff".
*1: An optional "Pole Cart2" is required.
*2: An optional "Power Extension Unit2" is required.

66
 1.6 System Configuration and Part Name

zz License
No. Name Notes

(1) DICOM Storage License Refer to "DICOM Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

Chapter 1
(2) Auto IMT License Refer to "Auto IMT" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

(3) Simple Needle Visualization License Refer to "8.2.6 Simple Needle Visualization".

(4) DICOM Worklist License Refer to "DICOM Worklist" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

(5) Anti-Virus License Enables Anti-Virus function.

Refer to "RA Work Flow" of the "Operation Manual: Applications". It is displayed

(6) RA Work Flow License
as [RA Work Flow] on the system license management screen.

(7) Wireless LAN License Refer to "Network Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

(8) Strain Elastography License Refer to "4.4.7 Elastography-mode".

(9) DICOM SR License Refer to "DICOM Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".

(10) OB Report License Refer to "OB Report" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".

(11) Library License Refer to "5.6.7 Library Function".

(12) Panoramic View License Refer to "4.8 Panoramic View".

(13) Voice Control License Refer to "5.6.8 Voice Control".

(14) Direct Recording License Refer to "5.6.7 Library Function".

Hypoechoic Region Characterization

(15) Refer to "5.6.9 Hypoechoic Region Characterization Function".
License

(16) Text Annotation License Refer to "5.3 Text (Annotation)".

67
68
 Chapter
2
Before Examination

69
 2.1 Installation

There are three types of usage of the system.

• Desktop 2.1.1 Moving the System
Put the system on a table.
• Pole Cart2
The system can be moved independently within the
Attach the system to the Pole Cart2 (optional).
hospital setting. When connected to the Pole Cart2,
• Ceiling hanging / Wall mount
the system can be moved on the Pole Cart2 in a study
Attach the system to an optional VESA Attachment.
room or the medical facilities by pushing the Pole
Cart2 while holding the system by the handle.
CAUTION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Before moving
• Pay attention to the following points when installing
this system. To prevent the system from malfunctioning, press the
– You can also operate this system, using the touch power switch, select one of the functions, [Shutdown]
panel. Be sure to place the system on a flat surface or [Standby], from the dialog to check if the selected
under stable conditions. Otherwise, the system function has been executed.
may become unbalanced and it is likely to fall when
you press on the touch panel and may cause an
zz When the Pole Cart2 is not used
injury.
– When you have installed this system on the Pole
Cart2 etc., operation of the touch panel may move
1 Close the LCD monitor and unplug the AC
the system to injure you. Lock and fix the casters adapter cable from the system’s power
so that the system does not move during an connector.
examination.
• Pay attention to the following points when installing 2 Move the system while holding it by the
the VESA Attachment. handle.
– The installation and use of the system on a monitor
stand or arm are the responsibility of a user. To
3 After moving the system, plug the AC
avoid an accident or personal injury, carefully read
adapter cable into the system’s power
the instruction manual for the monitor stand or the
connector, open the LCD monitor and turn
arm and follow safety instructions.
– Install to any VESA-compliant (installation
ON the power.
dimensions: 100 mm x 100 mm) monitor stand and
arm that can withstand loads of 12 kg or more. zz When the Pole Cart2 is used
– Connect to the AC adapter to use.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1 Close the LCD monitor and unplug the
mains plug from the wall mounted AC
socket outlet.
IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When using the system on a desktop, keep the 2 Move the system while holding it by the
AC adapter about 10 cm or more away from the handle.
transducer. Otherwise, noise may be present in the
ultrasound image.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
3 After moving the system, plug the mains
plug into a wall mounted AC socket outlet,
open the LCD monitor and turn ON the
power.
Reference ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When installing the system on a Pole Cart2, refer
to "Installation on a Pole Cart2" of the "Operation
Manual: Applications".
• When installing the VESA Attachment, refer to
"VESA Attachment" of the"Operation Manual: Ap-
plications".
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

70
 2.1 Installation

CAUTION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Do not step on or trip over the power supply cord of
the system. Doing so may cause injury or damage
to the system.
• Pay attention to the following points when carrying
this system.
– Before moving a system that is not installed on the
Pole Cart2, be sure to fold down the LCD monitor

Chapter 2
and lock the LCD latch. When carrying the system,
hold it by the handle with the transducer in your
hand.
– When moving a system that is installed on the Pole
Cart2, be sure to fold down the LCD monitor and
lock the LCD latch. When carrying the system, hold
it by the handle of the system.
If you move the system by holding any portion of
it other than the handle, it may overbalance and
cause personal injury.
– When the system is equipped with an optional
keyboard, house the keyboard before moving the
system.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the system is equipped with a Three-Port
Probe Unit and removed from a Pole Cart2, place
the connector of a transducer on the Pole Cart2.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

71
2.1 Installation

2.1.2 Connecting the Transducer

Only a single transducer can be directly attached to the transducer connector of the system. Up to three transducers
can be attached if you use an optional Three-Port Probe Unit.
Information from the transducer attached to the port is displayed on the ultrasound image.

Frequency value (B/M)

• Displays the transmit fre-
quency of the currently-
active transducer.

Transducer mark icon

• Displays the currently-
active transducer in the
lower right portion of the
ultrasound image.

1 Turn OFF the system.

2 Position and connect the connector of the transducer in parallel with the transducer connec-
tor on the main unit.

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Turn OFF the system before attaching / detaching or replacing a transducer.
– When the transducer has to be laid down temporarily during a study, place it on a stable and level surface to prevent it
from falling.
• When transporting a transducer, be sure to disinfect the transducer at the beginning, put it into a plastic bag, and
then put the transducer-enclosed bag in a storage case. If do not doing so, the performance of the transducer could
deteriorate.
• Do not connect anything other than transducers or Three-Port Probe Unit designed for this system to the transducer
connector on the main unit.
• If the connector cannot be inserted properly, do not try to force it in. Instead check the connector orientation. Forcing
the connector in may result in damage to the transducer.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For details of transducers, refer to "Chapter 8 Transducer and Biopsy".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

72
 2.1 Installation

3 Raise the lock lever to secure the transducer.

Transducer connector lock

Chapter 2
4 Turn ON the system.
• The attached transducer is recognized by the system so that the frequency display and icon will be changed
accordingly.

zz How to remove

1 Turn OFF the system.

2 Lower the transducer connector lock lever to unlock.

3 Hold the transducer by its connector and pull it laterally out of the transducer connec-
tor.

73
2.1 Installation

2.1.3 Three-Port Probe Unit

There are three transducer connectors, which are selectable through the operation of the mini console of the system
or the touch panel without removing the transducer.

Three-Port Probe Unit

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Three-Port Probe Unit is intended to receive its power from the main unit through the transducer connector on the
main unit.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• With a Three-Port Probe Unit connected to the system, the cable for the connector of the transducer connected to
the system is oriented toward the back.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For details on how to connect a transducer when the system is equipped with a Three-Port Probe Unit, refer to
"Three-Port Probe Unit" of the"Operation Manual: Applications".
• For details on how to switch a transducer, refer to "4.2.1 Changing Exam Type Using the Shortcut Window".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

74
 2.2 Power Supply Cord Connection and Battery Capacity

This system receives power either from a commercial zz How to remove

power source (via the AC adapter) or from a battery. In step 2, hold the grips to remove the battery from the
Battery connection is composed of a three-element system.
combination: the system, battery and AC adapter.

WARNING •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2.2.2 Connecting the AC Adapter

Chapter 2
• Be sure to use the power supply cord that is in-
cluded with the system, and connect the mains
plug (Hospital Grade) to a wall mounted AC socket
outlet. Do not connect the mains plug to a two-pin
1 Connect the AC adapter connector to the
socket outlet using conversion adapters, etc. Doing
system’s power connector until you hear
so may cause an electric shock. it click.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Power connector

2.2.1 Connecting the Battery AC adapter

connector

1 Slide the knobs to toward each side of the

system to remove the battery cover.

Battery cover
IMPORTANT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• An AC adapter authorized by Konica Minolta must
be used.
• Make sure to fully insert the AC adapter connec-
tor. If the connection is incomplete, the AC adapter
connector may become extremely hot.
• Although the AC adapter becomes hot during use, this
is normal as long as the indicator lamp is lit in green.
Knobs
• When using the system on a desktop, keep the
AC adapter about 10 cm or more away from the
transducer. Otherwise, noise may be present in the
ultrasound image.
IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To use an optional Pole Cart2, route the AC adapt-
• A battery authorized by Konica Minolta must be er cable and the power supply cord as shown in
used. the figure below. Fixing the cable in a place other
• • • • • • • • • • • • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• than specified may damage the cable or other parts
when you adjust the height of the Pole Cart2. If
2 Install a battery by holding its grips. you removed the AC adapter cable and the power
• The battery has the specified orientation. Insert supply cord, connect them as shown next, in ac-
its terminal side first. cordance with your option combination.
Grips

Terminal side

3 Close the battery cover.

75
2.2 Power Supply Cord Connection and Battery Capacity

When the Power Extension Unit2 is not used When the Power Extension Unit2 is used

Clamp AC adapter cable Clamp

MagicBand
Cable
hook

Φ130 mm

Wind the cable twice

with a circle of Φ130
mm, fix it with two
Power Extension Unit2
MagicBands, place
it as the clamp is Pass extra length of the AC
placed between the adapter cable through a clamp
MagicBands, and then
fix it with a clamp. • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

2 Insert the power supply cord into the AC

Cable
hook adapter.

AC adapter
Hook the extra length
of the power supply
cord on the cable hook.

Push the nail in front of the clamp to

remove the clamp. Power supply cord

3 Connect the mains plug (Hospital Grade)

to a wall mounted AC socket outlet.
• This provides protective earth in the system.
• Once the AC adapter is energized, its status in-
dicator LED lights up green.
Clamp
• When the system is being used by connecting
the AC adapter, the battery is being charged.

Mains plug

Wall mounted
AC socket outlet
When the clamp has been removed

IMPORTANT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• There should be no obstacles near the transducer
cable, the wall mounted AC socket outlet and
mains plug.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

76
 2.2 Power Supply Cord Connection and Battery Capacity
zz How to remove
Go through the steps below to remove the AC adapter.
1 Disconnect the mains plug from the wall
mounted AC socket outlet.
2 Remove the power supply cord from the
AC adapter.
3
Hold the arrow marks on both sides of
the AC adapter connector as you pull it
straight out of the power connector of the
system.
IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Do not place the system around the wall mounted
AC socket outlet.
• Do not put anything around the wall mounted AC
socket outlet.
• Do not block the vent holes in the system, or place
any object that can hinder you from manipulating
the transducer cable around the system.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
77
2.2.3 Battery Capacity
When using the system without connecting the power
supply, check the following items.
zz Battery charging time
Approximately 5 hours
Chapter 2
• Fully charge the battery until its status indicator LED
lights up green.
• When the AC adapter is connected to the system,
the battery is being charged, even if you are using
the system.
• If the battery temperature is excessively high or low,
recharging time will be longer than those stated
above.
• The battery should be charged at room temperature
between 0 °C and 40 °C.
zz Battery operation time
Approximately 60 minutes (fully charged) (In a
FREEZE state)
• Check the status indicator LED for the battery’s re-
maining charge level.
• The battery self-discharges even when it is not used.
Charge the battery before use.
IMPORTANT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• If the LED does not light green after the bat-
tery is charged for more than 10 hours, dis-
charge the battery (do battery operation) for 5
minutes, and then recharge the battery again.
If the LED still fails to turn green, contact your ser-
vice representative.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
2.2 Power Supply Cord Connection and Battery Capacity

zz Battery status indicator • Unknown

The system monitors the status of the battery’s re- Battery's remaining
Status indicator icon
maining capacity / AC adapter connection, and informs capacity
you of changes, if any, in each status by varying the
on-screen status indicator icon and the status indicator –
LED on its mini console according to such changes.
AC adapter connection • When the remaining battery level falls to 15 % or
• Connected less, a message appears, prompting you to connect
the AC adapter.
Battery’s remaining
capacity
Status indicator icon • When the remaining battery level falls to 5 % or less,
the forced shutdown message appears and then the
system shuts down.
100 % (green)

IMPORTANT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
99 % to 75 % (green)
• When an error occurs, a message is displayed.
Follow the message instructions.
74 % to 50 % (green) • When no battery has been mounted, or when you
remove the battery during start-up or operation, a
message appears, prompting you to make battery
49 % to 25 % (yellow) connections.
• When setting the battery low notification to off,
check the status indicator icon for battery level
24 % to 0 % (red)
while using this system. The system may shut
down during operation if you are not aware of low
Disconnected battery status.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

Status is unknown HINT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

• The system can also be set to notify you of low
Battery error battery using sound instead of a message. Refer to
the item "Low battery notification" under "System
• Disconnected Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
Battery’s remaining
Status indicator icon
capacity
zz The storage temperature range and period
100 % (green) for batteries
Store batteries within the temperature range specified
below:
99 % to 75 % (green) - 20 °C to 60 °C (30 days)
- 20 °C to 40 °C (90 days)
- 20 °C to 20 °C (1 year)
74 % to 50 % (green)

IMPORTANT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
49 % to 25 % (yellow) • The battery has a limited lifetime. If the operating
time becomes shorter, replace the battery with a
(red) new one.
24 % to 0 %
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
Disconnected –

Status is unknown

Battery error

78
 2.3 Power ON/OFF

2.3.1 Turn ON the Power 2.3.2 Turn OFF the Power

1 Open the LCD monitor and adjust the an- 1 Press the power switch when the power is
gle of the monitor. ON.

Chapter 2
• The shutdown confirmation message dialog box
2 Press the power switch on the side panel appears.
of the system.
• Upon completion of start-up, the B-mode study 2 Press the [Shutdown] button in the dialog
screen appears. box, or press the power switch again.
• When the login function is enabled, the [Login] • The system starts shutting down and the power
screen appears upon completion of start-up. to the system is turned off.

CAUTION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• IMPORTANT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

• When the system is starting up, avoid touching the • Be sure to finish the examination before turning off
LCD monitor until the start-up process is complete. the power. Also, if the dialog box is displayed, be
Otherwise, the sensitivity of the touch panel cannot sure to close the dialog box beforehand.
be adjusted accurately. • Check the condition of the system after turning off
• Do not press the optional USB keyboard during the power.
start-up. Otherwise, the system may malfunction. Refer to "7.1.3 Check after Turning OFF the
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••• Power".
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
HINT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• Check the condition of the system before and after
turning on the power. Refer to "7.1.1 Check before • You can use [Power] button instead of the power
Turning ON the Power" and "7.1.2 Check after switch. Refer to "1.6.5 Monitor".
Turning ON the Power". • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
•• • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••

• The Patient screen can also be made to appear
after start-up.
For details, refer to "System Screen" in the "Opera-
tion Manual: Applications".
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

When the [Login] screen appears

Perform user authentication operation to log in.
Refer to "Login function" of "2.3.4 Security
Functions".

3 Adjust the brightness and contrast of the

LCD monitor as necessary.
• Study screen > [Menu] button > [Other] tab >
[Brightness / Contrast] button

Reference ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• "1.6.5 Monitor"
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

79
2.3 Power ON/OFF

zz Shutdown function
Pressing the power switch will display the message 2.3.3 Standby
asking you to select the desired shutdown type.

zz Power switch > Shutdown confirmation

List of shutdown confirmation message buttons
Button Functions
[Standby] Puts the system into standby state.
[Shutdown] Shuts down the system.
[Cancel] Cancels the shutdown.
When the security function is enabled, the [Logout]
button is displayed on the shutdown confirmation mes-
sage.
To configure the security function, refer to "User Ac-
count Settings" of the "Operation Manual: Applica-
tions".
IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• For longer and continued use of the system, it is
recommended to shut down the system at least
once every three days.
• If you use the system when the remaining battery
level is low, do not remove the AC adapter before
shutting down the system. Doing so may cause a
failure of the system.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
message > [Standby] button
• Executes Standby.
• Executes [End Study] instead during examination
and ends the examination.
• Saves the current system status in the memory, and
enters the energy-saving mode.
• To start up the system in a standby state, press
the power switch, which starts up the system in the
same manner as it does in the normal power-on
state.
IMPORTANT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• If the monitor is closed, the standby processing is
executed.
• Do not disconnect the battery during the standby
state or leave the system in the standby state for a
long period of time. If the battery runs out, memory
corruption can occur, and quick startup from a
standby condition becomes impossible.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

80
 2.3 Power ON/OFF

2.3.4 Security Functions

The system is equipped with the following security functions: Account management, Login / Logout, Security log, and
Screen lock.

zz Login function
The [Login] screen appears during the start-up of the system or after logging out of the system. The login function is

Chapter 2
enabled when the [Login required] setting for the security functions is set to ON.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You cannot perform any operations other than Login or Shutdown during the [Login] screen display.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For more details about security functions, such as Login / Logout functions and others, and their settings, refer to
"User Account Settings" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Type in [Name] and [Password] on the [Login] screen using the software keyboard.

Message display area

• Displays messages, if any.

Software keyboard

81
2.3 Power ON/OFF

2 Press the [OK] button.

• Performs a user authentication operation to put the system into a login state.
• Ultrasound examinations become available once logged in.
Item Functions

[Name] Enter your user account name.

[Password] Enter your password.
Compares the entered account name / password with the registered account list. If there is
[OK] button a match, the system shifts from the [Login] screen to the login state.
• If there is no match, a message appears and the [Login] screen is unchanged.
Executes emergency login.
• This login item allows you to use only examination.
• [Setup] and [User Preset] operations are disabled.
[Emergency] button
• Some operations are restricted on the Patient Registration and Review functions.
Refer to "3.9 Emergency Examination" of this manual and "Patient Screen" of the "Opera-
tion Manual: Applications".

zz Logout function
Logout function is intended to shift the system from the login state to the state where a user authentication operation
has not be performed, when a user temporarily suspends or terminates the use of the system.
You cannot start examination with the system in the logout state.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This is enabled when the security functions are set up. Refer to "User Account Settings" of the "Operation Manual:
Applications", and set [Login required] to ON.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Press the power switch > the shutdown confirmation message > the [Logout] button.
• The logout confirmation dialog appears.
• Alternatively, use the study screen > the [Menu] button > the [Other] tab > the [Logout] button to log out.

2 Press the [OK] button.

• The system becomes in the logout state and the [Login] screen appears.

zz To cancel
Press the [Cancel] button.
• The system returns to the former state without logging out.

82
 2.4 External Device Link

2.4.1 ImagePilot Link

This system cooperates with the external link device ImagePilot via LAN to improve the operability of patient informa-
tion registration.
ImagePilot refers to a diagnostic imaging work station that allows total control of various procedures, such as regis-

Chapter 2
tration of patient/imaging information and confirmation of images, and it helps provide a more comfortable and effec-
tive diagnostic environment.
ImagePilot provides [ImagePilot Order], [ImagePilot Search], and [ImagePilot One Click], and you can operate them
on the [Patient] screen of the system.
For details, refer to "External Device Link" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

2.4.2 Reader Device Link

This system can be linked to a reader device by using the USB connector. A barcode reader link is available.
When the study screen is displayed in a not-examined state (patient information not registered), reading a magnetic
card or a barcode will automatically change the screen to the [Patient] screen. Therefore, an operation for starting
the [Patient] screen can be omitted.
For details, refer to "External Device Link" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

2.4.3 DICOM Worklist

DICOM Worklist is a function that can enable you to acquire reserved examination information from the DICOM
MWM server via LAN and start a selected examination.
For details, refer to "External Device Link" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

83
84
 Chapter
3
Starting Examination

85
 3.1 Study Screen

When the power is turned ON and the system starts up, the study screen is displayed on the LCD monitor.

3.1.1 Layout of the Study Screen

The monitor displays ultrasound images, the operation menu or other various information.
The screen is divided into 8 areas as shown below.

(1) (4)

(2)
(5)

(6)

(3) (7)

(8)

86
 3.1 Study Screen

No. Area Functions

The [Study] button and the status indicator icon are located here.
(1) Status area • The [Study] button function differs depending on the settings. For details, refer to
"[Study Button] customize" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
(2) Operation button area Thumbnails and operation buttons are located.
(3) Application start button area The application start-up button is located.
Basic information such as information of patients being studied, hospital name and
examination information, date and time, etc. is located.
Patient information area

• Touching the patient information area on the left side of the basic information area
will display the [Patient] screen.

Chapter 3
(4) Basic information area The patient information is displayed during the examination. The patient register
icon is displayed if the patient’s information has not yet been registered.
• The hospital name can be changed by touching the hospital name display area on
the right side of the basic information area.
Refer to "[Site Settings] screen" under "Maintenance" in the "Operation Manual:
Applications".
• If [GYN] or [EM]/[GYN] is selected as the area for exam, [LMP] or [IVF] appears. If
[OB] or [EM]/[OB] is selected, [EDD] and [GA] appear. The values can be changed
by touching these displays. For setting the display items, refer to "Confirming pre-
set/modifying user preset" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
(5) Image display area Ultrasound images and the image-related information (e.g. parameters) are located.
(6) Information display area Icons for currently-available operation items are located.
(7) Print / Store button area The Print/Store buttons are located.
(8) Mode button area The mode change buttons are located.

87
3.1 Study Screen

3.1.2 Displaying Common Data

In the image display area, various data of image-related information such as parameters are displayed.
This section describes the common data displays in each mode.
• Numbers on the image are a numerical display sample.

Gray bar / Color bar area Parameter display area

B-image scale MI/TI display area

MI/TI display area

MI/TI and Transducer information are displayed.
[MI]/[TIS]/[TIB] (or [TIC]) values are displayed only in a live state.

MI/TI display

Transducer mark icon

Item Functions

Displays the acoustic power data being transmitted from the transducer.
• Starting at the top: [MI], [TIS] and [TIB] (or [TIC]) values, which are displayed only
MI/TI display
in a live state.
• For details on MI/TI, refer to "9.2 MI/TI Display Description".
Displays present transducer information.
Transducer mark icon • Touching the icon will display the exam type select shortcut window.
• Refer to "4.2.1 Changing Exam Type Using the Shortcut Window".

88
 3.1 Study Screen

Gray bar / Color bar area

Displays the blood flow velocity and scale bar in each mode.

(2)

(3)
(1)

(4)

Chapter 3
(5)

No. Item Functions

(1) Gray Scale Bar Displays the B-image scale bar.

(2) Numerical display Displays the maximum velocity in Color Flow-mode / 2D-TDI-mode.
Displays the scale bar in Color Flow-mode / 2D-TDI-mode / Power Doppler-mode /
(3) Color Scale Bar
SCF-mode / Elastography-mode.
Displays the minimum velocity in Color Flow-mode / 2D-TDI-mode.
(4) Numerical display
Displays the pulse repetition frequency in Power Doppler-mode / SCF-mode.
Displays the velocity unit [cm/s] in Color Flow-mode / 2D-TDI-mode.
(5) Unit display
Displays the frequency unit [Hz] or [kHz] in Power Doppler-mode / SCF-mode.

Scale

zz B-mode image
Depth scale
There are four types of dot markers divided into 1 mm / 2 mm / 5 mm /
10 mm increments that change according to the present Depth value.
With the transducer surface position taken as 0 cm, the numeric marker
in 5 cm increments (the numeric marker in 1 cm increments for a depth
of 10 cm or less) is displayed.

Focus mark
Displays the present focus 0
point. 1

7
8

Present Depth value

89
3.1 Study Screen

zz M-mode image
Depth scale Time marker
Sweep marker
L/R display Other than L/R display Setting item OFF∗ Setting item ON∗

Latest M-image position Position in 0.5-second

Right Left Not displayed.
(only in live state) and 1-cm increments
∗: Go to [Setup] screen > [System Settings] screen > [Image] tab > Setting item for [Time Marker Display].
Time marker

0 0

5 5

9 9

Sweep marker

Depth scale

zz PW / CW-mode image
Velocity value scale Time marker
Sweep marker Baseline Other than L/R
L/R display Setting item OFF∗ Setting item ON∗
display

Latest Doppler im- Velocity position

Velocity is located
age position Right Left Not displayed. in 0.5-second
at 0.
(only in live state) increments
∗: Go to [Setup] screen > [System Settings] screen > [Image] tab > Setting item for [Time Marker Display].
Baseline

1.48
0 m/s

-1
9 -1.04

Sweep marker
Depth scale
Time marker Velocity value scale

90
 3.1 Study Screen

Parameter display area

Displays mode-specific parameters.
• The following figure is an example of the display format and numerical values used in other modes than dual
mode.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Chapter 3
(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For details of the parameter functions and the contents of the table below, refer to "Chapter 4 Diagnosis Mode".
• For details of parameter preset, refer to "Menu Customize Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

91
3.1 Study Screen

No. Data name Functions

(1) Frame Rate Displays the frame rate.

Always displays the Tx level.
(2) Tx Level
• The value is in "%".
(3) THI On/Off Displays On / Off of THI.
Displays the type of transducer frequency in B-mode or M-mode.
(4) Frequency Type (B/M) • This can also be displayed as a numeric value. Refer to "[Display Frequency Nu-
merically]" under "Image Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
(5) Gain (B) Displays the gain value for B-mode.
(6) DR (B) Displays the dynamic range value for B-mode.
Displays frequency for Color Flow- / Power Doppler- / 2D-TDI- / SCF-mode.
Frequency (C) /
(7) • The value is in "MHz".
Frequency Type (E)
Displays the frequency type for Elastography-mode.
Displays the gain value for Color Flow- / Power Doppler- / 2D-TDI- / SCF-mode.
(8) Gain (C) / Blending Rate (E)
Displays the image blending rate value for Elastography-mode.
Displays frequency for PW Doppler- / CW Doppler- / PW-TDI-mode.
(9) Frequency (D)
• The value is in "MHz".
(10) Gain (D) Displays the gain value for PW Doppler- / CW Doppler- / PW-TDI-mode.
Displays the Doppler gate width (sample volume width) of PW Doppler- / PW-TDI-
(11) D Gate Width
mode.
Displays the gate depth (sample volume depth) for PW Doppler- / CW Doppler- /
(12) D Gate Depth PW-TDI-mode.
• The value is in "mm".
Displays the correction angle for PW Doppler- / CW Doppler- / PW-TDI-mode.
(13) Angle • The value is in degree.
• If the value exceeds 60°, the background and character colors are changed.
Displays the gain offset value for M-mode.
(14) Gain (M)
• Displayed as the offset value with respect to the gain for B-mode.
(15) DR (M) Displays the dynamic range value for M-mode.

zz To change parameters
The pop-up window appears with a direct touch of the target parameter value. The currently selected parameter
value can be changed by using the up / down or [+] / [-] buttons, or by dragging the value or the character displayed
in the pop-up window up or down.

Pop-up window

92
 3.2 Examination Flow

This section describes the general flow of an examination using the system.
For information about each screen and basic functions, see the item to be described later in this chapter. Refer to the
"Operation Manual: Applications" for details on such procedures as exam type-specific measurement procedures.

1 Change to the [Patient] screen.

• Touch the patient register icon at the top of the study screen.
(Patient register icon)

Chapter 3
• When you return to the study screen after having registered a patient, the patient’s information is displayed in
the basic information area.

2 Register the patient.

• Enter an ID and necessary information on the [Patient] screen.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Input your ID (required).
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can also start examination by entering the ID in the study screen without switching to the [Patient] screen. Refer
to "Patient Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For patient registration, refer to "3.3 Registering Patient Information".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

93
3.2 Examination Flow

Registered patient
• Patient information can be called up by searching using a patient ID or patient name. Select the desired patient
and go to step 3.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For patient search, refer to "3.5 Patient Search".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

3 Select the desired examination.

• Select the desired exam type and preset of the region for diagnosis.
Example: [Abd] selection
• Touching and selecting [Abd] displays the preset items related to [Abd] to the right of [Abd]. There you can se-
lect the desired item.
Exam list Preset list

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For an exam type, refer to "3.4 Exam Type Selection".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

4 Start an examination.
• Press the [Start Study] button on the [Patient] screen to start an examination.
• The [Patient] screen closes so as to display the study screen, and the previously-entered patient information is
displayed in the patient information area of the study screen.

5 Acquire an ultrasound image.

• After the desired ultrasound image has been displayed, press the FREEZE button of the mini console.
• The image freezes.

SET F2 F1 Gain
EXIT

1
User FREEZE

2
User

94
 3.2 Examination Flow

6 Select and store an image using the Cine function.

• When the Cine bar in the lower right corner of the image display area has been displayed, you can play back
a desired frame by moving the trackball right and left. When you have selected your desired image, press the
[Store] button in the lower right corner of the study screen.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the Cine function, refer to "5.1 Cine".
• For storing a still image, refer to "6.1.1 Storing Still Images".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 3
Print an image.
• Press the [Print] button in the lower right corner of the study screen.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• There are two types of printing button. Refer to "6.3 Printing Images".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

8 End the examination.

• Press the [Study] button on either the [Patient] screen or the study screen.
• The confirmation dialog box to end examination is displayed. Press [Yes] to end the examination.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Be sure to end the examination before putting the system into a Shutdown / Standby mode.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

95
 3.3 Registering Patient Information

Patient information is registered on the [Patient] screen.

The [Patient] screen includes the [Register] screen and the [Archive] screen.
Press the desired button to change the display and enter information required for an examination.
When you have started an examination without registering patient information, a Patient ID will be automatically is-
sued if you have stored a still image or clip on the study screen.

3.3.1 Layout of the Patient Screen

To change to the [Patient] screen, touch the patient register icon at the top of the study screen.
• [Register] screen is the default screen.
Preset / User preset pull-down menu

Basic information area Exam pull-down Compound

(including status area) menu menu

Patient list area

Patient information entry area Patient information operation area

zz Basic information area (including status area)

Item Functions

Status indicator icon

Displays the system status.
Refer to "1.6.5 Monitor".

[Study] button Ends examination.

[Register] tab Changes to the [Register] screen.
[Archive] tab Changes to the [Archive] screen.
Displays the present date and time.
Date and Time • A format of date and time can be changed.
Refer to "Date and Time Setting" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

96
 3.3 Registering Patient Information

zz Patient information operation area

Item Functions

[Basic] tab Changes to the [Basic] screen.

[Advance] tab
Exam pull-down menu
Preset / User preset pull-down menu
Changes to the [Advance] screen corresponding to an examination.
The selected exam type will be subject to [Exam] at the start of the examination.
• The default presets registered on the [Setup] screen are displayed as presets.
• If a patient is selected from the patient list, the latest exam type of the patient is
selected as a default.
Select a target preset / user preset.
• Presets and user presets registered by [Exam] are displayed in the pull-down
menu.
• If a patient is selected from the patient list, the latest examination presets / user
presets of the patient are selected as a default.
• Select the compound setting.

Chapter 3
• The compound menu displays the setting value and the number of compounds.
Compound menu
• For some transducers, the displayed number may not match the selected setting.
Refer to "4.2.1 Changing Exam Type Using the Shortcut Window".
[Clear] button Restores the data to the original state by clearing input information or a field.
Press the button while a patient is selected to modify the registered patient informa-
[Modify] button tion.
• After modification, press the [Save] button to save the data.
Press the button to retrieve patient information from an external device for [ImagePilot
Search] / [ImagePilot Order] / DICOM Worklist Alias name.
• Displayed if either [ImagePilot Search], [ImagePilot Order], or DICOM Worklist
[Search] button
Alias name is selected for [From] in the patient list area.
• Specifying the condition in the selected field in [Patient List] and pressing the but-
ton will update the patient list based on the condition.
[Start Study] button Changes to the study screen and starts an examination.
Changes to the study screen, and resumes an examination.
[Restart] button
• Displayed only when the data of any resumable examination has been displayed.
Confirms the modified data and reflects changes.
[Save] button
• Displayed only when data is being modified.
Returns to the study screen.
[Close] button
• If the examination has not been performed, entered information will be discarded.
Discards the modified data and ends modification without confirming / reflecting it.
[Cancel] button
• Displayed only when data is being modified.

97
3.3 Registering Patient Information

3.3.2 Entering Letters Using the Software Keyboard

Use the software keyboard for entering letters.

Touching a letter type field will display the keyboard, and touching a numerical type field, such as the one for age, will
display the numerical keypad.

<Keyboard type>

<Numerical keypad>

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The button options and input flow of the software keyboard are the same as those of a commonly-used PC.
• To move the software keyboard, drag it to a destination while holding down any portion other than the key buttons.
• Press the button to end the software keyboard.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For setting change of display letters / input letter language / numerical keypad size, refer to "System Screen"of the
"Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Touch your desired field.

• The software keyboard starts up on the screen.
• Touching a letter type field will display the keyboard, and touching a numerical type field, such as the one for
age, will display the numerical keyboard.

2 Press your desired keys.

• The characters of the pressed keys are entered.

98
 3.3 Registering Patient Information

3.3.3 Entering Patient Information

The patient information entry area includes the [Basic] screen and the [Advance] screen and touching a tab will allow
you to change and operate the screen. You can enter, search or change patient information.

Patient information entry area [Basic]

Chapter 3
CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Be sure to enter the correct data such as ID, name and values for doing study. Incorrect data will result in incorrect
diagnosis.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The [ID] field must be entered.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Item Functions

[ID]∗1 Enter Patient ID.

[Auto] button Automatically assigns a patient ID number.

[ID Creation]
[EMG] button Automatically assigns an emergency ID number.
Enter a patient name.
[NAME]∗2 • There are four types of input format and you can set each of them.
Refer to "Patient Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Enter a date of birth.
• Input format for Date is selectable.
[Birth]
• Selection of the name of era is needed in case of Japan Format.
Refer to "System Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Automatically calculated from [Birth] for display.
• If this is manually entered, [Birth] will be cleared.
[Age]
• Input range: 0 to 150
• Select the unit of age from the pull-down menu.
Select the gender from the pull-down menu.
• Exam type-specific defaults are selected as shown below.
[Gender] [OB], [GYN] → [Female]
[Testicle] → [Male]
Other than the above → Blank

Continued on the next page

99
3.3 Registering Patient Information

Item Functions

Enter an operator.
• The entered operators can be selected from the pull-down menu.
[Operator]∗2 • The 20 latest used names are displayed in the pull-down menu.
• If the number of registered names exceeds 20, the oldest name will be deleted.
• The registered names can be deleted on the setup screen.
Enter height.
• You can set the unit.
cm: Available from 0 to 299.9
[Height]
ft: Available from 0 to 9
in: Available from 0 to 11
Refer to "System Screen"of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Enter weight.
• You can set the unit.
[Weight] Kg: Available from 0.0 to 499.9
Lb: Available from 0.0 to 999.9
Refer to "System Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Calculate from entered height and weight.
• The unit is as follows.
[BSA] m2: Available from 0.0 to 99.99
• If no BSA value is provided, an application measurement label using BSA as calculation ele-
ment cannot be calculated.
[Accession No.]∗3 Enter a unique examination number.
*1: • The following letters cannot be entered: "^", "\", "=", "/", "*", "?", " " ", "<", ">", "|", "%", and ":".
• Do not assign any IDs indicated in 1) through 5) below.
1) "."
2) ".."
3) "CON", "PRN", "AUX", "NUL", "COM0" to "COM9", "LPT0" to "LPT9"
4) Begins with "CON.", "PRN.", "AUX.", "NUL.", "COM0." to "COM9." or "LPT0." to "LPT9."
5) Ends with "." or " "
• Do not assign an ID that differs only in case (upper / lower case) from the one that already exists to a different patient.
• When entering an ID, you can set the system to use zero padding (adding zeros to the start of a number so that it ends up a
specific number of digits long) or automatically enter a particular string of characters at the start of the ID. Refer to the item
"ID format" under "Patient Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
*2: The following letters cannot be entered: "^", "\" and "=".
*3: The following letters cannot be entered: "\".

100
 3.3 Registering Patient Information

zz To manually enter ID

1 Touch the [ID] field.

• The software keyboard appears.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Any entries cannot be accepted in the case of emergency login.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Press the target keys to enter the ID.

Chapter 3
zz To automatically enter ID

1 Press the [Auto] button of the [ID Creation] (automatic ID creation).

• Automatically assigns a number.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For setting the automatic assigning rule, refer to "Patient Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Patient information entry area [Advance]

Press the [Advance] tab to change to the [Advance] screen to operate.
In the [Advance] screen, you can enter information accompanying examination.
After you enter detailed information, press the [Start Study] button to start an examination.
[Advance] tab

Displays the cur-

rently selected exam
type and the preset
/ user preset related
to the exam type.
Use the pull-down
menu to make further
changes.

[Start Study] button

101
3.3 Registering Patient Information

Item Functions

Select a physician from the physician list.

• [Setup] screen > [System Settings] screen > [Patient] tab > [Operator & Physician
List] button > [Physician] where physician names are displayed in list form.
[Physician]∗ • You can also touch the field to enter a new physician name. The entered physician
name is registered.
• For details on the deletion of registered physicians, refer to "[Operator & Physician
List] screen" in "Patient Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Allows you to make a patient-related comment.
[Indication]
• Up to 256 letters can be entered and line breaks are also allowed.
Allows you to make an examination-related comment.
[Description]
• Up to 256 letters can be entered and line breaks are also allowed.
Allows you to enter the prostate specific antigen (PSA) value in ng/mL.
[PSA]
• This item is displayed when [Urology] is selected for the exam type.
Select the input method for OB information from LMP, IVF, GA, or EDD.
[Clinical Menstrual Age Based On] • This item only displays when you have chosen "OB", "GYN" or "EM" as the exam
type.
Enter the date of the patient's last menstrual period or the date of in vitro fertiliza-
tion.
• It is possible to enter when Clinical Menstrual Age Based On is LMP or IVF. Other-
[LMP]/[IVF]
wise, the calculated last menstrual period will be displayed.
• This item only displays when you have chosen "OB", "GYN" or "EM" as the exam
type.
Enter the number of weeks pregnant.
• It is possible to enter when Clinical Menstrual Age Based On is GA. Otherwise, the
[GA] calculated number of weeks pregnant will be displayed.
• This item only displays when you have chosen "OB", "GYN" or "EM" as the exam
type.
Enter the expected date of delivery.
• It is possible to enter when Clinical Menstrual Age Based On is EDD. Otherwise,
[EDD] the calculated expected date of delivery will be displayed.
• This item only displays when you have chosen "OB", "GYN" or "EM" as the exam
type.
Enter the number of times the patient has been pregnant.
[Gravida] • This item only displays when you have chosen "OB", "GYN" or "EM" as the exam
type.
Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies the patient has had.
[Ectopic] • This item only displays when you have chosen "OB", "GYN" or "EM" as the exam
type.
Enter the number of times the patient has given birth.
[Para] • This item only displays when you have chosen "OB", "GYN" or "EM" as the exam
type.
Enter the number of miscarriages the patient has had.
[Abort] • This item only displays when you have chosen "OB", "GYN" or "EM" as the exam
type.
*: The following letters cannot be entered: "^", "\" and "=".

102
 3.4 Exam Type Selection

zz Exam type and preset

Exam types are provided with preset items, each of which is related to any of the exam types.
Exam items can be enabled/disabled on the [Setup] screen, and only presets or user presets related to effective
exam types are selectable.

zz User Preset
This function allows you to assign original names to the parameters that can be set for each preset and to register
them in the system. A user preset, if pre-registered, helps you conduct an examination in quick and simple way be-
cause the settings of parameters can be reproduced only by selecting the user preset during an examination.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 3
• For details on the settings and confirmation of Exam, presets, and user presets, refer to "Exam & Preset Screen" of
the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Exam Preset Exam Preset

[Aorta] [General]*1
*1
[Pediatric]
[General] [Neonatal]
[Abd] [Liver] [General]*1
[Renal] [RA] [Hand / Foot / Wrist]
[GB] [Shoulder / Knee / Elbow]
[1st Trimester] [General]*1
[OB] [2nd / 3rd Trimester]*1 [Anesthesiology] [Superficial]
[Fetal Heart] [Deep]
[Breast] [Breast]*1 [Superficial] [Superficial]*1
[Thyroid] [Thyroid]*1 [Lung] [Lung]*1
[Testicle] [Testicle]*1 [General]*1
*1
[Uterus] [Pain] [Superficial]
[GYN]
[Ovary] [Deep]
*1
[Adult Echo] [Abdomen]*1
[Cardiac]
[Pediatric Echo] [FAST]
*1
[General] [OB]
[Urology]
[Prostate] [GYN]
*1
[Cranial] [General] [Adult Heart]
[EM]*2
[Surgical] [General]*1 [Pediatric Heart]
*1
[General] [Carotid]
[MSK] [Hand / Foot / Wrist] [AAA]
[Shoulder / Knee / Elbow] [Vascular]
*1
[Arterial] [Superficial]
[Vascular] [Carotid]
[Venous]

∗1: Preset item that is selected as default when selecting an exam type.
∗2: As a default, this setting cannot be selected as an area for exam. To select it, change the [Exam List Settings]. For details, refer
to "Exam & Preset Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".

103
3.4 Exam Type Selection

3.4.1 Select Preset / User Preset to Start Examination

1 After registering, or calling up from the retrieval patient information on the [Patient] screen,
select an exam from the pull-down menu.
• By touching a desired exam type, the relevant preset items for the exam type will be displayed in list form.
From the list you can select a desired preset item.
Exam list Preset list

2 Select a preset / user preset and then press the [Start Study] button.
• Changes to the study screen and starts an examination.
• The selected preset / user preset name is displayed at the top of the study screen.

Preset / User preset

name

104
 3.5 Patient Search

For a registered patient, the patient information can be called up using the patient search function. Select a desired
patient from the search results and press the [Start Study] button to start an examination.
Although both the [Register] and [Archive] screens of the [Patient] screen display the search function, it is necessary
to select between the two screens according to the specified search item.

Screen Search item Functions

• Entering a search word in [ID] and/or [NAME] will show the

[Register] screen
list of candidates in the [Patient List]. Press the [Search]
button to search for the patient data if [ImagePilot Search],
[ImagePilot Order], or DICOM Worklist Alias name is se-
[NAME] lected as [From].
[ID] • When a search string is entered in both [ID] and [NAME],
[Accession No.]∗ results are listed on AND conditions.

[Archive] screen
*: Only for DICOM Worklist Alias names
Chapter 3
• Performs an incremental search.
You can also choose not to perform an incremental search.
Refer to the item "Incremental Search" under "Patient
Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
• Performs an incremental search.
[NAME] You can also choose not to perform an incremental search.
[ID] Refer to the item "Incremental search" under "Patient
Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
[Gender]
• Updates the patient list when the editing of each item has
[Birth]
been confirmed.
[Accession No.]
• As the method of searching, partial matching of words en-
[Operator]
tered is done and each item is linked on AND conditions.
[Physician]

3.5.1 Archive Screen

Press the [Archive] tab to change to the [Archive] screen to operate.

On the [Archive] screen you can perform a search for patient information registered with Internal Storage based on
specified conditions or can edit retrieved patient or study information. Even if study information is deleted on the [Ar-
chive] screen, the patient information is not deleted.

[Archive] tab

[Patient List] area

The patient list or the study list is
displayed on the [Archive] screen.
The figure on the left shows a
study list.

105
3.5 Patient Search

3.5.2 Searching

Touch the patient information area at the top of the study screen to change the screen to the [Patient] screen.

1 Enter a search word in both fields of [ID] and [NAME], or in either of them.

2 The list of search results is displayed in both a pull-down menu and the [Patient List] area.
• A search is performed by the text entered and then search results are displayed.
<ID> <NAME>

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When any of [ImagePilot Search], [ImagePilot Order], or DICOM Worklist Alias name is selected for [From], press the
[Search] button.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

106
 3.5 Patient Search

3 Touch a target patient to select from the list.

• The past data of the patient is displayed on the study list and the latest study has been selected. (As indicated
by the study list shown in the figure below)
• The images of the selected study are displayed as thumbnails.
<Patient list>

Patient column

Chapter 3
<Study list>

Patient line

Thumbnails

• Every time you touch the patient line, the display is toggled back and forth between the patient list and the
study list.

4 Touch a target study to select from the study list.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The study list is displayed only on the [Archive] screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

107
3.5 Patient Search

zz [Patient List] area

Item Functions

Select a study date range to search.

[Study Date]
• You can refine your search by study date.
Select the number of records to be displayed for search operation.
[Number]
• Upon selection of [All], it is saved as [200].
Select the referring destination for search operation.
• Some items may not be displayed depending on the settings.
• If the saved option has been deleted on the settings, [Internal Storage] will be selected.
[From] • [ImagePilot One Click], [ImagePilot Search], and [ImagePilot Order] are the functions of Im-
agePilot. Refer to "ImagePilot Link" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
• A DICOM Worklist is optional. For details, refer to "DICOM Worklist" of the "Operation Manual:
Applications".
[Image] Displays the saved image within the latest study data.
Displays the patient ID.
[ID]
• When the ID being entered is too long to fit in the field, its end is abbreviated as "...".
Displays the patient name.
[NAME] • When the name being entered is too long to fit in the field, its end is abbreviated as "...".
• The display format is alterable on the [Setup] screen.
[Birth] Displays the date of birth.
Displays the age of the patient.
[Age]
• Displays the value entered in the [Age] field when [Birth] has yet to be entered.
[Gender] Displays the gender of the patient.
[Last Study Date] Displays the previous study date.
Updates the study list.
[Update] button
• The button cannot be pressed when [Internal Storage] is selected for [From].
[Delete Patient] button Deletes the selected patient information from the list.

108
 3.6 Edit and Delete Patient Information

The [Archive] screen allows you to edit / delete the patient and study information of a patient for whom an examination
is finished.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• On the [Archive] screen, double-clicking a thumbnail image in the study list will change the screen to the [Review]
screen where you can, for example, edit image data.
• Refer to "Study Data Review" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

3.6.1 Editing Patient Information

Chapter 3
Pressing the [Modify] button will allow you to edit the patient and study information displayed on the [Patient] - [Archive]
screen.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Editing is not acceptable in any of the following information.
– ID under study
– Patient information acquired from any external link device
• Only patient information can be edited on the [Patient] screen. As for patients whose examinations are not completed
yet, the examination information cannot be edited.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Display the [Patient] screen and press the [Modify] button.

2 After editing, press the [Save] button.

• A confirmation dialog box appears.

3 Press the [Yes] button.

Duplicate ID check function

The system is equipped with a function that checks for duplicate IDs at the start of an examination or at the time of
saving edits.
If there is a duplicate ID found, a dialog box appears, asking whether you want to overwrite it or cancel overwriting.

zz If an ID acquired from an external link device is duplicated

When the registered patient data has the same IDs and names with those acquired from an external link device, the
external information is given priority, and the present data will be overwritten with it. When there exists patient data
with the same ID but different names, a confirmation dialog box appears.

109
3.6 Edit and Delete Patient Information

3.6.2 Deleting Patient Information and Study Data

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Before deleting study information, make sure to check the ID, name and study date. Once deleted, study data cannot
be restored.
• Deletion is not acceptable in any of the following cases.
– Patient / study information under study
– Study information which has been registered in [DICOM Joblist] and has not been transferred yet
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Touch and select an item, such as study information / image, which you want to delete.

2 Press the [Delete Study] button at the bottom of the screen.

• A deletion confirmation dialog box appears.

3 Press the [Yes] button.

zz To delete patient information

Delete by pressing the [Delete Patient] button on the [Register] screen.

110
 3.7 Data Backup

For securing the free space of the Internal storage capacity, it is recommended to store the settings for the system
and the patient / study data regularly in external storage media.
Each item of data can be backed up on the [Backup / Restore] screen.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The [Backup / Restore] screen is displayed only when a person who has a higher-level authority than that of a system
administrator logs in on the [Maintenance] screen. General users cannot back up or restore data.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

3.7.1 Backup / Restore Screen

Chapter 3
The [Backup / Restore] screen has two functions: one is for replicating the settings for the system and patient / study
data in external storage media, and the other is for reading stored data to repair or restore the data.
Connect external storage media to the system to back up or restore data.

zz Study screen > [Menu] button > [Other] tab > [Setup] button > [Setup] screen > [Maintenance]
button > [Maintenance] screen > [Login] button > [Maintenance Top] screen > [Backup / Re-
store] button

111
3.7 Data Backup

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Data can be backed up or restored using the [Maintenance] button of Configuration. Log in on the [Maintenance]
screen to back up or restore data.
Refer to "Maintenance" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Button Functions

The screen changes to the [Backup Setup] screen, and the

[Backup Setup]
settings for the system are backed up.
[Backup]
The screen changes to the [Backup Study Data] screen,
[Backup Study Data]
and study data are backed up.
The screen changes to the [Restore Setup] screen, and the
[Restore Setup]
settings for the system are restored.
[Restore]
The screen changes to the [Restore Study Data] screen,
[Restore Study Data]
and study data are restored.
The screen changes to the [Patient Information CSV Export]
[Export] [Patient Information CSV Export]
screen, and the patient data is output in a CSV file.
The screen changes to the [Patient Information CSV Import]
[Import] [Patient Information CSV Import]
screen, and the patient data is input in a CSV file.
The screen returns to the [Maintenance Top] screen.
[Maintenance Top] • When data are being restored, a dialog is displayed and
then the system is restarted.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The character code of the CSV file containing patient information is UTF-8.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Backup
This function enables data to be replicated so that the data can be stored in external storage media for recovery.
There are two backup methods.
• Backing up the settings for the system
• Backing up patient / study data

112
 3.7 Data Backup

zz Backing up the settings for the system

1 Press the [Backup Setup] button on the [Backup / Restore] screen.

• The screen changes to the [Backup Setup] screen.
Step 3 Step 2 Step 4

Chapter 3
2 Select a backup destination from the [Device] pull-down menu.
• When formatting connected external storage media, select a desired external storage medium and then press
the [Format] button.
• When [Temporary Backup] of [Device] has been selected, data is backed up in Internal Storage.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When you press the [Format] button while selecting [Temporary Backup], the [Temporary Backup] data is deleted.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

3 Check a category box to be backed up.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can back up information of a user presets by selecting the check box of the user preset’s name under [Exam &
Preset].
• If you are not sure which category to check, select the [All] check box to select all of the category check boxes.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

4 Press the [Backup] button.

• A screen on which to enter the name of data item to be backed up is displayed.

5 Press the [OK] button.

• Backup starts.
• When you return to the [Backup / Restore] screen, press the [Back] button.

113
3.7 Data Backup

zz Backing up patient / study data

1 Press the [Backup Study Data] button on the [Backup / Restore] screen.
• The screen changes to the [Backup Study Data] screen.
Step 3 Step 2 Step 4

2 Select a backup destination from the [Device] pull-down menu.

• When formatting external storage media, press the [Format] button at the bottom of the screen.

3 Check the [Backup Study Data] or [Backup Patient Information] box.

• If you checked the [Backup Study Data] box, select [All] or [Period].
• When you select [All], all data are backed up.
• When selecting part of all the data, select [Period] to specify the start date and end date of a period during
which data are backed up. The default settings specify that the start date is the oldest study date in the system
and that the end date is the date on which backup is carried out.
• If you want to delete patient / study data on Internal Storage after backup, check the [Delete the Study data
after backup.] box.

4 Press the [Backup] button.

• Backup is carried out.
• To return to the [Backup / Restore] screen without configuring any settings, press the [Back] button.
• If the [Delete the Study data after backup.] box is checked, data will be automatically deleted after backup.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can cancel the backup by pressing the [Abort] button. However, if a single examination contains a large amount
of data such as multiple videos recordings, etc., this can take tens of seconds to several tens of minutes after the
[Abort] button is pressed until the backup stops.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For how to remove external storage media, refer to "To remove an SD memory card" of "1.6.6 Compatible Peripheral
Devices".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

114
 3.7 Data Backup

Restore
This function is used to repair or restore all or part of data.
There are two Restore methods.
• Restoring the settings for the system
• Restoring patient / study data

zz Restoring the settings for the system

1 Press the [Restore Setup] button on the [Backup / Restore] screen.

• The screen changes to the [Restore Setup] screen.
• Connect an external storage medium.
Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5

Chapter 3
2 Select a backup destination from the [Device] pull-down menu.
• When [Temporary Backup] of [Device] has been selected, data is restored from Internal Storage.

3 Select data to be backed up from the [Backup Data] pull-down menu.

4 Check a category box to be restored.

5 Press the [Restore] button.

• When restoring data after having deleted the system’s data, check the [Delete system setup data before re-
store.] box before pressing the [Restore] button.
• When a restoring operation has been completed, a message screen appears. When you press the [Restart]
button, the system restarts.
• To return to the [Backup / Restore] screen, press the [Back] button.

115
3.7 Data Backup

zz Restoring patient / study data

1 Press the [Restore Study Data] button on the [Backup / Restore] screen.
• The screen changes to the [Restore Study Data] screen.

2 Restore data using the same procedure as that of "Restoring the settings for the system"
(above).

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When you fail to restore data, shutdown the system and remove all connected devices other than external storage
media storing data to be backed up, and then restore data again.
• Study data (images), that were acquired by using the SONIMAGE HS1, cannot be restored to the system.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Export
This function is used to output the patient data in a CSV file.

1 Press the [Patient Information CSV Export] button on the [Backup / Restore] screen.
• The screen changes to the [Patient Information CSV Export] screen.
Step 2 Step 3

2 Select an output destination from the [Device] pull-down menu.

3 Enter a file name in [Export File Name] and press the [Export] button.
• You can enter up to 50 characters for the file name.
• The default value is the following file name.
– PatientList_YYYYMMDD.csv
• When the extension is other than .csv, add .csv to the end of the file name and save the file.
• To return to the [Backup / Restore] screen, press the [Back] button.

116
 3.7 Data Backup

Import
This function is used to input the patient data in a CSV file.

1 Press the [Patient Information CSV Import] button on the [Backup / Restore] screen.
• The screen changes to the [Patient Information CSV Import] screen.
Step 2 Step 3

Chapter 3
2 Select an input destination from the [Device] pull-down menu.

3 Select a file that you want to input in [Import File Name] and press the [Import] button.
• To convert the patient data, activate the conversion tool by pressing the [Convert Tool] button.

117
3.7 Data Backup

zz Converting the patient data

A CSV file that can be input into the system is only the format created using the function of exporting patient informa-
tion to CSV.
To input a CSV file of patient information, which was created with other device, convert the file into the format that
can be input to the system, using the conversion tool.

1 Press the [ConvertTool] button on the [Patient Information CSV Import] screen.
• The screen changes to the [CSV Converter] screen.

2 Input the converted content.

Item Functions

[Device] Displays the destination device.

[Input File] Displays the name of the file saved in the input destination specified in [Device].
Enter a name of the converted file.
• You can enter up to 50 characters for the file name.
[Output File]
• The default value is the following file name.
- PatientList_YYYYMMDD.csv
Specify a location of ID *1 in the input file.
[Patient ID]
Valid range: 1 to 16
Specify a location of patient name (ASCII) *1 in the input file.
[Name (ASCII)]
Valid range: 1 to 16
Specify a location of patient name (Kanji) *1 in the input file.
[Name ( 漢字 )]
Valid range: 1 to 16
[CSV Defines]
Specify a location of location of patient name (Katakana) *1 in the input file.
[Name ( カナ )]
Valid range: 1 to 16
Specify a location of birth date *1 in the input file.
[Date of Birth]
Valid range: 1 to 16
Specify a location of gender *1 in the input file.
[Gender]
Valid range: 1 to 16
[Encoding] Specify the character code in the source file.

118
 3.7 Data Backup

Item Functions

Specify a delimiter for patient name in the input file.

[None]:
A patient name is not divided but converted as a family name.
[Name Defines] [Separator] [[ ] (space)]:
A patient name is divided into five parts with one-byte spaces. (default)
[^]:
A patient name is divided into five parts with the delimiter "^".
[Date Defines] [Date Format] Specify a date format in the input file.
Specify a definition value for "Gender: Male" in the input file.
[Male]
Valid range: 8 characters or less
Specify a definition value for "Gender: Female" in the input file.
[Gender Defines] [Female]
Valid range: 8 characters or less
Specify a definition value for "Gender: Other" in the input file.
[Other]

Chapter 3
Valid range: 8 characters or less

*1: The locations in the input file identify the sequence in a CSV file. For example, if the format of the input file is in the sequence
"(Patient ID), (Date of Birth), (Gender)", set 1 to Patient ID, 2 to Date of Birth, and 3 to Gender.

3 Press the [Convert] button to convert.

4 Press the [Exit] button to end the conversion tool.

• The screen returns to the [Patient Information CSV Import] screen.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Read the converted CSV file in a PC and make sure that the file is not abnormal before using the file for [Patient In-
formation CSV Import] of this system.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

119
 3.8 Resuming Examination

As for study data of an examination within 24 hours after the examination ends, you can resume the examination.
Use any of the following procedures to display study data of an examination within 24 hours on the [Archive] screen.
• Run a search for the corresponding study on the [Archive] screen.
• Display the [Review] screen > [Patient] button > [Archive] screen.
Upon completion of any of the procedures above, the desired resumable examination is displayed; so, you should
press the [Restart] button in the patient information operation area.

[Restart] button

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When pressing the [Start Study] button on the [Register] screen, you can select the [Restart] button or the [New] but-
ton. Refer to "[Show Confirmation Dialog for Restarting Study] "in "Patient Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Appli-
cations".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

120
 3.9 Emergency Examination

The Auto ID function allows you to start an emergency examination on the [Patient] screen or the study screen.
An examination can be resumed only within 24 hours. You can edit patient information all the time, and after re-
registering information on a patient in the same format as commonly used for patients in general, you can browse the
information on the patient, or call up the information to examine the patient as a registered patient.

3.9.1 Examination by Auto ID

Using the Auto ID function, you can start an examination urgently.

An ID number is assigned according to the automatic assigning rule preset on the [Setup] screen.

Chapter 3
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For setting the automatic assigning rule, refer to "Patient Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Touch the patient display area on the study screen.

• Changes to the [Patient] screen.

2 Select the target exam type from the [Exam] list.

• The [Exam] display changes.

3 Press the [EMG] button of [ID Creation].

• Automatically assigns a new ID number.

4 Press the [Start Study] button.

• The exam name / patient information is displayed on the study screen so that you can start an examination.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The ID can be changed after the examination. Refer to "3.6.1 Editing Patient Information".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

121
122
 Chapter
4
Diagnosis Mode

123
 4.1 Basic Operation

The system is directly operable on the touch panel.

The on-screen menus are used to display and operate functions that are not located on the mini console as neces-
sary. Some button functions allow a pop-up window to appear, or help you to display hidden buttons by pressing
in the button area and switching the page.
In addition, the on-screen menus and the mini console keys are customizable. Their layouts, however, vary depend-
ing on the settings.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• "Key Assignment Function" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Thumbnail display area

Refer to "6.2 Thumbnail Function".

Operation button area

Various function but-
tons are located.

Application start button area Mode button area

Application buttons such as the ones for The currently selected scanning mode is lit,
Measure and Body Mark are located. showing that it is in active use.

124
 4.1 Basic Operation

4.1.1 Menu Pop-up Window

Pressing the [Menu] button will display the menu pop-up window on the screen. Equipped with a tabbed display, the
pop-up menu consists of the image parameter change tab for the currently selected mode and the [Other] tab used
for selection of functions.

Current mode tab

[Other] tab

Chapter 4
Current mode tab:
The image parameter change buttons corresponding to each mode are shown, which are used to change param-
eters to optimize images.
[Other] tab:
The button to start each function

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The button layout is customizable. Refer to "Key Assignment Function" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

125
4.1 Basic Operation

4.1.2 Operation Buttons

In the operation button area, various function buttons are located and each button serves as a key to switch ON/OFF.
Up to four buttons can be located. If all buttons cannot be displayed in one page, press to switch the display.
The display and order are customizable.
The following buttons can be assigned.
Operation button area

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The button layout is customizable. Refer to "Key Assignment Function" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Button Functions

[Brightness / Contrast] Displays the monitor brightness / contrast adjustment window.

[Setup] Changes to the [Setup] screen.

[User Preset] Changes to the [User Preset Registration] screen.

[Exam / Transducer] Changes to the [Exam / Transducer] screen.
[Patient] Changes to the [Patient] screen.
[Review] Changes to the [Review] screen.
[Text] Starts up the Text function.
[Body Mark] Starts up the Body Mark function.
[Measure] Starts up the measurement function.
[Compare View] Changes to the [Compare View] screen.
[Biopsy] Starts up the biopsy guide function.
Starts up the SNV function.
[SNV]
• To use this function, "Simple Needle Visualization License" is required.
[Cine] Displays the Cine pop-up menu.
[Pointer] Displays the free cursor.
[Logout] Logs out.
[Screen Lock] Starts up the screen lock function.
Displays the console guide to check assignment of the mini console keys.
[Console Guide]
• You can also change the panel type in the Console Guide.
Executes the print or store still image function. You can assign functions according to
[Print]
the settings.

126
 4.1 Basic Operation

Button Functions

Executes the store still image or clip function. You can assign functions according to the
[Store]
settings.
[BW Print] Executes the BW print function.
[Still Store] Executes the still image store function.
[Clip Store] Executes the clip store function.
[Cine Clip Store] Executes the Cine clip store function.
[Trackball] Displays the software trackball.
[TGC] Opens the TGC menu.

[Simple Adjust] Executes the Simple Adjust function.

[Zoom] Zooms an image.

[Parameter Display] Displays parameters on each screen during dual mode.

Executes the transducer guide function.
[TD Guide]
Becomes operative when a linear transducer has been attached to the system.
[S.Adjust Quit] Deactivates the Simple Adjust function.

[D Angle] Sets the Doppler angle to 60°, 0°, or -60°.

Chapter 4
Displays to overlay the bright line of an ECG (electrocardiogram) on an ultrasound im-
[ECG] age.
• To use this function, an optional "Reference Signal Unit" is required.
Starts up the RA Work Flow function.
[RA Work Flow]
• To use this function, "RA Work Flow License" is required.
[Report] Starts up the Report function.

[Worksheet] Starts up the Worksheet function.

The [Joblist] screen appears to allow you to check the status of transmission to the
[Joblist]
DICOM storage server.
The [Export Image] screen appears, allowing you to write image data to an SD memory
[Export Image]
card.
[Full Screen] Starts up full screen display mode.

[Touch Disable] Starts up Touch Off mode.

Starts up the Graph function.
[Graph]
• To use this function, "OB Report License" is required.
Starts up the Description function.
[Description]
• To use this function, "OB Report License" is required.
Displays the MPA Customize pop-up menu.
You can create a combination of multiple parameters according to depth as an MPA. Set
[MPA Customize] the parameters while changing the depth, just like normal parameter operations.
Tap [Utility] to store the settings.
You can display the MPA that you created as an operation button.
(MPA that was created) Set parameters using the values for the MPA that you created.
Starts up the Library function.
[Library]
• To use this function, "Library License" or "Direct Recording License" is required.
Starts up the Voice Control function.
[Voice Control]
• To use this function, "Voice Control License" is required.
Starts up the Panoramic View.
[Panoramic View]
• To use this function, "Panoramic View License" is required.

Continued on the next page

127
4.1 Basic Operation

Button Functions

Every time you press the button during an exam, you can change the port that is con-
nected to the transducer (Port1→ Port2→ Port3).
[Transducer]
Ports to which no transducer is attached are skipped, and if only one transducer is con-
nected, the button does not operate even if it is pressed.
Saves still images and clips to external media.
[Direct Store]
• To use this function, "Direct Recording License" is required.
The image when the button was pressed is stored to external media.
[Direct Still Store]
• To use this function, "Direct Recording License" is required.
Recording of the clip starts and the captured clip is stored to external media.
[Direct Clip Store]*
• To use this function, "Direct Recording License" is required.
The clip generated from the cine data is stored to external media.
[Direct Cine Clip Store]
• To use this function, "Direct Recording License" is required.
Starts up the Hypoechoic Region Characterization function.
[HyRC]
• To use this function, "Hypoechoic Region Characterization License" is required.
*: The length (time) of the clip may not reach the set time, depending on the clip being stored.
Use input/output ports and media with fast transmission speeds and media with fast writing speeds.
There are also limits on the size of files that can be stored in FAT16 format and FAT32 format. If the length (time) of the clip ex-
ceeds the size limit, then only the time up to the size limit is stored.

128
 4.1 Basic Operation

4.1.3 Display of Ultrasound Image and Orientation

The scan mark indicating the ultrasound scanning direction is displayed on the screen.

Scanning direction mark

Refer to "8.1.3 Transducer Part Names".

Scan starting point

Scan mark
Indicates that a scan is starting from the right
side of the screen.

Chapter 4
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you repeatedly scan the same body region, you can check the scanning direction mark and the scan mark position
to more easily acquire images at the same position.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

129
 4.2 Changing Exam Type or Preset during Examination

4.2.1 Changing Exam Type Using the Shortcut Window

1 Touch the transducer mark icon at the bottom right of the study screen.
• The exam type select shortcut window appears.

Up to twelve exam type shortcuts are

located in the shortcut window.

Preset icon

2 Select a desired item.

• After the window is closed, the selected preset / user preset is applied.
• Pressing the preset icon takes you to the [Preset / Transducer Select] screen. Refer to "[Preset / Transducer
Select] screen" of "4.2.1 Changing Exam Type Using the Shortcut Window".

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The appearance of the shortcut window can be customized.
Refer to "Exam select shortcut setting" in "Exam & Preset Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

130
 4.2 Changing Exam Type or Preset during Examination

zz [Preset / Transducer Select] screen

If you want to select an exam type or preset not shown in the dialog box, go to the [Preset / Transducer Select]
screen.

1 Touch the preset icon in the exam type select shortcut window.
• [Preset / Transducer Select] screen is displayed.

Chapter 4
2 Select the desired item from the preset or user preset list.

3 Press the [OK] button to return to the study screen.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you select a preset or user preset in the exam select shortcut setting window and the transducer set in the [Switch]
field for the selected preset or user preset is connected in advance to the system, the transducer will be automati-
cally selected.
• For some transducers, the displayed number may not match the selected setting. If you have selected the number
that is not available, the value will be set as follows when the examination starts.
* The number for spatial compound is shown inside the brackets
Off (1) 1 (1) 2 (3) 3 (3) 4 (5) 5 (5) 6 (3) 7 (5)

Linear transducer Off 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Convex transducer Off 1 2 3 2 3 6
Sector transducer Off 1

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

131
4.2 Changing Exam Type or Preset during Examination

4.2.2 Registering User Preset

The image parameter changed during an examination can be registered as a user preset.
This is useful for reproducing the settings of image parameters in a different examination.

1 Press the [Menu] button > on the [Other] tab.

• The [User Preset Registration] screen is displayed.

[User Preset Name:] input field

Item Functions

[User Preset Name:] Enter the user preset name to be registered.

[Panel Type] Set the panel type for when the user preset is selected.
[Active display screen
Set the screen layout to be displayed when the user preset is selected.
when User Preset is
• You can only select one screen when Elasto is selected as the mode during user preset.
selected:]
Set the mode to switch to when the user preset is selected.
[Active mode when User
• The mode will automatically switch to B-mode if the set mode cannot be switched due to
Preset is selected:]
transducer conditions, etc. being used during user preset.
[Save with Brightness /
Saves screen brightness and contrast settings for the user preset.
Contrast settings:]
[Body Part Examined Select or input a value to set the exam tags used when exporting to DICOM.
Settings(DICOM)] • If a blank field is set, the tags are not transmitted.
[Active User Preset when Set whether or not this user preset is automatically selected when only exam type has been
Exam is selected:] selected.
Sets the transducer to switch to when the user preset is selected.
[Switch transducer when
• The transducer in use prior to applying the user preset will continue to operate if the set
User Preset is selected:]
transducer is not connected during user preset.

132
 4.2 Changing Exam Type or Preset during Examination

2 Touch the [User Preset Name] input field.

• A software keyboard appears.

3 Type in letters using the keyboard for registering a user preset name.

4 Press the [Save] button to return to the study screen.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you select a transducer from the pull-down menu for [Switch transducer when User Preset is selected], the trans-
ducer will be automatically set in the [Switch] field on the user preset screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

zz To delete a registered user preset

If an examination is currently underway, end the examination. In addition, if the user preset that you want to delete is
being applied, select a different preset.

1 Select the desired item to delete from [Setup] screen > [System Settings] screen > [Exam &
Preset] tab > [User Preset] list.

Chapter 4
• Any user presets cannot be deleted if an examination is underway or if they are set in the shortcut window.

2 Press the [Delete User Preset] button.

• A deletion confirmation message appears.

3 Press the [Yes] button.

133
 4.3 Diagnosis Mode Types

With the system you can use three types of diagnosis modes: basic scanning, mixed and multi-image.
Select the desired button from the mode button area to change the diagnosis mode.

Mode button area

The currently selected scanning mode is lit, showing
that it is in active use.

• Basic scanning mode:

B-mode is applied with a different mode(s).
• Mixed mode:
Two or three different basic scanning modes are applied to an image simultaneously. The images can be
viewed on a single screen.
• Multi-image mode:
The images can be viewed on a two-part split screen. Since each subscreen can display a different image, this
function is very useful for displaying the image of a body part or internal organ on multiple screens simultane-
ously. In addition, a B image can be seen in combination with the trace data pointed by the cursor on the B
image.

134
 4.3 Diagnosis Mode Types

Diagnosis mode types available for the system are as follows. For details, see the section on each mode.
Mode Type

B-mode

M-mode

Color Flow-mode

Power Doppler-mode

2D-TDI-mode

Basic scanning mode

SCF-mode

Chapter 4
PW Doppler-mode

PW-TDI-mode

CW Doppler-mode

Elastography-mode

BM mode
BD mode
Bc mode
Mc mode
Mixed mode
BcMc mode
BcD mode
∗ B: B-mode, D: PW / CW Doppler- and PW-TDI-modes,
c: Each has both Color Flow-, Power Doppler-, 2D-TDI-, and SCF-modes.
Dual mode

Split mode

Multi-image mode

Trace mode

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The functions of each mode are limited depending on the transducer you have selected.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

135
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

According to the intended examination, a scanning mode is selected from the mode button area.

4.4.1 B-mode

B-mode is a basic scanning mode of the diagnostic ultrasound system, which displays a brightness-modulated cross-
sectional image of the organ being imaged. 2D cross-sectional images along the scanning direction are displayed in
real time.

<B image>

Start of B-mode
At the startup of the system, B-mode is selected by default.

zz To return to B-mode from another scanning mode

1 Press .

• Changes to B-mode.

How to change parameters

Any of the following procedures are used to change the parameters and the operation area varies according to the
function.
Shared by all modes.
• Use the mini console keys.
• Go to the Study screen on the touch panel > the [Menu] button > and the present mode tab. Select the desired

item using for adjustments.

• Operate the buttons in the mode button area, operation button area, parameter display area or basic information
area.
• Directly touch and drag an operation item or appropriate area.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• There are also functions useful for changing parameters. Refer to "5.6 Common Functions".
• About changes to the settings in the parameter display area, refer to "Parameter display area" of "3.1.2 Displaying
Common Data".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

136
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

B-mode parameter list

Item Functions

TX level settings
[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.
Focal position setting for B-mode
[Focus Position] • Shared with M-mode.
• The actual focal position depends on the transducer used.
Frequency setting for B-mode
• Shared with M-mode.
[B Frequency]
• For the parameter range, sequentially select all the frequencies that are available for the trans-
ducer.
[B Gain] Gain setting for B-mode
B and M image depth settings
[Depth] • The maximum depth depends on the transducer used (or the exam type).
• Minimum depth values differ for each transducer.
[B DR] Dynamic range setting for B-mode
Scan range setting for B-mode
• Controls the field-of-view width of the transducer and increases the frame rate.
[FOV/POS] [FOV] : C ontrol of the scan width (field-of-view width)

Chapter 4
[POS] : C ontrols the scan position when the scan width is less than 100 %
• Enabled when a convex transducer or a sector transducer has been attached to the system.
[LR Flip] Flip horizontal display setting for B images
90° display rotation setting for B images
[Rotate]
• M-mode is also simultaneously-operated (vertical flip for 180° and 270°).

[B Map] Map brightness curve setting for B-mode

[B Time Avg.] Persistence setting for B-mode

[Edge Enhance] Edge enhance setting for B-mode
The following adjustments are done in the relevant modes.
• Auto gain adjustment in B-mode
[Simple Adjust] • Auto C ROI adjustment in Color Flow-mode/Power Doppler-mode/SCF-mode
• Auto Doppler gate adjustment in PW Doppler-mode
• Auto flow velocity adjustment in PW Doppler-mode/CW Doppler-mode/PW-TDI-mode
[S.Adjust Quit] Turns off automatic adjustment of image quality.
[B Color] Color setting for B-mode
Acoustic line density for B-mode
[B Density]
• Values that can be set differ depending on the transducer.
[Focus Pattern] Focal pattern numbers setting for B-mode
Trapezoid display setting for B-mode
[Trapezoid]
• Enabled when a linear transducer has been attached to the system.
[Zoom] B and M image zoom condition settings
[Zoom Ratio] B and M image zoom ratio settings
[B SI-Filter] Speckle noise reduction setting for B images
B image compound setting
[Compound]
• The set value varies according to the transducer used.
Dual mode layout setting
[Dual Layout] • [U/D 1] : Dot-by-dot display
• [U/D 2] : Full screen display

Continued on the next page

137
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

Item Functions

[THI] THI settings for B- and M-mode

Sets whether to display parameters during dual mode (displaying images side-by-side).
• When it is set to [Off] or [Trans.], the ultrasound image is also displayed even in the parameter
[Param. Disp.]
display area.
• When it is set to [Trans.], both the ultrasound image and parameters are displayed.
Sets Show / Hide of the scale marked on the transducer on the screen.
[TD Guide] • Enabled when the biopsy guide display is set to OFF.
• This is enabled when a linear transducer or MC10-3 transducer is equipped.
Sets and displays an auxiliary line(s) in the depth direction.
[Auxiliary Line] • The interval between auxiliary lines varies depending on the display depth.
• Enabled when the biopsy guide display is set to OFF.
[Aux. Line Type] Sets the display range for the auxiliary line.
[Sound Speed] • Sets the velocity used for incoming data.
[B Filter] Sets the internal parameters of B images.
Reverses the image in the vertical direction.
[UD Flip]
• M-mode is also simultaneously operated.
[B iXRET] Sets a process to improve resolution for B-mode.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• [Dual Layout] can be assigned to the mode button area. In that case, you can select [L/R] or [U/D 1] only.
Refer to "[Mode Button] customize" in "Menu Customize Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

138
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

TGC
This is a parameter to determine the receive gain (offset) in relationship to the depth direction.
The receive gain relative to the depth direction of an image is adjusted for individual transducers and is set to a stan-
dard value so that normally you can acquire a good view of the image even if all TGCs are positioned to the center.
Additionally, if you want to partially adjust the image to the desired brightness (receive gain) level, use the TGC slider
volume(s).
Pressing the [TGC] button in the operation button area will display the TGC pop-up menu.

TGC slider volume Longitudinally divides an ultrasound

image into eight equal parts based on
its depth, and assigns TGC gains in

Chapter 4
increasing or decreasing depth order.
By dragging each of the eight control
points (TGC slider volumes) from side
to side, the brightness of each part is
[Center] button adjusted based on its own depth.
Sets all the TGC slider vol- Only live images are adjustable.
umes to the center. Parameter range:
-15 to 15 dB, 0 dB at the center

TGC pop-up menu

139
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

4.4.2 M-mode

In M-mode the B image area is specified using the M cursor, which displays a change over time.
This mode is suitable for observation of active organs such as heart valves. It also allows a B-mode image to be dis-
played, and an observation area to be displayed or sized in the B image.

<M image>

Start of M-mode

1 Press .

• An M cursor appears on the B image.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can change the settings in the [Setup] screen to skip step 1 and switch directly to M-mode with a single-press of
the [M] button.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Press again.

• Changes to M-mode.
• Changes to dual display and shows a trace image.

zz To exit

1 Press again.

• Exits M-mode and returns to B-mode.

M cursor
Using the trackball on the mini console allows you to move the M cursor from side to side.
The cursor shows the relative position of the M-mode image with respect to the B image. So the observation area
can be changed by moving the cursor.

140
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

M-mode parameter list

Item Functions

Sets the transmission voltage.

[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.
[Sweep Speed] Sweep speed setting for M-mode
[M Layout] Display layout setting for M-mode
Gain offset setting for M-mode
[M Gain]
• Sets as the offset value relative to a B-mode gain.
[M DR] Dynamic range setting for M-mode
[M Map] Map brightness curve setting for M-mode
[Edge Enhance] Edge enhance setting for M-mode

Anatomical M-mode
Anatomical M-mode is a function to display a M-mode image on a desired line of a B-mode image.
This function allows you to retrieve a B-mode image from Cine memory in a live state as well as a frozen state and
display a M-mode image.

Chapter 4
• For transducers that can use this function, refer to "10.1.1 Transducer Technical Data and Acoustic Output".

1 Press the [Menu] button during M-mode or the M cursor-mode.

• The menu pop-up window appears with the [M-mode] tab selected.

Item Functions

[Ana-M] Activates / terminates Anatomical M-mode.

Sets a rotation angle of the Ana-M cursor.

[Ana-M Angle] • When this item is changed with Anatomical M deactivated, the Anatomical M-mode is activat-
ed.

141
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

2 When [Ana-M] is set to [On], the freely movable Ana-M cursor and the rotation center cursor
appear.

Ana-M cursor

Rotation center cursor

<Anatomical M image>

• The Ana-M cursor can be rotated centered on the rotation center cursor by the Angle operation (the item in the M-
mode menu or F2 Rotate).
• The Ana-M cursor is displayed as a straight line from one side to another side of the B image. Among the intersec-
tions of the line (cursor) with the sides, the one corresponding to the end position of the M image is displayed as
an arrow. Among the intersections, the one always having a deeper display depth for the B image is the end posi-
tion side. (When the cursor’s rotation angle is 180 degrees and horizontal to the B image, the start and end posi-
tions depend on the setting of the B-mode parameter, [LR Flip]. When [LR Flip] is set to [Left], the left side is the
start position and the right side is the end position.)
• The rotation center cursor is displayed at the center of the Ana-M cursor. It can be moved with trackball or touch
operation.
• When the Anatomical M-mode is activated in a frozen state, the Anatomical M image is displayed from Cine mem-
ory in B-mode.

142
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

zz To exit

1 Set [Ana-M] to [Off].

• When an operation to quit M-mode is performed, Anatomical M-mode is forced to quit.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Cine in the Anatomical M-mode appears for the time duration of Cine retrieved in B-mode and thus the display time
is generally shorter than that of Cine displayed in M-mode.
• If [Ana-M] is set to [On] after the image is frozen in BM mode, the M image may move to the right.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 4

143
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

4.4.3 Color Flow-mode

In Color Flow-mode, color blood flow patterns are displayed within the Region of Interest (ROI) in a B image.
ROI is called "C ROI" in Color Flow-, Power Doppler-, 2D-TDI- and SCF-mode.
This mode is suitable for the study of the character, average velocity and direction of blood flow. It also allows a B-
mode image to be displayed, and a C ROI to be displayed or sized in the B image.

C ROI

<Color image>

Start of Color Flow-mode

1 Press .

• A C ROI appears on the B image.

• CFM stands for Color Flow Mapping.

zz To exit

1 Press again.

• Exits Color Flow-mode and returns to B-mode.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Touching and dragging a C ROI permits you to change the position and size of the C ROI and also to select the area
of the C ROI to be color-processed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In addition to the HINT above, there are useful functions available for manipulation of a C ROI. Refer to "5.6.1 Opera-
tion Items".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

144
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

Color Flow-mode parameter list

Item Functions

Sets the transmission voltage.

[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.
Velocity setting for Color Flow-mode
[C Scale]
• The parameter range depends on the transducer used.
Steer angle setting for Color Flow-mode
[C Steer]
• Enabled when a linear transducer has been connected to the system.
[C Gain] Gain setting for Color Flow-mode
[C Filter] Setting for decreasing the low-velocity noise of Color Flow-mode
Frequency setting for Color Flow-mode
[C Frequency]
• The actual frequency values differ from one transducer to another.
[Temporal] Repeated transmission count setting for Color Flow-mode
Acoustic line density setting for Color Flow-mode
[C Density]
• IL can be selected if a linear transducer or sector transducer is connected.
[Motion Sup.] Motion artifact reduction setting for Color Flow-mode
[Spatial Avg.] Spatial direction smoothing setting for Color Flow-mode

Chapter 4
[C Time Avg.] Time direction smoothing setting for Color Flow-mode
Display priority setting for Color Flow-mode
[C Priority]
• A larger value represents a higher priority, being more effective in overriding B-mode.
[C Invert] Color invert setting for Color Flow-mode
[C Baseline] Baseline setting for Color Flow-mode
Map setting for Color Flow-mode
[Color Map] • When [Improvement of Noise Reduction Performance in CFM/PDI/SCF Mode] on the settings
screen is on, you cannot choose [VV1] to [VV4].
Changes the B-mode parameters in order to improve Color Flow-mode frame rate.
[FR priority] • When [FR Priority] is set to anything other than [Off], the setting values of THI and acoustic line
density may be limited.
[C SI-Filter] Image processing setting for Color Flow-mode
Sets a process to improve resolution for CFM/PDI/SCF mode.
[C iXRET]
• The parameter range depends on the transducer used.
The following adjustments are done in the relevant modes.
• Auto C ROI adjustment in Color Flow-mode
[Simple Adjust]
• Auto Doppler gate adjustment in PW Doppler-mode
• Auto flow velocity adjustment in PW Doppler-mode/CW Doppler-mode/PW-TDI-mode

145
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

4.4.4 Power Doppler-mode

In Power Doppler-mode, the intensity of blood-flow color is displayed in the ROI in a B image.
This mode is suitable for the study of the character and volume of blood flow. It also allows a C ROI to be displayed
or sized in the B image.
• For details on how to operate C ROI, refer to "4.4.3 Color Flow-mode".

C ROI

<Power image>

Start of Power Doppler-mode

1 Press .

• A C ROI appears on the B image.

• PDI stands for Power Doppler Imaging.

zz To exit

1 Press again.

• Exits Power Doppler-mode and returns to B-mode.

146
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

Power Doppler-mode parameter list

Item Functions

Sets the transmission voltage.

[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.
[C Scale] Velocity setting for Power Doppler-mode
Steer angle setting for Power Doppler-mode
[C Steer]
• Enabled when a linear transducer has been connected to the system.
[C Gain] Gain setting for Power Doppler-mode
[C Filter] Setting for decreasing the low-velocity noise of Power Doppler-mode
Frequency setting for Power Doppler-mode
[C Frequency]
• The actual frequency value differs from one transducer to another.
[Temporal] Repeated transmission count setting for Power Doppler-mode
Acoustic line density setting for Power Doppler-mode
[C Density]
• IL can be selected if a linear transducer or sector transducer is connected.
[Motion Sup.] Motion artifact reduction setting for Power Doppler-mode
[Spatial Avg.] Spatial direction smoothing setting for Power Doppler-mode
[C Time Avg.] Time direction smoothing setting for Power Doppler-mode

Chapter 4
Display priority setting for Power Doppler-mode
[C Priority]
• A larger value represents a higher priority, being more effective in overriding B-mode.
[C Invert] Color invert setting for Directional Power Doppler-mode
[C Baseline] No alterable.
Map setting for Power Doppler-mode
[Color Map]
• Map for Directional Power Doppler-mode is included.
[P DR] Dynamic range setting for Power Doppler-mode
[Power Cut Off] Reduced power cut setting for Power Doppler-mode
Setting for changing the B mode parameter to increase the Power Doppler-mode frame rate.
[FR priority] • When [FR Priority] is set to anything other than [Off], the setting values of THI and acoustic line
density may be limited.
[C SI-Filter] Image processing setting for Power Doppler-mode
Sets a process to improve resolution for CFM/PDI/SCF mode.
[C iXRET]
• The parameter range depends on the transducer used.
The following adjustments are done in the relevant modes.
• Auto C ROI adjustment in Power Doppler-mode
[Simple Adjust]
• Auto Doppler gate adjustment in PW Doppler-mode
• Auto flow velocity adjustment in PW Doppler-mode/CW Doppler-mode/PW-TDI-mode

147
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

4.4.5 2D-TDI-mode

In 2D-TDI-mode, information on tissue movements is displayed within the Region of Interest (ROI) in a B image.
This mode is suitable for studying movements of the heart wall. This mode allows you to display a C ROI and adjust
the size within a B image.
• For transducers that can use this function, refer to "10.1.1 Transducer Technical Data and Acoustic Output".
• For details on how to operate C ROI, refer to "4.4.3 Color Flow-mode".

<2D-TDI image>

Start of 2D-TDI-mode

1 Press .

zz To exit

1 Press again.

148
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

2D-TDI-mode parameter list

Item Functions

Sets the transmission voltage.

[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.

[C Scale] Velocity setting for 2D-TDI-mode

[C Gain] Gain setting for 2D-TDI-mode

[Temporal] Repeated transmission count setting for 2D-TDI-mode
[C Density] Acoustic line density setting for 2D-TDI-mode
[Spatial Avg.] Spatial direction smoothing setting for 2D-TDI-mode
[C Time Avg.] Time direction smoothing setting for 2D-TDI-mode
Display priority setting for 2D-TDI-mode
[C Priority]
• A larger value represents a higher priority, being more effective in overriding B-mode.
[C Invert] Color invert setting for Directional 2D-TDI-mode
[C Baseline] Baseline setting for 2D-TDI-mode
[Color Map] Map setting for 2D-TDI-mode

Chapter 4
Setting for changing the B mode parameter to increase the 2D-TDI-mode frame rate.
[FR priority] • When [FR Priority] is set to anything other than [Off], the setting values of THI and acoustic line
density may be limited.

149
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

4.4.6 SCF-mode

In SCF-mode, color blood flow patterns are displayed within the Region of Interest (ROI) in a B image.
This mode is suitable for a study to display blood flow in a section close to the body surface with resolution higher
than that in the Color Flow-mode. This mode allows you to display a C ROI and adjust the size within a B image.
• For details on how to operate C ROI, refer to "4.4.3 Color Flow-mode".
• For transducers that can use this function, refer to "10.1.1 Transducer Technical Data and Acoustic Output".

<SCF image>

Start of SCF-mode

1 Press .

zz To exit

1 Press again.

150
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

SCF-mode parameter list

Item Functions

Sets the transmission voltage.

[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.

[C Scale] Flow velocity setting for SCF-mode

Steer angle setting for SCF-mode

[C Steer]
• Enabled when a linear transducer has been connected to the system.

[C Gain] Gain setting for SCF-mode

[C Filter] MTI filter setting for SCF-mode

Frequency setting for SCF-mode
[C Frequency]
• The actual frequency value differs for each transducer.
[Temporal] Repeated transmission count setting for SCF-mode
Acoustic line density setting for SCF-mode
[C Density]
• [L] can be selected if a linear transducer is connected.
[Motion Sup.] Motion artifact reduction setting for SCF-mode

Chapter 4
[Spatial Avg.] Spatial direction smoothing setting for SCF-mode
[C Time Avg.] Time direction smoothing setting for SCF-mode
Display priority setting for SCF-mode
[C Priority]
• A larger value represents a higher priority, being more effective in overriding B-mode.
[C Invert] Color invert setting for Directional SCF-mode
[C Baseline] Baseline setting for SCF-mode
Map setting for SCF-mode
[Color Map]
• Map for Directional SCF-mode is included.
[P DR] Dynamic range setting for SCF-mode
[Power Cut Off] Reduced power cut setting for SCF-mode
Setting for changing the B mode parameter to increase the SCF-mode frame rate.
[FR priority] • When [FR Priority] is set to anything other than [Off], the setting values of THI and acoustic line
density may be limited.
[C SI-Filter] Image processing setting for SCF-mode
Sets a process to improve resolution for CFM/PDI/SCF mode.
[C iXRET]
• The parameter range depends on the transducer used.
The following adjustments are done in the relevant modes.
• Auto C ROI adjustment in SCF-mode
[Simple Adjust]
• Auto Doppler gate adjustment in PW Doppler-mode
• Auto flow velocity adjustment in PW Doppler-mode/CW Doppler-mode/PW-TDI-mode

151
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

4.4.7 Elastography-mode

WARNING •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not perform the biopsy during pressurization of the human tissue in Elastography-mode. There is a risk of scar-
ring the patient.
• Examinations by elastography should be performed by trained persons with sufficient knowledge and skills.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Strain elastography techniques are used in Elastography-mode. The image is generated from the strain caused by
the uniform pressure of the transducer on the tissue. The color elastic image will be displayed superimposed over
the ROI for elastography on the B image.

This function works with L18-4, L11-3 and WL13-3 transducers.

Requires the optional "Strain Elastography License."

ROI for elastography

Pressurization state Display stable

navigation interval

Starting Elastography-mode

1 Press .

zz To exit

1 Press again.

Elastography-mode parameter list

Item Functions

Sets the transmission voltage.

[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.
Switching Display-mode, Split or Single screen
• If Split is selected in the display mode setting, the screen will be displayed in Split-mode when
[Display Mode]
Elastography-mode starts. When transferring from Dual to Split screen display the image clears
from the inactive side.

152
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

Item Functions

Select the Display method of the guide display for checking the pressurization state
• [Off]: No display
[Navi Type] • 1: Display the time variation of the strain
• 2: Display the repetition tempo score for pressurization and relaxation
• 3: Display the pressurization stability
[Navi Position] Select the Display location of the guide display to check the pressurization state
Select the Color Map of the Left or Upper screen in the Single and Split-screen displays
[Color Map]
Stronger coloration in the upper color map indicates softer tissue. Stronger coloration in the lower
[Color Map L(U)]
map indicates harder tissue.
[Color Map R(D)] Select the Color Map of the right or lower screen in the Split display
Select the color level of elastography image
[Color Offset]
• The smaller the value the stronger the blue color: the larger the value the stronger the red color.
Select the elastography image color range
[Color Range]
• The smaller the value the stronger the color contrast.
Select the frequency for Elastography-mode
[E Frequency] • [eGen] : For general purpose
• [ePen] : For penetrated part
[E Invert] Color display inversion

Chapter 4
Select the scanning line density
[E Density]
• The scanning line density increases in the order [L] < [M] < [H] reducing the frame rate.
Select the pressurization speed
[Comp. Speed] • The larger the value, the higher the frame rate. A higher frame rate is required to match a higher
pressurization speed.
Select the Time Avg. strength
[E Time Avg.]
• The larger the value the smoother the time variation of the elastography image.
Select the Spatial Avg. strength
[Spatial Avg.]
• The larger the value the smoother the spatial variation of the elastography image.
Select the strength for removing the noise frame
[Rejection]
• The larger the value the greater the noise reduction.
Select the strength for homogenizing uneven pressurization of the elastography image
[Equalization] • The larger the value the greater the contrast is enhanced/unevenness of the elastic image is ho-
mogenized.
Select the blending ratio for the elastography and B-mode images
[Blend Ratio]
• The larger the value the greater the composition ratio of the elastography image.
Switches the stable pressurization interval display in Cine data
• Analyzes the most stable pressurization state in Cine data and displays it on the Cine bar in the
freeze state.
• If there is no continuous stable pressurization interval no stable interval is displayed.
[Stable Section]
• When a frame inside the stable interval is selected the following display changes.
-- The Cine numbers are displayed in green.
-- The green frame is displayed in pressurization state navigation.
• The approx. 1-second stable interval is displayed.

153
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The [Stable Section] function displays the estimated interval in which stable pressurization takes place. It does not
display the diagnostic image.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The following B-mode parameters change automatically when you enter Elastography-mode. The original values are
automatically restored when you exit Elastography-mode.
– [B Density] : If higher than [H], select [H]
– [Trapezoid] : [Off]
– [Focus Pattern] : 1
• The following settings change automatically when you enter Elastography-mode. The original state is not restored
when you exit Elastography-mode.
– [Biopsy], [SNV] : [Off]
– [ECG] : [Off]
• When using Elastography-mode, M-mode/PW Doppler-mode/PW-TDI/Color flow/Power Doppler/SCF-mode cannot
be activated.
• When using Dual-mode, if one of the planes is in Elastography-mode, Biopsy, and ECG cannot be activated.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Except when [Off] is selected for [Equalization] uneven coloring can be alleviated.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Pressurization state navigation

Pressurization state navigation is a function for assisting the elastic image display operation.
To display the elastic image continuously, repeat following action: lightly pressurize the target site with the transducer
and then release the pressure.
Pressurization state navigation assists the operation by displaying the pressurization state in three ways (Navigation
types).

zz Navigation type 1

In Navigation type 1: The strain time variation is displayed by line chart.

If the line chart stays between the upper and lower blue lines, the elastic image can easily be displayed by re-
peating the pressurization and relaxation.

zz Navigation type 2

Minimum score display example Maximum score display example

Navigation type 2 displays the pressurization and relaxation repetitions as scores.

The higher the score the more easily the elastic image is displayed.

154
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

zz Navigation type 3

Inside of range display example Outside of range display example

Navigation type 3 displays the pressurization stability.

If the pressurization strength on the right and left sides of the transducer differs the elastic image coloration will
be uneven.
Navigation type 3 displays the pressurization strength on the right and left sides of the transducer. Change the
transducer angle and repeat the pressurization/relaxation to achieve a horizontal line and display the evenly col-
ored elastic image.

Stable Interval
Stable interval display is a function which displays the interval by assuming continuous pressurization has been per-
formed to achieve stable pressure.
When On is selected for the stable interval setting, part of the Cine bar turns green to indicate the stable interval at
the moment the display is frozen.

Chapter 4
Searching the stable interval within Cine makes it easier to find the best image for the diagnosis.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• A stable interval assumes stable pressurization has been performed. Not all intervals are appropriate for the diagno-
sis.
• During pressurization or inappropriate pressurization (excessive distortion or lateral movement of the cross-section)
images that are unsuitable for diagnosis may be selected.
• When pressurization is intermittent (i.e. heartbeat, etc.) stable intervals may be undetectable.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

155
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

4.4.8 PW Doppler-mode

In this document Pulsed Wave Doppler-mode is referred to as "PW Doppler-mode".

PW Doppler-mode is a mode used for observation of blood-flow information such as the direction and velocity of
blood flowing through vessels and the heart.

<PW Doppler image>

Start of PW Doppler-mode

1 Press .

• A D cursor appears on the B image.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can change the settings in the [Setup] screen to skip step 1 and switch directly to PW Doppler-mode with a
single-press of the [PW] button.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Press again.

• Changes to PW Doppler-mode.
• Changes to dual display and shows a trace image.

zz To exit

1 Press again.

• Exits PW Doppler-mode and returns to B-mode.

156
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

PW Doppler-mode parameter list

Item Functions

Sets the transmission voltage.

[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.
[Gate Size] Sample volume size setting

[Angle Correct.] Angle correction setting

[D Scale] Velocity setting

[D Baseline] Baseline setting
[D Gain] Gain setting
[Sweep Speed] Sweep speed setting
[Angle] Sets angle to 60°, 0°, or -60°
Steer angle setting
[D Steer]
• Enabled when a linear transducer has been connected to the system.
[D Layout] Display layout setting
[D Filter] Wall filter setting
Frequency setting
[D Frequency]

Chapter 4
• The actual frequency value differs from one transducer to another.
[D Invert] Display invert setting
[D Color] Color setting
[D Map] Brightness curve setting
[D DR] Dynamic range setting
[Audio Volume] Audio volume setting
Audio balance setting
[Audio Balance]
• L, C, and R mean left, center, and right, respectively.
[Trace Thresh.] Trace threshold setting
[Trace Smooth] Trace smoothing setting
[Trace Mean] Trace Mean setting
[Trace Max] Trace Max setting
The following adjustments are done in the relevant modes.
[Simple Adjust] • Auto Doppler gate adjustment in PW Doppler-mode
• Auto flow velocity adjustment in PW Doppler-mode
[Reject] Removal of noise in luminance direction

157
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

4.4.9 PW-TDI-mode

PW-TDI-mode is a mode used for observing movements of the heart wall tissues.
• For transducers that can use this function, refer to "10.1.1 Transducer Technical Data and Acoustic Output".

<PW-TDI image>

Start of PW-TDI-mode

1 Press .

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can change the settings in the [Setup] screen to skip step 1 and switch directly to PW-TDI-mode with a single-
press of the [PW-TDI] button.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Press again.

• Changes to PW-TDI-mode.
• Changes to dual display and shows a trace image.

zz To exit

1 Press again.

158
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

PW-TDI-mode parameter list

Item Functions

Sets the transmission voltage.

[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.

[Gate Size] Sample volume size setting

[Angle Correct.] Angle correction setting

[D Scale] Flow velocity setting

[D Baseline] Baseline setting

[D Gain] Gain setting
[Sweep Speed] Sweep speed setting
[Angle] Sets angle to 60°, 0°, or -60°
[D Layout] Display layout setting
[D Filter] Wall filter setting
[D Invert] Display invert setting
[D Color] Color setting

Chapter 4
[D Map] Brightness curve setting
[D DR] Dynamic range setting
[Audio Volume] Audio volume setting
[Audio Balance] Audio balance setting
[Trace Thresh.] Trace threshold setting
[Trace Smooth] Trace smoothing setting
[Trace Mean] Trace Mean setting
[Trace Max] Trace Max setting
[Simple Adjust] Auto flow velocity adjustment in PW-TDI-mode
[Reject] Removal of noise in luminance direction

159
4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

4.4.10 CW Doppler-mode

The continuous-wave Doppler-mode is referred to as a "CW Doppler-mode" in this document.

The CW Doppler-mode is intended to observe high-velocity blood flow data.
• For transducers that can use this function, refer to "10.1.1 Transducer Technical Data and Acoustic Output".
• To use this function, an optional "CW kit" is required. Contact your service representative.

<CW Doppler image>

Start of CW Doppler-mode

1 Press .

• A CW cursor appears on the B image.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can change the settings in the [Setup] screen to skip step 1 and switch directly to CW Doppler-mode with a
single-press of the [CW] button.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Press again.

• Changes to CW Doppler-mode.
• Changes to dual display and shows a trace image.

zz To exit

1 Press again.

• Exits CW Doppler-mode and returns to B-mode.

160
 4.4 Basic Scanning Mode

CW Doppler-mode parameter list

Item Functions

Sets the transmission voltage.

[Tx Level]
• Displayed in all modes.

[Angle Correct.] Angle correction setting for CW Doppler-mode

[D Scale] Flow velocity setting for CW Doppler-mode

[D Baseline] Baseline setting for CW Doppler-mode
[D Gain] Gain setting for CW Doppler-mode
[Sweep Speed] Sweep speed setting for CW Doppler-mode
[Angle] Sets angle to 60°, 0°, or -60°
[D Layout] Display layout setting for CW Doppler-mode
[D Filter] Wall filter setting for CW Doppler-mode
[D Invert] Display invert setting for CW Doppler-mode
[D Color] Color setting for CW Doppler-mode
[D Map] Brightness curve setting for CW Doppler-mode
[D DR] Dynamic range setting for CW Doppler-mode

Chapter 4
[Audio Volume] Audio volume setting for CW Doppler-mode
Audio balance setting for CW Doppler-mode
[Audio Balance]
• L, C, and R mean left, center, and right, respectively.
[Trace Thresh.] Trace threshold setting for CW Doppler-mode
[Trace Smooth] Trace smoothing setting for CW Doppler-mode
[Trace Mean] Trace Mean setting for CW Doppler-mode

[Trace Max] Trace Max setting for CW Doppler-mode

[Simple Adjust] Auto flow velocity adjustment in CW Doppler-mode
[Reject] Noise removal setting for CW Doppler-mode

161
 4.5 Mixed Mode

In mixed mode several different types of modes can be combined and displayed simultaneously.
The modes currently being used in mixed mode are referred to as "active image modes". Parameters of the active
image modes can be specified.
Mode combinations are shown below.
Mixed mode Functions

No color

Displays a B image and an M image of the loca-

BM
tion of the cursor on the B image. Cursor
M

No color

Simultaneously displays a B image and a Dop-

pler image of the location of the D cursor on the
BD B image.
• The figure on the right is a display example of
D cursor
PW
PW Doppler-mode.

With color

A combination of a B image plus a Color image

Bc or a combination of a B image plus a Power im-
age C ROI

With color

Mc
A combination of an M image plus a Color im-
age*, and Mc to be displayed full-screen.
Mc
K

With color

Displays a B image (color imaging available*)

BcMc and an M image of the location of the cursor on
the B image. Mc

With color

Displays a B image (color imaging available)

and a Doppler image of the location of the D
BcD cursor on the B image.
• The figure on the right is a display example of PW
PW Doppler-mode.

D: Each has both PW Doppler- and CW Doppler-modes.

c: Each has both Color Flow- and Power Doppler-modes.
*: BcMc and Mc modes are not supported on Power images.

162
 4.5 Mixed Mode

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Elastography-mode is different to normal composite modes therefore it is not included in the table.Please refer to
"4.4.7 Elastography-mode" for further details.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 4

163
 4.6 Multi-image Mode

Dual mode and Split mode are supported. Two images are arranged side by side or one above the other so that you
can compare the two images simultaneously.
In addition, it also supports trace mode that enables the simultaneous display of M-, PW / CW Doppler-, or PW-TDI-
mode’s trace data, so you can display a B image and trace data simultaneously.
Dual mode allows images to be displayed in each mixed mode. An active screen, called an "active plane," is indicat-
ed by its top scale with a blue horizontal line marked on it. The buttons on an active plane are operated in the same
manner as in a mixed mode.

4.6.1 Dual Mode

Dual mode is a mode that splits the screen into two windows positioned side by side (L/R) or one above the other (U/
D) for display.
One of the two images is in a live state, and the other is in a frozen state. They are displayed as a B image or a Bc
image.

1 Press or in the mode button area.

• Split screen is displayed.

zz To switch between active planes

1 Press .

• Switches between active planes each time you press the button.
• Touching the non-active screen also allows you to switch between active planes. Refer to the item "Active
Plane Indicator on Dual Mode" under "Image Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".

zz To return to a single screen

1 Press .

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The buttons to be displayed in the mode button area are customizable. If you want to use a dedicated button to
switch between live / frozen states in dual mode, make settings to have the following buttons displayed on the [Mode
Button] screen.

[Dual L] button

[Dual R] button

Refer to "[Mode Button] customize" in "Menu Customize Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

• Press to change the layout of dual mode. Also, the [Dual], [Dual L], and [Dual R] buttons will switch according

to the layout.
• In Elastography-mode, Dual-mode is available only when switched to Single-mode by pressing the [Display Mode]
menu button.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

164
 4.6 Multi-image Mode

zz To change the layout

[Menu] button > Pop-up menu > Current mode tab
Use the [Dual Layout] ([M Layout] / [D Layout]) button to select the layout.
• The scan mark in the frozen image turns gray.
• The window opposite the live image either displays a frozen image or is blank with no image data.
• Parameters are shown on the respective images.
<L/R> <U/D 1>

• B images are ar- • B images are arranged one above

ranged side by the other.
side. Because each B image is magni-
fied to the same degree as B-
mode images, the upper half of
Live Freeze
the B image can be displayed.

<U/D 2>

• B images are arranged one above

the other.

Chapter 4
Because the display depth of the
B images is the same as that of
B-mode images, the entire B im-
ages can be displayed; but, they
are scaled down to a smaller size.

zz To exit

1 Press .

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In Elastography-mode, you can switch to Split-mode by pressing [Display Mode] menu button.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

165
4.6 Multi-image Mode

4.6.2 Split Mode

Split mode is a mode that splits the screen into two windows positioned side by side (L/R) or one above the other (U/
D) for display.
Unlike the dual mode, in the Split mode both B images or Bc images are put either in a live or frozen state and both
windows are always active.

Live Live Live Live

<L/R without color> <L/R with color>

1 Press in the mode button area.

zz To exit

1 Press .

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In Elastography-mode, you can switch to Split-mode by pressing [Display Mode] menu button.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

166
 4.6 Multi-image Mode

4.6.3 Trace Mode

Displays a B image (including color images) and trace data indicated by the cursor on the B image.
Trace mode is available on a layout in M-, PW / CW Doppler-, or PW-TDI-mode.
Press either one of the mode buttons to display trace mode and, as necessary, press any of the following buttons.

zz Simul. mode
In M-, PW Doppler-, or PW-TDI-mode, both B- and trace images are put in a live state.

1 Changes to either M-mode, PW Doppler-mode, or PW-TDI-mode.

2 Press .

• Both B-images and trace images are displayed in a live state.

zz Update mode
In M-, PW / CW Doppler-, or PW-TDI-mode, either of B- or trace images is put in a live state and the other image is

Chapter 4
put in a frozen state.
M-mode is only updatable during Mc.

1 Changes to either M-mode, PW / CW Doppler-mode, or PW-TDI-mode.

2 Press to switch between live and frozen states.

• Switches between live / frozen states each time you press .

zz Full trace mode

Enlarges trace mode-data to full screen.

1 Changes to either M-mode or PW / CW Doppler-mode.

2 Press .

• Displays real-time trace data in full screen.

• Press again to return to the normal display.

• The is used to switch the trace display to full screen.

167
 4.7 ECG Mode

The ECG function is a function that allows you to overlay the bright line of an ECG (electrocardiogram) on an ultra-
sound image, as well as synchronizing a B image with the bright line of the ECG for display.
To use this function, an optional "Reference Signal Unit" is required. Contact your service representative.

WARNING •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To prevent the electric shock, be sure to confirm the following cautions before use.
– There should be no abnormality on the ECG cable.
– ECG Unit should be connected to the specified ECG cable for the Reference Signal Unit.
• Connect the Reference Signal Unit to the system prior to attach the ECG electrodes to a patient. Also, avoid bringing
the patient with the ECG electrodes attached into contact with other conductive parts including grounding. Doing so
may cause an electric shock to the patient when the connector of the ECG cable touches the live part.
• Do not connect the Reference Signal Unit to any connector other than USB connector. Doing so may cause a break-
down.
• Do not let ECG electrodes to touch patient’s heart directly. Doing so may cause a cardiac arrest.
– ECG is Type BF applied part, and is not intended for direct cardiac application.
• Be sure to use the ECG cable that is included with the Reference Signal Unit.
• The selection and use of ECG electrodes are the responsibility of a user.
• Remove any ECG electrodes from your patient before using equipment such as an electric scalpel, high-frequency
therapy equipment, electric stimulator or electric defibrillator. Also, make sure to keep any ultrasound transducer
away from the patient. The patient may get burned or receive an electric shock.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• ECG display is information that is used strictly for your reference. Do not use these waveforms and the display for
diagnostic or monitoring purposes. Also, note that the heart rate of your patient may not be displayed correctly if he/
she uses a pacemaker or an implantable electric stimulator, or has an arrhythmia.
• Before using the Reference Signal Unit, check cables for damage, and the connector for looseness.
• Clean the ECG cable periodically.
– Be careful not to get the ECG clips wet. ECG waveforms will not be correctly displayed.
– Do not soak the connector section in water. Simply wipe it clean with a dry cloth. Entry of water into the connector can
cause a failure.
– Wipe off any dirt on the ECG cable, using a cloth dampened with a solution of isopropyl alcohol diluted down to 30 % to
50 % or 70 % of ethyl alcohol.
• Wipe off any dirt on the ECG Unit and USB cable using a soft cloth moistened with a mild detergent.
• The Reference Signal Unit is intended to connect to a medical device complying with IEC 60601-1. Connect the Ref-
erence Signal Unit only to this system.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

168
 4.7 ECG Mode

4.7.1 Connecting the optional Reference Signal Unit

Follow the procedure below to connect the Reference Signal Unit.

1 Connect USB / ECG cables and ECG Unit as show in the following figure if they are not con-
nected yet.

2 Connect the USB cable of the Reference Signal Unit to the system.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the system is on, turn it off, connect the USB cable and then turn it on again.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

3 Attach the ECG electrodes to the patient.

4 Follow the procedure in "4.7.2 ECG Cable and Electrode Positions" to connect the ECG cable
clips of the Reference Signal Unit.

Chapter 4
Reference Signal Unit

ECG Unit

USB cable ECG cables (one IEC type and one AHA type)

169
4.7 ECG Mode

4.7.2 ECG Cable and Electrode Positions

For other than USA

The relationships between the lead wire colors of the ECG cable (IEC type) and the electrode positions are described
below.

zz Electrode positions in case of ECG cable (IEC type)

R (Red) L (Yellow)

F (Green)

Symbol Lead color (clip color) Application position

R Red Right infraclavicular fossa

L Yellow Left infraclavicular fossa
F Green Lowest rib on the left anterior auxiliary line

For USA
The relationships between the lead wire colors of the ECG cable(AHA type) and the electrode positions are de-
scribed below.

zz Electrode positions in case of ECG cable (AHA type)

RA (White) LA (Black)

LL (Red)

Symbol Lead color (clip color) Application position

RA White Right infraclavicular fossa

LA Black Left infraclavicular fossa
LL Red Lowest rib on the left anterior auxiliary line

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This system is designed to use ECG lead II.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

170
 4.7 ECG Mode

4.7.3 Starting the ECG Display

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• There is a slight time lag between the ECG display and the ultrasound image. When the ECG display is used in a
single mode with the ultrasound image in a live state, the time lag between the ECG display and the ultrasound im-
age will accumulate. In such a case, in order to reset the accumulated time lag, you should freeze the image every
10 minutes or so.
• The ECG function is not available in any of the following cases.
– When the "Reference Signal Unit" is not connected.
– During a frozen state where the bright ECG line is not displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Press the [Menu] button > on the [Other] tab.

• The bright ECG line is displayed in the image display area.

• The ECG pop-up menu appears, and the [ECG Display] button turns ON.

Chapter 4
• The heart rate is displayed in the basic information area.
(1)

(2) (3) (4)

No. Item Functions

The heart rate calculated from ECG waveform is displayed.

(1) Heart rate • The value is not updated during a frozen state.
• It is not displayed without the bright ECG line.
Displays the ECG menu.
(2) ECG pop-up menu
For details, refer to "4.7.4 ECG Pop-up Menu".
When [ECG Display] in the ECG pop-up menu is ON, an ECG waveform (bright line) is
(3) ECG bright line
displayed in green.
Default display area for ECG.
(4) ECG drawing area • The display position can be moved up / down using [ECG Position] in the ECG pop-up
menu.

171
4.7 ECG Mode

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• During the dual mode, the bright ECG line is displayed only on the active plane, allowing you to set the [ECG Gain]
and display position. Switching the active plane puts the bright ECG line on the non-active screen into a frozen state.
• During a live state, the bright ECG line shows real-time sweeps. During a frozen state, the bright ECG line stops
showing real-time sweeps, and Cine record becomes available.
• When a trace image is used in mixed mode, the bright ECG line is displayed only on the trace image side.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

zz ECG marker
Only during B-mode and Cine (in a frozen state), a marker is displayed at the position of the ECG bright line being
synchronous with the B image.

Marker

172
 4.7 ECG Mode

4.7.4 ECG Pop-up Menu

With the ECG function enabled, press the [Menu] button > on the [Other] tab to display the ECG pop-up
menu.

Chapter 4
Button Functions

Enables or disables the ECG display.

• If it is set to ON, the bright ECG line which reflects the settings for the [ECG Gain]
[ECG Display]
and [ECG Position] will be displayed.
• If it is set to OFF, the bright line is hidden.
Sets the ECG gain.
[ECG Gain]
Units : dB
[ECG Position] Sets the ECG display position.
Enables / disables sync display of Cine images of B mode and ECG bright line.
[ECG Sync]
• For details, refer to "4.7.5 ECG Synchronization".
Set the delay time that elapses after detection of R wave.
[ECG Delay]
Units : ms
Closes the menu.
[Close]
• The display of the bright ECG line is not affected.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the Reference Signal Unit becomes disconnected during the display of the ECG pop-up menu, the function termi-
nates and the menu is closed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

173
4.7 ECG Mode

4.7.5 ECG Synchronization 4.7.6 ECG Finishing Procedure

The Cine-recorded B image and ECG bright line can
be displayed in sync with each other.
This is enabled only in a frozen state.
1 Press the [Menu] button >
[Other] tab.
• The bright ECG line is displayed in the image
display area.
• The ECG pop-up menu appears, and the [ECG
Display] button turns ON.
• The heart rate is displayed in the basic informa-
tion area.
2 Press the FREEZE button.
• An ECG marker is displayed at the center of the
ECG drawing area.
Use the following procedure to end the use of ECG.
1 Disconnect all the ECG cable clips of the
Reference Signal Unit from the ECG elec-
on the trodes.
2 Remove the ECG electrodes from the pa-
tient.
3 Disconnect the USB cable of the Refer-
ence Signal Unit from the system.
IMPORTANT • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• Turn off the system before disconnecting the USB
cable.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

3 Use [ECG Delay] in the ECG pop-up menu
to set the delay time.
• When [ECG Sync] is ON, you cannot change
the delay time.
• During a motion review of Cine image or if [Align]
of Cine function is set to ON, it cannot be oper-
ated.
4 If necessary, separate the Reference Sig-
nal Unit’s USB / ECG cables and ECG Unit
from one another.
5 Prevent the Reference Signal Unit’s USB
/ ECG cables from bending sharply when
storing them in a proper place.

4 Press [ECG Sync] in the ECG pop-up

menu.
• The B image of when the ECG delay time elaps-
es after R wave detection is displayed.
• On the ECG bright line, this timing is displayed
in red.

5 Operate the Cine bar.

• The B image of when the ECG delay time elaps-
es after R wave detection is displayed.

HINT • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••

• An M or Doppler image cannot be displayed in
sync with the ECG bright line.
• [ECG Sync] will turn off automatically when the
Reference Signal Unit is disconnected.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

zz To exit

1 Turn off [ECG Sync].

• Returns to normal Cine playback.

174
 4.8 Panoramic View

The panoramic view is a function that displays a panoramic image by combining the B-mode image with the motion
of the transducer.
The transducers that can use it are the L18-4, L14-4, and L11-3.
You must have the optional "Panoramic View License" to use this function. Contact your Konica Minolta service rep-
resentative.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Panoramic images are generated based on continuous multiple images captured by scanning, whereupon the posi-
tion of each image is estimated and combined according to those results. Because of this, distortion may occur, due
to the scanning, in the panoramic image that is captured. Use panoramic images as reference images.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

4.8.1 Capturing Panoramic Images

Chapter 4
1 Press the [Menu] button > [Panoramic View] button on the [Other] tab.
• The panorama setup screen appears, and then the panoramic ROI appears.
• The depth is in a range from 3 to 7 cm.
• The screen switches to the B-mode image.

Panoramic ROI

175
4.8 Panoramic View

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In the following cases, a panoramic image that is different from the actual structure may be generated.
– When the rendered cross section changes because of the angle of the transducer
– When the transducer is moved in a direction different from the direction of the rendered cross section
– When there is extensive noise in the image
– When the image’s contrast is not suitable
– If there is a strong artifact (acoustic shadow) generated by a hard structural element, such as a bone
– If the radius of the curve of the target is smaller than the set depth
• The following functions close if you start up the panoramic view.
– Text
– Body Mark
– Measurement
– Compare View
– Biopsy
– Simple Needle Visualization
– ECG
– Map editing function
– Hypoechoic Region Characterization
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Place the transducer on the position to examine on the patient, and then press the [Start] but-
ton.
• The panorama capture screen appears, and then the B-mode image is trimmed to the size of the panoramic
ROI.
• You can also start capturing a panorama by pressing the User 2 button.

Speed Guidance

176
 4.8 Panoramic View

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Speed guidance appears in the panorama capture screen. In the speed guidance, the speed at which the transducer
is moving appears as shown below in 11 levels.

Slow Fast
Suitable
• When the motion of the transducer is fast, the panoramic ROI is displayed in yellow.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

3 Move the transducer along its long axis to create a panoramic image.
• The panoramic image is created according to the movement of the transducer. The B-mode image from inside
the ROI is always live.

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The image quality may deteriorate if the transducer is moved too fast. Move the transducer at an appropriate speed

Chapter 4
according to the speed guidance.
The diagnosis with the deteriorated image quality can result in an erroneous diagnosis.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In the following cases, capturing panoramic images is forced to close, and the panorama review screen appears.
– If the panoramic ROI exceeds about 40 cm in the lateral direction or about 30 cm in the longitudinal direction
– If the time to capture a panoramic image exceeds a certain level
– If the motion of the transducer is too fast
– If the panoramic image could not be generated normally because the transducer was moved along the short axis, or the
transducer was removed from the patient’s body when panorama capture started
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

4 Press the [Stop] button.

• The panorama review screen appears.
• Immediately after moving to the panorama review screen, the panoramic image is automatically enlarged or
reduced to be displayed full screen.
• You can also close panorama capture by pressing the FREEZE button or the User 2 button.
• Pressing [Reset] displays the panorama setup screen.

zz To exit
Press the [Close] button.
• You can also exit by pressing the EXIT button.

177
4.8 Panoramic View

4.8.2 Various Operations for Panoramic Images

Operations for Panoramic Images

In the panorama review screen, you can use enlarge, reduce, rotate, and other functions.

zz Enlarge/Reduce
You can enlarge and reduce panoramic images by pinching out and pinching in and by rotating the dial on the
F2 button.
Measuring ends if you enlarge or reduce the panoramic image while measuring.
While a panoramic image is enlarged, you can move the image by doing touch operations (drag) or trackball opera-
tions.

zz Rotate
You can rotate panoramic images by rotating the dial on the F1 button.

Trimming Panoramic Images

You can trim panoramic images by using the trimming function.

1 Press the [Trim.] button to start the trimming function.

• The trimming bar appears at the start and the end of the panoramic image.

Trimming bar (start side) Trimming bar (end side)

2 Move the trimming bar by doing touch operations (drag) or trackball operations.

3 Press the SET button to fix the position of the trimming bar.

178
 4.8 Panoramic View

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you press [Trim. Reset] button while trimming, the panoramic image and the trimming bar return to their home posi-
tions.
• If you press the [Trim. Reset] button after trimming, the full screen image before trimming is displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Measuring Panoramic images

The measurements that can be done in the panorama review screen are as follows. The display for the measured
value in the panorama review screen shows [?].
• Distance
• Trace Length
• Trace/Ellipse/Cross/Spline
• Angle/Hip Angle
• 1Pl 2Distance/1Pl Disc/1Pl Ellipse
• %Stenosis (Area/Area 2/Distance)
• A/B Ratio (Distance/Area/Volume*1)
*1: Depending on the settings, some items may be unselectable.

Chapter 4
CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Panoramic images are generated based on continuous multiple images captured by scanning. The position of each
image is then estimated and combined according to those results. Because of this, distortion may occur, due to the
scanning, in the panoramic image that is captured.
The diagnosis with the distorted image can result in an erroneous diagnosis. When making a diagnosis, do the mea-
surements again with the B-mode image.
Use the values measured in panoramic images as reference values only.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

179
4.8 Panoramic View

List of parameters for B-Mode when starting up panoramic view

The list of parameters for B-mode when starting up panoramic view are as follows.
Item Functions

[Tx Level] TX level settings

Focal position setting for B-mode
[Focus Position]
• The actual focal position depends on the transducer used.
Frequency setting for B-mode
[B Frequency] • For the parameter range, sequentially select all the frequencies that are available for the trans-
ducer.
[B Gain] Gain setting for B-mode
B image depth settings
[Depth] • The maximum depth depends on the transducer used (or the exam type).
• Minimum depth values differ for each transducer.
[B DR] Dynamic range setting for B-mode

[B Map] Map brightness curve setting for B-mode

[P Time Avg.] Persistence setting for B-mode

[Edge Enhance] Edge enhance setting for B-mode

[Simple Adjust] Auto gain adjustment
[S.Adjust Quit] Turns off automatic adjustment of image quality.
[B Color] Color setting for B-mode
[Sound Speed] Sets the velocity used for incoming data.
[B SI-Filter] Speckle noise reduction setting for B images
[THI] THI settings for B-mode
[TD Guide] Sets Show / Hide of the scale marked on the transducer on the screen.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The following settings change automatically when you enter Panoramic View.
– [B Density]: [H]
– [Compound]: [1]
– [Trapezoid]: [Off]
– [Focus Pattern]: 1
– [Biopsy], [SNV]: [Off]
– [ECG]: [Off]
• When using Panoramic View, M-mode/PW Doppler-mode/PW-TDI/Color flow/Power Doppler/SCF-mode/ Elastogra-
phy-mode cannot be activated.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

180
 Chapter
5
Common Function
in Ultrasound Images

181
 5.1 Cine

The scanned image is temporarily recorded by Cine so that it can be used for the patient's diagnosis or the review.
Cine is used to temporarily record a live image into a memory and control playback of the recorded image that was
frozen. B images, color images, trace images (M image or Doppler image) can be recorded.
Cine has two types of reviews; one is a frame review for a frame-by-frame playback and the other is a motion review
for a continuous playback.

5.1.1 Cine Playback

To play back images, the images need to be frozen and Cine needs to be enabled. Cine is not available for live im-
ages. However, while live in the dual mode, you can use the cine function for images on the frozen side.
Press the FREEZE button to switch between live and frozen states.
All Cine functions end if the power is turned OFF or the freeze setting is cancelled.

1 Press the FREEZE button.

• The screen changes to frame review, and the Cine bar is displayed at the bottom of the image display area.

Frame number

Frame marker

Cine operation button Cine bar

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Up to 767 frames of B images can be recorded.
• Depending on the settings, the Cine operation button can also be displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Move the trackball right and left to change the frame to be displayed.
• The band area in the background of the frame marker indicates the present Cine record storage capacity and
its blue portion indicates the playable record area.
• The frame number (left-hand number) indicating where you are now changes as you slide the marker.
• In Cine operation of a trace image, the image slides from side to side. The frame number is not displayed on
the Cine bar.
• The previous frame and next frame buttons display the previous or next frame. While in motion review, the
screen switches to frame review. You can also continuously play the previous or next images by consecutively
tapping.

zz When still images are stored

Display a desired image on the screen and press the [Store] button.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For details of the storing function, refer to "6.1 Storing Images".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

182
 5.1 Cine

5.1.2 Cine Operation

Touching in the information display area enables the following operations.

• Sliding the frame marker on the Cine bar on the B image changes the frame being displayed.
• Sliding the frame marker on the Cine bar on the on-screen trace image slides the trace image to the right or to the
left.
Trackball is also operated in the same manner.

5.1.3 Cine Pop-up Menu

When you press either the Cine icon in the information display area or in the operation button area with the
Cine function enabled, the Cine pop-up menu will be displayed.

Chapter 5
Button Functions

The playback speed of a motion review is changed in four levels.

[Speed]
1/1 (maximum frame rate), 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 (minimum)

Changes between enable / disable of Align.

[Align] On
Off

Starts / stops motion review.

[Play/Pause]
• A motion review stopped state means a frame review state.
[Cine Clip Store] Stores Cine memory as clips.
[Edit Area] Sets the motion review playback area.
[Close] Closes the Cine pop-up menu.

183
5.1 Cine

zz Motion review changing

The [Play/Pause] button switches between start and stop of a motion review.
In addition, if a motion review is underway, it is also possible to change the motion review to a frame view by operat-
ing the trackball.

zz Align
[Align] is used to simultaneously play both images in multi-image mode. If a motion review is started while [Align] is
ON, both images will simultaneously be put into a motion review state.

zz Playback area editing

[Edit Area] is a function that sets the playback area range.
When you edit a playback area, the color of the Cine bar changes to indicate that the area is within the playback
range.
Playback area editing is not available when [Align] is ON, or when used for trace images.

Before editing
• Slide the frame marker to the
desired position and press the
[Edit Area] to decide the area.
After editing

5.1.4 Cine Clip Store

Clips can be stored using Cine.

This is disabled in mode displaying an M- / PW- / CW- / PW-TDI-mode image.

1 Perform an ultrasound scan, and freeze the image.

• A cross-sectional image is displayed.

2 Press the [Cine Clip Store] button on the pop-up menu.

• The Cine-stored image is stored as a clip file.
• If any area is specified as the Cine playback area, the specified area will be stored.

184
 5.2 Body Mark

Body Mark is a function to enter a patient’s scan position (Body Mark image) in the image display area.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For Body Mark-related settings, refer to "Annotation Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

5.2.1 Body Mark Menu

An operation of Body Mark is carried out while a scan image is displayed on the study screen.
Either touch or mini console operation can be used depends on the settings on the [Setup] screen.
• Mini console operation:
Study screen > [Menu] button > [Other] tab > [Setup] button > [Annotation] tab >
[Preset / User Preset] - [Display Touch U/I of Body Mark] must be unmarked. (Default)
• Touch operation:
Study screen > [Menu] button > [Other] tab > [Setup] screen > [Annotation] tab >
[Preset / User Preset] - [Display Touch U/I of Body Mark] check box must be marked.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To enable [Display Touch U/I of Body Mark], it must be registered as a user preset. For details on how to register as

Chapter 5
a user preset, refer to "4.2.2 Registering User Preset".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Mark list Body Mark pop-up menu

Application start but- Body Mark icon Body Mark

ton area Displays in the informa-
Transducer mark
tion display area.
Helps record scanning
procedures if aligned to the
scan direction.

185
5.2 Body Mark

zz For mini console operation

1 Press in the application start button area and the SET button.

• The Body Mark icon is displayed in the information display area.

• The Body Mark pop-up menu is displayed, and [Mark List] of the currently selected Preset / User Preset is lo-
cated.

2 Use the dial of the F2 button to select a desired Body Mark image from [Mark List], and press
the SET button.
• The selected Body Mark is displayed on the image.

3 Move the transducer mark to operate the trackball.

4 Rotate the transducer mark to the desired angle using the dial on the F2 button.

5 Press .

• The Body Mark icon in the information display area is hidden and the Body Mark image is confirmed.

zz For touch operation

1 Press in the application start button area.

2 Select a Body Mark image from Body Mark list.

• The selected Body Mark is displayed on the image.
• The [OK] button is displayed at the bottom of the Body Mark image.

3 Drag the transducer mark to the desired position on the Body Mark image.

Transducer mark

Angle setting guide

4 Press the angle setting guide, rotate the transducer mark to the desired angle and press the
[OK] button.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The Body Mark image is confirmed when no operation has been performed for a specified period of time (sec) set by
using the following procedure: [Setup] screen > [Annotation] tab > [Body Mark Timeout].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

zz To end Body Mark function

Press on the pop-up menu.

186
 5.2 Body Mark

5.2.2 Edit Menu

The Edit menu enables a user to move, delete, change the size of the Body Mark image, and return the display posi-
tion of the image to default.

1 Press the [Edit] button in Body Mark pop-up menu.

• Displays the Edit menu.

Chapter 5
2 Carry out the desired edit operation.
Button Functions

Dragging or trackball operation enables you to move a Body Mark image in the image
[Move] display area.
• When it is not selected, the transducer mark can be moved.

[Clear] Deletes a Body Mark image.

[Mark Size] Resizes a Body Mark image.

Resets all images of Body Marks, all sizes of Body Marks, and all positions of transduc-
[Initialize Position]
er marks to defaults.

zz To move a Body Mark image

1 Press the [Move] button.

2 Move a Body Mark image to the desired position by the trackball or touch operation.

zz To return to Body Mark list

Press .

187
 5.3 Text (Annotation)

Text (Annotation) is a function that enables a user to enter Annotation, such as text and arrow marks on the image.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For text-related settings, refer to "Annotation Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

5.3.1 Start of Text

There are two ways to enter annotation; one is to select text from the already registered Annotation list to enter it au-
tomatically and the other is to enter letters using the software keyboard.

1 Press in the operation button area.

• The Text pop-up menu and software keyboard are displayed. When the software keyboard is not displayed,
press the [Keyboard] button on the pop-up menu.
• The cursor is displayed in the image display area.
• Text icon is displayed in the information display area. The icon is located behind the software keyboard (hidden).

Cursor

Text pop-up menu

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Two more ways to start are shown below.
– Press the [Menu] button > [Other] tab > [Text] button.
– Change to a frozen state using the FREEZE button. (Settings on the [Setup] screen are required.)
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

188
 5.3 Text (Annotation)

zz To end Text function

There are the following four ways.
• Press on the pop-up menu.
• Press the EXIT button on the mini console.

• Press .

• Press the FREEZE button to deselect "freeze" status. (The setting is required in [SetUp] screen.)

Chapter 5

189
5.3 Text (Annotation)

5.3.2 Text Pop-up Menu

Text pop-up menu contains the [Text List] menu and the [Edit Text] menu, between which you can toggle using both
the [Edit] button and the [List] button.

Annotation list

[Edit] button [List] button

Item Functions

Enters the selected text into the image display area using Auto Annotation.
Annotation list • When the letters for Auto Annotation are too many to fit in the button, they are abbreviated
as "...".

Arrow mark button Enters the selected arrow mark into the image display area.

Deletes the character before the cursor or removes the arrow indicating the location of the
button
cursor.

button Deletes a currently selected arrow mark or text.

button Deletes all arrow marks and text in the image display area.

[Exit] button Ends Text function.

[Edit] button Changes the pop-up menu display to the Edit mode menu.

[Keyboard] button Displays a software keyboard.

[Font Size] button Resizes text.

[Arrow Size] button Resizes an arrow mark.

[Home Position] button Sets the present cursor position as the default position that starts Text function.

[Extended List] button*1 Displays the Extended list window.

[List] button Changes the pop-up menu display to the Text menu.
*1: To use this function, an optional "Text Annotation License" is required.

190
 5.3 Text (Annotation)

5.3.3 Extended List

The extended list shows up to 5 pages of the annotation list. The annotation list and extended list are linked, so
switching pages affects both lists. Depending on the settings, they can also be displayed when the Text function is
started up. To use this function, an optional "Text Annotation License" is required.

Extended list Move bar

Chapter 5
Item Functions

Auto Annotation can be used to enter the selected character string in the image display
Extended list area. If the Auto Annotation character string does not fit inside the button, "..." is displayed in
place of the omitted characters.

button Closes the Extended list window.

button Switches pages.

Move bar Move the position of the Extended list window by dragging it.

191
5.3 Text (Annotation)

5.3.4 Entering Registered Annotation

Auto Annotation can be used to enter already registered texts and arrow marks. The currently available Annotation
list is shown on the upper portion of the Text List menu.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The Annotation list can be edited from the [Setup] screen.
You can add [Auto Annotation] or edit the display order.
Refer to "Annotation Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
• It is possible to back up or restore edits made in the Annotation list.
Refer to "3.7 Data Backup".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Move the cursor to the desired position.

2 Select the desired text from the Annotation list.

• The selected text is displayed at the location of the cursor in the image display area.

Text

Arrow mark
Press an arrow mark button to enter.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can touch and drag the displayed text to move it from one location to another.
• When touched and highlighted, the characters become movable.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

192
 5.3 Text (Annotation)

5.3.5 Entering Annotation Using Software Keyboard

1 With the software keyboard being displayed, enter text at the cursor location.
• After entries are confirmed, the color of the text changes.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Double-tapping a string of characters allows you to select strings of characters separated by spaces.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

5.3.6 List of Other Operations

In Text function, the following operations can be carried out several operational ways.
Operation How to operate

• Select from the Annotation list in the Text List menu.

Auto Annotation entry • Turn the F2 button of the mini console.

• Press the arrow mark in the Text List menu.

Arrow mark entry • Press the NEXT key on the mini console. (Allocation of keys on the [Setup] screen is
needed.)

• Arrow keys of the software keyboard

Chapter 5
Movement of the cursor • Trackball operation
• Touch and drag

• Touch and drag to the desired position in the image display area.
Movement of arrow marks / text
• Touch the text to move it with the trackball while it is highlighted.

• Press an arrow mark of a different direction.

• Press the NEXT key on the mini console. (Allocation of keys is needed on the [Setup]
Rotation of an arrow mark
screen.)
• Turn the F2 button of the mini console.

• Press the SET button on the mini console.

Confirmation of arrow mark / text • Press the enter key on the keyboard.
entries • Touch the image display area.
• Time-out (Settings on the [Setup] screen are required.)

Interrupt of Text function • When another application has been started up.

• Press the [Delete All] button in the [Edit] menu.

Deletion of all arrow marks / text
• When a frozen state has been canceled. (Settings on the [Setup] screen are required.)

• Touch an arrow mark or text in the image display area.

Selection of an arrow mark / text • Press the SET button on the mini console while the cursor is pointing to an arrow mark or
text in the image display area.

193
 5.4 Measurement

An available measurement method differs depending on the scan mode.

The section describes basic procedures for starting and ending measurement.
Refer to "Basic Measurement", "Application Measurement Common Operations", "Cardiac Measurement", and "Oth-
er Application Measurements" of the "Operation Manual: Applications" for the measurement menu and application-
specific measurement.

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not cancel FREEZE during measurement. Measurement data will be lost.
• Do not put the system into a Shutdown / Standby / Logout mode during measurement. Measurement data will be
lost.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

5.4.1 Measurement Basic Operation

1 Scan a B image and press the FREEZE button.

• The image is frozen.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Measurement is carried out when an image is frozen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Press in the application start button area.

• The measurement pop-up menu is displayed.

• The measurement cursor is displayed at the center of the image display area and the measurement icon is
displayed in the information display area.
Scale

Measurement
cursor

MRA
(Measurement
Result Area)

Measurement icon
Show/hide Measurement Result button
Measurement pop-up menu

194
 5.4 Measurement

Item Functions

The layout of the menu differs depending on the selected exam type.
Measurement pop-up menu
• For details, refer to "Basic Measurement" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

An index of physical size.

Depth Increments of dot markers

More than 10 cm Dot marker in 10 mm increments

Scale
10 cm or less Dot marker in 5 mm increments

5 cm or less Dot marker in 2 mm increments

1.5 cm or less Dot markers in 1mm increments

General term for the start point / end point cursors of the measurement tools.
Measurement cursor • Measures by operating the cursor.
• The cursor shape differs depending on the measurement tool.

MRA (Measurement Result The area displaying the confirmed measured value.
Area) • Displays the measured value per measurement channel.

Show/hide Measurement Result

Shows or hides the measurement results.
button

3 Select the desired measurement tool from the measurement pop-up menu.

4 Move the cursor to the start point of measurement by dragging or using the trackball and press
the SET button.

Chapter 5
• The start point is confirmed.

5 Move the cursor to the end point and press the SET button.
• The measurement is confirmed and the channel number is displayed near the start point.
• The measurement result is displayed in the measurement result area.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If, with a measurement remaining active, you start up the function to be displayed on an ultrasound image, such as
Body Mark, Text (Annotation) or Biopsy, the measurement will be interrupted. Measurement is not available, but the
measurement tool and results remain on the image.
• To restore the interrupted measurement to an active state, press the [Measure] button, or end the function you have
started separately, such as Body Mark, Text (Annotation) or Biopsy.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• After doing a measurement, you can continue to do more measurements by setting the starting point of the next
channel in the image display area.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

zz To end measurement

1 Press .

• Measurement is ended and the measurement screen is cleared.

zz To show the hidden measurement menu

There are following three ways to redisplay the hidden measurement menu.
• Press the measurement icon in the information display area.
• Press the [Measure] button.
• End all other functions activated during measurement.

195
5.4 Measurement

5.4.2 Basic Measurement Items List

Basic measurement items for each mode are as follows:

zz List of Measurement Items for B-mode

For details, refer to "2D-mode Measurement" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Measurement item Functions

[Distance] Calculates the distance between two points.

[Trace Length] Calculates the distance between two points with a curve.
[Trace] Calculates the area surrounded by a trace line drawn on the screen.
[Ellipse] Calculates the area of an ellipsoid.
[Area] Calculates the area of a circle centering on two lines intersecting at
[Cross]
a right angle.
[Spline] Calculates the area of points on the screen by the spline method.
Calculates the angle between two intersecting lines that you have
[Angle]
selected.
Specifies the base line, bony roof line and cartilaginous roof line
[Hip Angle]
and calculates the angles α and β formed by the three lines.
[1Pl 2Distance] Calculates the volume of a sphere by: circle multiplied by distance.
Calculates the volume of an oval sphere by finding length/width/
[2Pl 3Distance]
height.
Calculates the volume of an oval sphere by summing the volumes
[1Pl Disc]
Volume of 20 disks (columna pillar).
[1Pl Ellipse] Calculates the volume of an oval sphere based on elliptic integrals.
[2Pl Ellipse] Calculates the volume of an oval sphere from two sets of ellipses.
Calculates the volume of an oval sphere from two sets of traced ar-
[2Pl Trace]
eas/distances.
Compares two areas and calculates the proportion of the result of
[A-%Stenosis] subtraction of the smaller area from the larger area to the larger
area.
Compares two areas and calculates the proportion of the result of
%Stenosis
[A2-%Stenosis] subtraction of the smaller area from the larger area to the larger
area, using Ellipse and Trace measurement.
Compares two lines and calculates the proportion of the result of
[D-%Stenosis]
subtraction of the shorter line from the longer line to the longer line.
[Dist Ratio] Calculates ratio of two distances.
A/B Ratio [Area Ratio] Calculates ratio of two areas.
[Vol Ratio] Calculates ratio of two volumes.
Calculates the flow volume at a certain point by the area obtained
[D-Flow Vol. (Semi-Auto)]
from two distances and the average velocity.
Calculates the flow volume at a certain point from the area and the
[A-Flow Vol. (Semi-Auto)]
average velocity.
Flow Volume
Calculates the flow volume at a certain point by the area obtained
[D-Flow Vol. (Manual)]
from two distances and the average velocity.
Calculates the flow volume at a certain point from the area and the
[A-Flow Vol. (Manual)]
average velocity.

196
 5.4 Measurement

Measurement item Functions

[FPC 15x5mm]
[FPC 15x10mm]
FPC (Flow
[FPC 30x20mm] Calculates the ratio of the area of a specific area (FPC Box) to the
Pixel Coun-
[FPC Rect] area of blood-flow signals present within the specific area.
ter)*1
[FPC Free]
[FPC ROI]

[Auto IMT-Near]
Auto IMT*2 Automatically calculates IMT (Intima Media Thickness).
[Auto IMT-Far]
IMT (Intima Media Thickness) measurement that manually mea-
[Manual IMT]
sures thickness at three to five points.
Analyzes the gray levels within the square measurement area of
[Histogram Fix]
fixed size to display a histogram.
Analyzes the gray levels within the rectangular measurement area
[Histogram Free]
of variable size to display a histogram.
Calculates the ratio of the average amount of strain in two mea-
[Strain Ratio]*3
surement areas.
Analyzes the elasticity in the measurement area and displays a his-
[Strain Histogram]*3
togram.
Measures the ratio of Length (E) of two random points in the elas-
[E/B Ratio]*3

Chapter 5
tography screen and Length (B) of two random points in screen B.
*1: Measurements of each FPC item can be obtained only when an image is frozen in Power Doppler- / SCF-mode.
*2: Use of Auto IMT requires the optional "Auto IMT License".
*3: You will require the optional "Strain Elastography License" to use the item. Measurement is only enabled when the image is
frozen in Elastography-mode.

zz List of Measurement Items for M-mode

For details, refer to "M-mode Measurement" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Measurement item Functions

[Distance] Calculates the distance in the depth direction between two points.
[Time] Calculates the time between two points.
Calculates the number of heartbeats per minute based on the heart rate
[HR]
displayed on the screen.
[Slope] Calculates the tilt between two points.
[Velocity] Calculates the velocity between two points.
[Time Ratio] Calculates the ratio of time between two lines.
[A/B Ratio]
[Dist Ratio] Calculates ratio of two distances.

zz List of Measurement Items for Color Flow-mode

Measurement items for Color Flow-mode are the same as the ones for B-mode.

zz List of Measurement Items for Power Doppler-mode

Measurement items for Power Doppler-mode are the same as the ones for B-mode.

zz List of Measurement Items for 2D-TDI-mode

Measurement items for 2D-TDI-mode are the same as the ones for B-mode.

197
5.4 Measurement

zz List of Measurement Items for SCF-mode

Measurement items for SCF-mode are the same as the ones for B-mode.

zz List of Measurement Items for Elastography-mode

Measurement items for Elastography-mode are the same as the ones for B-mode.

zz List of Measurement Items for PW Doppler-mode

For details, refer to "Doppler-mode Measurement" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Measurement item Functions

[Velocity] Calculates the velocity / frequency of the specified point.

[Time] Calculates the time between two points.
Calculates the number of heartbeats per minute based on the heart rate
[HR]
displayed on the screen.
[Accel] Calculates acceleration (deceleration) between two points.
Determines the maximum flow velocity (Max) / average flow velocity (Mean)
[Ave Values] / minimum flow velocity (Min) / peak flow velocity (Mode) of each time phase
within a given time period to calculate.
Calculates the maximum flow velocity (Max) / average flow velocity (Mean)
[Point Values] / minimum flow velocity (Min) / peak flow velocity (Mode) of a given time
phase.
Calculates the ratio of the velocity, provided that two given points are S
[RI-S/D]
wave / D wave.
Automatically displays a trace based on a spectrum in a specified section
[PI Semi-Auto]
PI Trace and calculates PI.
[PI Manual] Manually traces the Doppler waves to calculate PI.
[A/B Ratio] Calculates ratio of two velocity values.
[D-Flow Vol. (Semi-Auto)]
[A-Flow Vol. (Semi-Auto)] Calculates the flow volume from the traced velocity and the distance mea-
Flow Volume
[D-Flow Vol. (Manual)] sured on the B-mode.

[A-Flow Vol. (Manual)]

zz List of Measurement Items for PW-TDI-mode

Measurement items for PW-TDI-mode are the same as the ones for PW Doppler-mode.

zz List of Measurement Items for CW Doppler-mode

Measurement items for CW Doppler-mode are the same as the ones for PW Doppler-mode.

198
 5.4 Measurement

5.4.3 Application Measurement and Report

There are application measurement and a report function that support the following exam type.
• Cardiac
• Pediatric/MSK
• Urology
• Thyroid
• EM
• OB
• GYN

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• "Application Measurement Common Operations" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
• "Cardiac Measurement" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
• "Cardiac Report" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
• "Other Application Measurements" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
• "Other Application Measurement Reports" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
• "OB Measurement" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
• "OB Report" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
• "GYN Measurement" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
• "GYN Report" of the "Operation Manual: Applications"
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 5

199
 5.5 RA Work Flow

In this system, with the use of the RA Work Flow function for registering or setting things on the [Setup] screen be-
fore an examination, such as the order in which images are acquired (the order in which Body Marks / Texts are dis-
played), the physician only has to follow the registered / set protocol during the examination so as to focus on tasks
ranging from acquiring the image of each joint or section to storing it.

For details, refer to "RA Work Flow" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
To use the RA Work Flow function, the optional "RA Work Flow License" is required.

200
 5.6 Common Functions

The following useful functions are provided for a user to easily acquire images.
• Operation items
• Direct touch and drag
• Full display mode
• Touch Off mode
• Left/right Layout Switch Function
• Map editing function

5.6.1 Operation Items

Operation items are a group of easy-to-use functions that allow you to simply operate selected operation objects,
such as an ultrasound image, C ROI and the D cursor, by using the trackball plus clicking the SET button or by
touching the screen.
Only available operation items are displayed in the information display area above the mode button area. At this
time, an item whose function is started first is displayed first, with the pointer excluded, and the selected icon is lit.
The pointer is fixed and displayed in the leftmost position. In addition, when an item is selected, the color of the item
itself changes on the ultrasound image, indicating that it is active.
There are three ways to switch between operation items.
• Touch or click an icon in the information display area.
• Touch or click an operation item on the ultrasound image.
• Press the F2 button on the mini console to switch between icons, starting from the left end of the array.

Chapter 5
Operation items Function Icon Remarks

To confirm selection, press the SET button, as it

Manipulates the free cursor to be dis- is treated as a click.
Pointer played at the center of the screen with • You can also display the pointer by pressing
the trackball. the SET , EXIT , and F2 buttons at the same
time.

Measure A Measurement function. Refer to "5.4 Measurement".

Text A Text (Annotation) function. Refer to "5.3 Text (Annotation)".

Body Mark A Body Mark function. Refer to "5.2 Body Mark".

Plays back previous study data (still Refer to "Compare View" of the "Operation
Compare View
image / clip) during an examination. Manual: Applications".

Cine Enables Cine functions. Refer to "5.1 Cine".

Continued on the next page

201
5.6 Common Functions

Operation items Function Icon Remarks

Changes the position or size of the zoomed region

being displayed.
Zoom Image Enables Zoom Image.
Changes the position or zoom rate of an ultra-
sound image during Zoom In.

Moves the position of the M cursor on Shows an acoustic line to be used as an M-mode
M Cursor
a B image. image for reference.

Anatomical M Moves the position of the Anatomical Indicates the area to refer to as an Anatomical M-
Cursor M cursor on a B image. mode image.

Changes the Doppler gate position,

Doppler Gate Shows the position of the gate used to refer to
the gate size or the angle on a B im-
(Cursor) Doppler spectrum.
age.

C ROI Position Moves the position of ROI.

When one of the two functions is selected, press
the SET button to switch between C ROI Position
and C ROI Size.
Resizes ROI.
C ROI Size
ROI is displayed with a dashed line.

Controls the scan width (field-of-view

FOV
width). When one of the two functions is selected, press
the SET button to switch between FOV and POS.
Refer to [FOV/POS] in "B-mode parameter list" of
Controls the scan position when the "4.4.1 B-mode".
POS
scan width is less than 100 %.

Panoramic view View panoramic images.

Refer to "4.8 Panoramic View".

Trimming pan-
Trim panoramic images.
oramas

202
 5.6 Common Functions

5.6.2 Direct Touch and Drag

By dragging a certain area in an ultrasound image, a parameter assigned to the area can be changed. For details
about assigning functions, refer to "Direct Touch Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
The name of a manipulable parameter is displayed at the center of each area.
With a touch of a direct touch area, the name of the assigned function appears at the center of the (direct touch)
area.
• Drag left / right:
Drag right / left to increase / decrease a parameter.
• Drag up / down:
Drag up / down to increase / decrease a parameter.

zz B-mode/ Elastography-mode
<Single display>

(1) (2)

Chapter 5
(3)

No. Location Direction Remarks

The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.

You can also not assign any functions.
(1) B-image Area Left Side* Up/Down
D Angle Correction and Gate Size operations are not available in Elastogra-
phy-mode.

The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.

B-image Area Right You can also not assign any functions.
(2) Up/Down
Side* D Angle Correction, Gate Size, and Ana-M Angle operations are not avail-
able in Elastography-mode.

You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
B-image Area Bottom
(3) Left/Right B Gain when the image is in a live state.
Side
Gain operations are not available in a frozen state.
*: In 2B-mode, the side with vertical scale is the left side and the opposite side is the right side.

203
5.6 Common Functions

zz M-mode / Anatomical M-mode

<Dual display>

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

No. Location Direction Remarks

The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.

(1) B-image Area Left Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.
The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.
(2) B-image Area Right Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.

You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
B-image Area Bottom
(3) Left/Right B Gain when the image is in a live state.
Side
Gain operations are not available in a frozen state.

M-image Area Bottom You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
(4) Left/Right
Side M Gain in M-mode and a live state.
• For B-image Area Top Side, refer to "B-mode/ Elastography-mode" of "5.6.2 Direct Touch and Drag".

204
 5.6 Common Functions

zz Color Flow-mode / Power Doppler-mode / 2D-TDI-mode / SCF-mode

<Single display>
(1)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

No. Location Direction Remarks

You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
[C Steer]: during C ROI display
(1) B-image Area Top Side Left/Right
Available only when a linear transducer has been attached to the system.
Also, any steer operations are not available in a frozen state.

Chapter 5
C Scale when the image is in a live state with Color Flow- / Power Dop-
(2) Color Bar Area Up/Down
pler- / 2D-TDI- / SCF-mode enabled.

The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.

(3) B-image Area Left Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.
The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.
(4) B-image Area Right Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.

You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
B-image Area Bottom C Gain when the image is in a live state with Color Flow- / Power Doppler-
(5) Left/Right
Side / 2D-TDI- / SCF-mode enabled.
Gain operations are not available in a frozen state.

205
5.6 Common Functions

zz PW Doppler-mode / PW-TDI-mode
<Dual display>
(1) (2)

(5)

(3)

(4) (6) (7)

No. Location Direction Remarks

You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
[D Steer]: during D cursor display
(1) B-image Area Top Side Left/Right
Available only when a linear transducer has been attached to the system.
Also, any steer operations are not available in a frozen state.
The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.
(2) B-image Area Right Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.
The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.
(3) B-image Area Left Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.
You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
B-image Area Bottom
(4) Left/Right In a live state, it becomes B Gain.
Side
Gain operations cannot be done in a freeze state.
The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.
(5) D-image Area Right Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.

The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.

(6) D-image Area Left Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.

D-image Area Bottom You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
(7) Left/Right
Side D Gain in PW Doppler- / PW-TDI-mode and a live state.
• When B-image is active in the update mode, refer to "B-mode/ Elastography-mode" of "5.6.2 Direct Touch and
Drag" for B-image Area Left, Right, and Bottom Side.

206
 5.6 Common Functions

zz CW Doppler-mode
<Dual display>
(1)

(4)

(2)

(3) (5) (6)

No. Location Direction Remarks

The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.

(1) B-image Area Right Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.
The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.
(2) B-image Area Left Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.
You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
B-image Area Bottom
(3) Left/Right In a live state, it becomes B Gain.

Chapter 5
Side
Gain operations cannot be done in a freeze state.
The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.
(4) D-image Area Right Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.
The assigned functions can be changed by customizing the settings.
(5) D-image Area Left Side Up/Down
You can also not assign any functions.
D-image Area Bottom You can also not assign any functions by customizing the settings.
(6) Left/Right
Side D Gain in CW Doppler-mode and a live state.
• To use this function, an optional "CW kit" is required. Contact your service representative.
• When B-image is active, refer to "B-mode/ Elastography-mode" of "5.6.2 Direct Touch and Drag" for B-image Area
Left, Right, and Bottom Side.

207
5.6 Common Functions

5.6.3 Full display mode

This function expands the image area and the basic information area to take up the whole screen. It can be used
when you want to view a large version of the image.
• It can only be used on the study screen.
• It cannot be used when Measure, Body Mark, and Text are in use.
• It cannot be used during Touch Off mode.
• Touching operations such as Direct Touch function are disabled during full screen display mode.

1 Press the [Menu] button > button on the [Other] tab

2 Tap the screen twice to exit full screen display mode.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You should be aware that the image quality of full screen display mode differs from normal ultrasonic images.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Full screen display mode will exit if you do the following things or the following things occur during full screen display
mode.
– When the message dialog is displayed
– When the free cursor is displayed
– When the screen saver starts
– When performing the [EXIT] operation
– When switching to a screen other than the study screen
– When starting Measure, Body Mark, or Text
– If you press the full screen display mode key on the mini console
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

208
 5.6 Common Functions

5.6.4 Touch invalidation mode

This function blocks touch operation. It prevents unintentional operation of the machine if the screen is bumped ac-
cidentally during explanation to a patient, etc.
• It cannot be used during full screen display mode.
• It cannot be used on the login screen or when the screen is locked.

1 Press the button under the KONICA MINOLTA logo.

• A blue frame will appear around the top left and bottom right corners of the screen indicating that the system is
in Touch Off mode.

Chapter 5
(1) (2)

No. Button Functions

If you select this function and then touch the screen, an orange line will be drawn around
each section of the screen you touch.
If you select this function and then touch the screen, lines that have been drawn will be
deleted if you touch them.
(1) • This function does not work unless lines are being drawn.

Touch this icon to store an image, including all the lines you have drawn on it.

Selecting this will delete all drawn lines.

• This function does not work unless lines are being drawn.

(2) Exits Touch Off mode.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can also exit Touch invalidation mode by pressing EXIT when the system is in Touch invalidation mode.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

209
5.6 Common Functions

5.6.5 Left/right Layout Switch Function

This function allows you to switch between placing the operation button area to the right or left side of the image
area.

1 Press [Menu] button > [Other] tab > [Set] button > [System] tab > [Menu Layout].
• The system needs to be restarted after setting this.

zz When [Menu Layout] is set to [Left] (factory default state)

zz When [Menu Layout] is set to [Right]

210
 5.6 Common Functions

5.6.6 Map editing function

This function edits the B-mode B map image. The edited B map image can be used in M-mode as well.
• It can be used on the study screen in the B-mode.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Modified map will affect image characteristics. Please confirm the image before the examination.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Check that the B-mode B map image value is set between A and J.
• For B map setting, refer to "4.4.1 B-mode".

2 Press the [Menu] button > button on the [Other] tab.

Chapter 5
(1)

(2)

No. Location Functions

Editing points on the image are displayed in blue.

(1) Editing points • Edits can be made by using the trackball to move up, down, left, and right.
• You can change the editing point to the previous or next editing point by turning the F2 dial.
[Trans.] button Makes the background transparent.
Returns the image to its unedited state.
[Reset] button • This function does not work unless the image has been edited.
(2)
• The image can only be reset as far as the last time it was saved.
Save the edited image.
[Save] button
• This function does not work unless the image has been edited.

211
5.6 Common Functions

3 Press the button or the Exit button to exit image editing.

• If you are part way through an edit, a dialog box will appear asking whether you want to save the image or not.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Image editing will exit in the following cases as well. In these cases, the image being edited will not be saved.
– When switching to a screen other than the study screen
– When a preset is changed
– When ending the examination
– When a transducer is changed
– When starting Measure, Body Mark, or Text
• To back up the edited B map image, select the [Image] category on the [Backup / Restore] screen. For information on
backup procedures, refer to "3.7.1 Backup / Restore Screen".
• The edited B map can be used regardless of presets or user presets. Be aware that even if you back up only presets
or user presets when editing a B map, the edited B map will not be saved.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

212
 5.6 Common Functions

5.6.7 Library Function

This function is for viewing libraries on external storage media. It can also add libraries to external storage media.
Refer to “[Library Settings] screen” in the "Operation Manual: Applications" regarding the settings for folders that are
viewed and added to libraries. You must have the optional "Library License" or "Direct Recording License" to use
the library function. Also, you must have the optional "Direct Recording License" to use the direct recording function.
Contact your service representative.

zz Viewing libraries

1 Press the [Library] button to display the contents browser.

(1) (2) (3)

Chapter 5
(4) (5) (6) (7)

No. Item Functions

(1) Move bar Move the position of the contents browser by dragging it.
(2) [X] button Closes the library function.
(3) Current folder Displays the current folder’s name. When it is the library home folder, it displays “Library”.
Displays folders/files.

: Icon that indicates a folder.

: Icon that indicates a still image file.

(4) Folder list/file list

: Icon that indicates a clip file.

Pressing on a folder displays the relevant folder.

Pressing on a file displays the relevant image in the contents window. Only files with the fol-
lowing extensions can be displayed.
png / jpg / jpeg / bmp / mp4 / avi

(5) button Displays the folder one level up.

Continued on the next page

213
5.6 Common Functions

No. Item Functions

(6) Home button Displays the library home folder.

(7) Change size Change the size of the contents browser by dragging it.

2 Pressing on a file name displays the contents window.

• Pressing on the contents window displays various controls.
(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

No. Item Functions

(1) Move bar Move the position of the contents window by dragging it.
(2) [X] button Closes the contents window.
(3) Title Displays the file name, excluding the extension of the displayed image.
Displays the playback position of the clip. Move the frames that are displayed by sliding the
(4) Play bar bar.
This is displayed only for clip files.
(5) Previous button Displays the previous image from the same folder.
(6) Next button Displays the next image from the same folder.
(7) Loop button Plays the clip in a loop.
(8) Play/pause button Switches between playing and pausing the clip.
Full size/original Maximizes the contents window display. Press again to return to original size.
(9)
size button Maximizing the display freezes the ultrasound image.
Audio volume con-
(10) Displays the audio volume control. This is a function for adjusting the volume of clips.
trol button
(11) Change size Change the size of the contents window by dragging it.

214
 5.6 Common Functions

zz Audio volume control

(1) (2)

No. Item Functions

(1) Audio volume icon Mutes the audio. Select again to cancel muting.
(2) Audio volume slider Adjusts the volume of clips.

zz Adding libraries
You can also add libraries to external storage media in the following screen.
• [Review] screen
• [Review] screen > Control area > [Search] button > [Patient List] screen > Screen that is displayed when you dou-
ble tap a thumbnail display
• [Export Image] screen > Screen that is displayed when you double tap a thumbnail display
• [Past Image Display] screen
• [Thumbnail List] screen

1 Press the [Add to Library] button.

• The library is added to the folder.
• The file name is "YYYYMMDD_XXX”. YYYYMMDD is the output date, and XXX is a 3-digit serial number,
starting from 001.
• The [Add to Library] button is enabled if an image is selected in the [Review] screen or the [Thumbnail List]

Chapter 5
screen.

zz Direct store
This function stores still images and clips to an external storage media. You must have the optional "Direct Recording
License " to use this. Contact your service representative.

1 Tap [Direct Still Store], [Direct Store], or [Direct Cine Clip Store].
• In the add to library folder set in the settings screen, a "YYY_MM_DD" folder is created, in which a file named
"YYYYMMDDHHMMSS_XXX" is stored. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS is the export date and time, and XXX is a
3-digit serial number, starting from 001.

215
5.6 Common Functions

5.6.8 Voice Control

This function controls the device through the voice input of registered commands. If a USB microphone is not con-
nected, voice reception is disabled, regardless of the settings.
Refer to "[Voice Control Settings] screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications", regarding registering voice com-
mands.
You must have the optional "Voice Control License" to use this. Contact your service representative.

1 Press the [Menu] button > (voice reception button) on the [Other] tab.
• When the button appears blue, voice reception is enabled.

2 Face the USB microphone that is connected and input a voice command.

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• We recommend adding a wake word to voice commands to prevent misrecognition of voice commands. For details,
refer to “[Voice Control Settings] screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
• If you have registered a voice command, be sure to do a voice recognition test to confirm that it is recognized.
• Place the USB microphone in a safe place where voice can be easily recognized depending on the operating envi-
ronment.
• The accuracy of recognition may vary greatly depending on the usage environment. Do the tests in the environment
in which you actually use the device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In the interests of safety, be sure to confirm the operation of the voice command by the connected USB microphone
before use.
• Start up the system after connecting the USB microphone. If you connect the USB microphone after starting up the
system, voice commands may not be received.
• Connect the USB microphone to the USB2.0 port on the rear panel.
• If voice commands are not recognized about 1 minute while voice reception is enabled, disconnect the USB micro-
phone and connect it again.
• If the registered voice command is not recognized, just operate the mini console keys or the touch panel.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

216
 5.6 Common Functions

5.6.9 Hypoechoic Region Characterization Function

The Hypoechoic Region Characterization function is a function that superimposes colors as specified in the hy-
poechoic region.
The transducers that can use it are the L11-3 and L18-4.
You must have the optional "Hypoechoic Region Characterization License" to use this. Contact your service repre-
sentative.

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Whenever using the enhanced display, turn on Split mode, and do final assessment of the image on the side that is
not the enhanced display. The enhanced display is only a reference image, final assessments using this image could
lead to a misdiagnosis.
• You can change the colors in the enhanced display. Change the colors so the display is not confused with the colors
of the Color Flow-mode, Power Doppler-mode, 2D-TDI-mode, SCF-mode, or Elastography-mode.
• The hypoechoic region may not be enhanced correctly.
– The hypoechoic region may not be colored, depending on the HyRC gain settings and the HyRC type settings.
– The enhanced hypoechoic region is determined by the relation of the luminance distribution of the periphery.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Starting the Hypoechoic Region Characterization function

1 Press the [HyRC].

• The Hypoechoic Region Characterization pop-up menu is displayed.

Chapter 5
• The enhanced parts appear colored in the image.

2 Enter the Split mode (the mode that displays simultaneous dual display of B-mode and Hy-
poechoic Region Characterization displays).*1
*1 : Not essential but recommended.

217
5.6 Common Functions

Closing the Hypoechoic Region Characterization function

The Hypoechoic Region Characterization function closes when one of the following operations are done.
• Pressing the [HyRC Display] button in the pop-up menu
• Pressing the [HyRC] button
• Switching to any mode other than B-mode
• Starting up the Panoramic View
• Starting up SNV

Hypoechoic Region Characterization pop-up menu

Item Functions

[HyRC Display] Set the Hypoechoic Region Characterization display to on or off.

[HyRC Type] Select the enhancement type.
[HyRC Color] Select the enhancement color.
[HyRC Gain] Set the gain for the enhancement color.
[Close] Close the Hypoechoic Region Characterization pop-up menu.

218
 Chapter
6
Reviewing, Printing,
and Transferring Images

219
 6.1 Storing Images

Even during an examination, images can be stored, browsed, printed out, or output.
The image data acquired in an examination includes still images and clips.
In storing images, the following functions can be used: Still Store to store still images, Clip Store and Cine Clip Store
to store clips.
Image data stored in Internal Storage is linked to the appropriate examination and managed in the patient database.
If you use one of the following methods to store images, clips, or cine clips while not conducting an exam, a patient
ID is automatically issued and the images, clips, or cine clips are stored.
• Store still image while frozen.
• Store image in Touch invalidation mode while frozen
• Store cine clip while frozen
• Store clip using prospective save settings while live

[Still Store] button

[Clip Store] button

[Cine Clip Store]

button

Menu pop-up window - [Other] tab [Store] button

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Up to 200 files, including still images and clips, can be stored for 1 examination.
• When [as You Go] is checked for [Auto Sending] on the [Setup] screen, an image will be automatically sent to the
DICOM Storage Server* at the time of storing the image.
Refer to "DICOM Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
*: To use this function, an optional "DICOM Storage License" is required.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

220
 6.1 Storing Images

6.1.1 Storing Still Images

1 Perform an ultrasound scan, and freeze the image.

• A cross-sectional image is displayed.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you press the [Still Store] button during a live state, the live image at the time of pressing the button is stored.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Select the desired image from among images temporarily recorded by Cine, and press the
[Store] button.
• The still image data is stored in the Internal Storage as study data.
• Thumbnails are displayed in the thumbnail display area.

Chapter 6

221
6.1 Storing Images

6.1.2 Storing Clips

Clip Store is a function to generate clips from live images, and the following two methods are available to store clips.
Function Button Functions

Prospective method (Default)

• Starts recording images after pressing the button.
• Image acquisition ends automatically after the elapse of the clip acquisition
time predetermined on the [Setup] screen.
• In a live state, pressing the button again before the elapse of the predeter-
[Clip Store]∗ mined clip acquisition time will end the acquisition process.
Retrospective method
• Always records images before the button is pressed as clips.
• The length of the clip acquisition time predetermined on the [Setup] screen
serves as the upper limit for recording.
The method to generate clips from Cine data.
• Press the button to store.
[Cine Clip Store]
• Also accessible from the Cine pop-up menu.
Refer to "5.1.3 Cine Pop-up Menu".
∗: Prospective and Retrospective methods are available and you can select the timing with which you store clips on the [Setup]
screen. The clip acquisition time can be also set.
Refer to "Patient Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The clips stored using [Cine Clip Store] can have a high frame rate. If a clip with a frame rate of over 60 fps is played
back on the system, the speed of playback will be slow.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When [Display Pop-up on Storing] is set to ON on the [Setup] screen, upon completion of storing images (still images
or clips), a pop-up appears where the stored images are thumbnailed.
• While storing clips, the mode and image parameters can be changed.
In a clip whose mode or parameter is being changed, some of the frames may not be stored.
• When clips are stored during comparison with a past image, the clip of past image is not stored as a clip but stored
as a still image.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

222
 6.2 Thumbnail Function

You can display stored image data in the thumbnail display area, and call up past images to delete, transfer, or list
them.
Following images are displayed in the thumbnail display area.
• Image linking to the examination in progress

6.2.1 Displaying Thumbnails

Images stored in the study data are displayed in the thumbnail display area.

Thumbnail
display area

Image
display area

Chapter 6
• If the stored data is a clip, a thumbnail of the first frame image is displayed.
• The display area can be switched between single image display and area-enlarged display by touching the control.
• The latest data is displayed at the top.
• Scroll through the display area to change the image being displayed. If an image is newly added to stored data,
the image data is used for display as a thumbnail.
• To delete an image, press the [Thumbnail List] button and operate from the [Thumbnail List] screen being dis-
played. Refer to "6.2.3 Deleting or Transferring Images during Examination".

223
6.2 Thumbnail Function

Thumbnails

Control Touch to scroll

up and down.

[Thumbnail List]
button

Control

<Single image <Area-enlarged

display> display>

224
 6.2 Thumbnail Function

6.2.2 Browsing and Editing Images

When you click a thumbnail, the screen changes to the [Past Image Display] screen which allows various editing of
an image.
When you drug and drop a thumbnail into the image display area, the screen changes to the [Compare View] screen.
For details on the Compare View function, refer to "Compare View Function" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

[Past Image Display] screen

When you touch a thumbnail, the screen changes to the [Past Image Display] screen.
On the [Past Image Display] screen where past-stored images are displayed, you cannot only browse those images,
but also perform such operations as Text (Annotation), Body Mark editing and measurement.
(1) (2)

Chapter 6
(3)

No. Functions

(1) Displays thumbnails.

(2) Displays past-stored images.
• The images in this area are objects to be edited and stored.
(3) Displays the Past Image Display pop-up menu.
• [End] button: Ends the past image display.
• [Delete Image] button: Deletes the images being displayed in No.2.
• [Add to Library] button: Add images to SD cards or USB memories. Refer to "5.6.7 Library Function".
• For still images, each of the [Text] / [Body Mark] / [Measure] buttons can be used to modify already-stored past im-
ages.
• For clips, the play button and other related buttons are displayed.

zz To end

Press , FREEZE or button.

225
6.2 Thumbnail Function

6.2.3 Deleting or Transferring Images during Examination

When browsing acquired images or deleting an unnecessary image, enlarge the area of a thumbnail image and
press the [Thumbnail List] button below to display the [Thumbnail List].

[Delete] button [Export Image] button [Close] button

[All select] button [Deselect] button [Add to Library] button

• Select an unnecessary image and press the [Delete] button to delete.

An image that has been deleted is also deleted from the data, and, therefore, it cannot be restored.
• Select an image by touching on it. To clear selection, touch the selected image again or press the [Deselect] but-
ton.
• Press the [All select] button to select all images.
• Press the [Export Image] button to display the [Export Image] screen where you can output an image.
For details, refer to "6.4 Transferring Image Data".
• Pressing the [Add to Library] button adds the selected images to SD cards or USB memories. Refer to "5.6.7 Li-
brary Function".
• Press the [Close] button to return to the study screen.
• Double-touch an image to switch the selected image back to a single screen display.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• More than one image can be selected.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

226
 6.3 Printing Images

Images can be printed out using a printer connected to the system via a USB cable.

(1)

Menu pop-up window (2)

The following two buttons are available for printing.

No. Functions

Chapter 6
(1) Press the [Menu] button > or on the [Other] tab.

(2) Press in the lower right corner of the screen.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The function of the [BW Print & Still Store] button can be assigned to the [Print] button on the [Setup] screen.
For settings, refer to "Key Customize Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

227
 6.4 Transferring Image Data

Images can be output to an external storage medium (SD memory card) or sent to the DICOM Storage Server.
When Export Format is [DICOM Format] or [PC Format], only still image files and clip files are exported and associ-
ated information such as patient information or study information is not output. Therefore, exported still images / clip
files cannot be read by the system.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not connect any USB devices, other than a USB printer, USB keyboard and wireless LAN adapter that can be
used by connecting to the system, to the USB connector of the system. In order for you not to start an examination
with any devices other than a printer remained connected to the system, you should detach them from the system
after use.
• If an external medium other than a recommended one is used, the selection and use of the external medium is the
responsibility of a user.
• When using an SD memory card, make sure to confirm in advance that the media are not infected with malware.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Images can be output on the [Review] screen.

zz Study screen > Operation button area > [Review] button
Image display area

[Export Image]
button

Control area

[Search] button

Image being selected

An image with a blue frame is active.

228
 6.4 Transferring Image Data

zz When data is output to the SD memory card

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The frame rate is limited to 160 if the clip file format is set to Type 2 (*.mp4) when the frame rate of the ultrasound
image exceeds 160. Also, for clips whose frame rates are limited to 160, the frame rate of the clip itself and the frame
rate of the ultrasound image that appears during the clip are different.
• When you save additional images to external storage media on which there is DICOM data that has been output
from a different device, it is not possible to browse the tag information in the “DICOMDIR” file that is unsupported by
the device. Confirm DICOM conformance statements before using external storage media. When outputting images
to external storage media using [DICOM Format] as the image output format, we recommend that you output images
to external storage media on which neither “DICOMDIR” files nor DICOM format files from a different device exist.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1 Connect the SD memory card to the SD memory card slot.

• The SD memory card icon is displayed in the status indicator area.

2 Select the desired image to be output in the image display area on the [Review] screen.
• An image, if touched, is set to a selection state.
• If an examination has not been performed, press the [Search] button in the control area to call up the image to
be output.

3 Press the [Export Image] button in the control area.

• Displays the [Export Image] screen.

4 Set the following items on the [Export Image] screen.

Chapter 6
[Export] button

Item Functions

[Export] Selects an output format.

[Export to] Selects the destination.
[Grouping] Selects the folder structure for output.
Selects an output format of a still image file.
[JPEG]
[BMP]
[PNG]
[Still Image File Format] • Outputs at a scale that is suitable for the display of typical computer monitors.
[DICOM (DCM)]*
• This is set if the [Export Image] is in [DICOM Format].
Detailed formats to output depend on the [Contrast Compensation] of the DICOM media stor-
age. For details, refer to "DICOM Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

Continued on the next page

229
6.4 Transferring Image Data

Item Functions

Selects an output format of a clip file.

[Clip File Format]
[Clip File Frame Rate]
[Hide patient data]
[Type 1(*.avi)]
• Outputs in *.avi format. Suitable for playback on monitors for medical use that have applied
GSDF (DICOM curve).
[Type 2(*.mp4)]
• Outputs in *.mp4 format. Perfect for playback on typical computer monitors and it is the small-
est file size.
[Type 3(*.avi)]
• Outputs in *.avi format. Suitable for playback on typical computer monitors.
Select this if playback cannot be done using the Type 2 format.
[DICOM(DCM)]*
• This is set if the [Export Image] is in [DICOM Format].
Detailed formats to output depend on the [Contrast Compensation] of the DICOM media stor-
age. For details, refer to "DICOM Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
Selects and changes the frame rate of a clip file.
Sets whether to mask the patient information of the image and output.
• Mark the check box to mask and output the patient information.
• If, with the check box marked, an uneditable image is included in the output, a message appears,
confirming that there is an image to be output without masking the patient information. Then you
are prompted to choose between continuing the operation and canceling it.

*: Selectable only when the optional "DICOM Storage License" has been installed.

5 Press the [Export Image] button on the [Export Image] screen to execute.
• Images are output to an external storage medium.

6 Upon completion of the output, touch the SD memory card icon in the status indicator area.
• A message appears in the pop-up window, confirming that the external storage medium can be safely re-
moved.

7 Select the Remove icon for SD memory card desired to be removed and then remove
the SD memory card.
• The SD memory card icon is hidden.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• In the [Other] tab of the menu pop-up window, you can use to write image data.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

230
 6.4 Transferring Image Data

zz To send to the DICOM Storage Server

1 Select an image to be sent from the image display area on the [Review] screen.
• Select an image by touching it.

2 Press the [Export Image] button in the control area.

• The [Export Image] screen is displayed.

3 Select [DICOM Format], and then the destination server from the pull-down menu for [Export to].

4 Press the [Export] button on the [Export Image] screen to execute.

• It will be registered on the DICOM Joblist and be sent to the DICOM Storage Server.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You can also send it by pressing the [Export Image] button in the control area on the [Review] screen and selecting
the destination server.
Refer to "Sending to the DICOM Storage Server" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
• If you run out of free space on the external storage medium when Export Format is [PC Format], a free space short-
age dialog will be displayed. At this time, you can continue outputting the image by connecting a different external
storage medium that has enough free space and pressing [Continue].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For detail of [Review] screen, refer to "Review Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 6

231
232
 Chapter
7
Maintenance / Inspection

233
 7.1 Maintenance Checks Before and After Use

In the interests of safety, it is the user’s responsibility to carry out the following checks before and after using the sys-
tem. If the system seems abnormal after checking the items below, contact your service representative.
Keep the maintenance records using the "Check List".
Refer to "11.7 Check List for Maintenance Check: Before and after use".

7.1.1 Check before Turning ON the Power

Check the items below before turning ON the system.

No. Item

(1) The system has been put/kept under the specified environmental conditions.
(2) Ambient temperature, relative humidity, and atmospheric pressure should meet the system requirements.
(3) There should be no condensation.

There should be no deformation, damage, or dirt on the appearance.

(4) • Clean the system when there is any dirt. Refer to "7.2 Maintenance Check and Cleaning" and "8.1.6 Cleaning and
Disinfection".

There should be no wobbling or loosening of screws in the casters, transducer holder, or peripheral devices, when the
(5)
LCD monitor and the Pole Cart2 are used.
(6) The caster locks should function normally when the Pole Cart2 is used.
(7) There should be no damage to the power supply cord, and/or loosened connectors.
There should be no dirt and abnormality (projection, cracking, chasm, sharp edge or peeling) on the appearance of the
(8) transducer, cable, or connector.
• Clean and disinfect the transducer. Refer to "7.2.2 Cleaning Procedures" and "8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection".
There should be nothing blocking the air vent of the system and no obstacles near the transducer cable, the wall mount-
(9)
ed AC socket outlet and mains plug.
(10) The system should be placed in a stable position during operation.
(11) There should be no obstacles that may interrupt operation, such as clips.

7.1.2 Check after Turning ON the Power

Check the items below after turning ON the power.

No. Item

(1) The transducer displayed on the system must match the connected transducer.
(2) There must be no abnormal noise, abnormal smell, or heating.
(3) No error message must be displayed.

There must be no intermittent display, or dark areas on the ultrasound image.

(4)
Refer to "8.1.4 Daily Inspection of Transducer".

(5) The date and time must be indicated correctly.

(6) The acoustic lens surface of the transducer must not become abnormally hot. (Check by touching the lens surface.)
(7) The buttons and dials on the mini console and the touch panel must function normally.
The operation sound must not be overly loud.
(8)
Refer to "System Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".

234
 7.1 Maintenance Checks Before and After Use

7.1.3 Check after Turning OFF the Power

Check the items below after turning OFF the power.

No. Item

There should be no deformation, damage, or dirt on the system.

(1) • Clean the system when there is any dirt. Refer to "7.2 Maintenance Check and Cleaning" and "8.1.6 Cleaning and
Disinfection".
(2) There should be no loosened screws.
(3) There should be no damage to the power supply cord, and/or loosened connectors.
There should be no dirt and abnormality (projection, cracking, chasm, sharp-edge or peeling) on the appearance of the
(4) transducer, cable, or connector.
• Clean and disinfect the transducer referring to "7.2.2 Cleaning Procedures" and "8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection".

Chapter 7

235
 7.2 Maintenance Check and Cleaning

Konica Minolta strives to ensure consistent product quality from manufacturing to installation in order to ensure that
the users receive products with the best possible safety and reliability characteristics. However, the users are re-
sponsible for maintaining and operating the product after purchase.

7.2.1 Maintenance Check

Check and clean the system before and after use as described in "7.1 Maintenance Checks Before and After Use".
Also, perform the following maintenance checks whenever necessary.
Check category Check item Check interval

Clean and disinfect the transducer.

Refer to "8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection".
Clean the holder.
Clean the Reference Signal Unit.
Clean the LCD monitor. Whenever necessary.
Cleaning Clean the system surface and the mini console. • See the section below for cleaning proce-
Clean the vent holes. dures.
Clean the trackball.
Clean the Pole Cart2, Power Extension Unit2, foot
switch, barcode reader, Three-Port Probe Unit, keyboard
and VESA Attachment.
Back up the preset function, the user-defined data and Whenever necessary.
Backup
the patient data (study data). • Refer to "3.7 Data Backup".

236
 7.2 Maintenance Check and Cleaning

7.2.2 Cleaning Procedures

zz Cleaning the LCD monitor

• Use a clean, soft cloth to clean the LCD surface.
• Use a soft cotton cloth or lens cleaning paper to clean the LCD surface.
• Do not hit or apply strong pressure to the LCD surface.
• If stains are difficult to remove, wipe it gently using a soft cloth slightly moistened with water and then wipe it using
a soft and dry cloth.

WARNING •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Keep liquids away from the system, options or peripheral devices. Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Turn the power OFF and disconnect the power supply cord, and remove the battery before cleaning the system. Oth-
erwise, there is a risk of electric shock.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Never use organic solvents (such as benzine, paint thinner, and alcohol) or abrasive cleaners to prevent the damage
to the system surface or the LCD screen.
• Do not use mild detergent to clean the LCD surface to prevent the damage.
• Do not let water drops remain on the LCD screen to prevent a risk of failure.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

zz Cleaning the system surface and the mini console

• Wipe off stains using a soft cloth moistened with a mild detergent.
• Clean around the switches or keys on the mini console using cotton swabs.

zz Cleaning the vent holes

• Wipe off stains using a soft cloth moistened with a mild detergent.

Chapter 7
zz Cleaning and disinfecting the transducer
• Refer to "8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection".

zz Cleaning the holder

• Wipe off any stains on the holder using a soft dry cloth.
• If it is difficult to remove stains, wipe them off using a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent.

zz Cleaning the Reference Signal Unit

• Refer to "4.7 ECG Mode".

237
7.2 Maintenance Check and Cleaning

zz Cleaning the trackball

• Materials used: Dry cloth or tissue

1 Turn the trackball ring counterclockwise and remove it.

Trackball ring

2 Remove the trackball retainer from the trackball ring.

Trackball ring

Trackball retainer
Removed

3 Clean the both sides and whole circumference of the trackball retainer.

238
 7.2 Maintenance Check and Cleaning

4 Clean the whole circumference of the inner side of the trackball ring.

5 Remove the trackball and clean the surface.

6 If the inner roller is dirty, wipe it.

Roller

Chapter 7

7 Reassemble in reverse order.

• After assembling the trackball, move the ball using your fingers to confirm that it moves smoothly and gener-
ates no abnormal noise.
• Start the system and confirm that the trackball functions properly.

zz Cleaning the Pole Cart2, Power Extension Unit2, foot switch, barcode reader, Three-Port Probe
Unit, keyboard and VESA Attachment
• Wipe off stains using a soft cloth.
• If it is difficult to remove stains, wipe them off using a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent.

239
 7.3 Periodic Inspection Check

Konica Minolta provides the periodic maintenance inspection service for a minor evaluation fee.
Contact your service representative for details.
Inspection contents Inspection items Inspection cycle
Vent holes
1. Cleaning 1 year (at periodic inspections)
Main unit

2. Electrical safety check Protective earth resistance, etc. 1 year (at periodic inspection)

Casters (when connected to the Pole Cart2), LCD

3. Mechanical safety check monitor, appearance of transducer 1 year (at periodic inspection)
Exterior parts, holder

Ultrasound image in each mode

4. Image check and record 1 year (at periodic inspection)
Ultrasound image using the transducer

Self-diagnosis check (System Test, System Mainte-

5. Basic Maintenance nance and Hardware/Software diagnosis) in mainte- 1 year (at periodic inspection)
nance mode.

Fan
1 year (at periodic inspection) - Check
40,000 hours - Check time using the maintenance
necessity of replacement.
function.
6. Consumable parts
Battery 1 year (at periodic inspection) - Check
1 year necessity of replacement.

240
 7.4 Consumables

zz Battery
• The battery, if used continuously, will deteriorate or wear out, possibly affecting the performance of the system. To
safely use the system for a long term, the battery needs replacing if it is found deteriorated or worn out. The bat-
tery has a limited lifetime. If the operating time is shorter even when the battery has been fully charged under the
specified conditions, replace the battery with a new one.

zz Fan
• Periodic replacement is required every 40,000 hours of operation.

Chapter 7

241
 7.5 Disposal

Please follow the rules and regulations of your relevant authorities in the disposal of this product, accessories, op-
tions, consumables, media and their packing materials.

242
 Chapter
8
Transducer and Biopsy

243
 8.1 Transducer

Transducer is a device, used for the purpose of di- WARNING •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

agnosing the human body, which visually represents
• Prevent blood, body fluid, etc. from directly adher-
the internal geometry, characteristics and dynamics of
ing to the transducer. Adhesion of them may cause
the human body, and transmits / receives ultrasound
infection.
waves to obtain image data of the visual representa-
– When blood, body fluid, etc. may adhere to the
tion. It is also called "Scan head".
transducer, use a transducer cover.
The transducer, brought into contact with the body
– Wear sterilized protective gloves before using the
surface, is mainly used for such studies as ultrasound
transducer.
imaging study and Doppler ultrasound study (acquisi-
– Because the transducer cannot be sterilized, use
tion of blood flow information).
the sterilized transducer cover.
– If you are using transducer covers, do not use
8.1.1 Safety Precautions & covers that are coated with silicon oil.

Warnings for Transducer – When using the transducer on a patient who is

hypersensitive to natural rubber, use a transducer
cover that does not contain natural rubber. Some
DANGER •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• transducer covers contain natural rubber. Although
rare, natural rubber can cause allergic reactions
• Do not use the transducer in places where inflam-
such itchiness, redness, rash, swelling, fever,
mable gas or high-concentration oxygen gas is gen-
breathing difficulties, drop in blood pressure, and
erated. Ignition, explosion, or combustion may occur.
even shock. If any of these symptoms occur, stop
• Do not use it for an eyeball. It is not designed to be
using the transducer immediately, and implement
applied to an eyeball.
appropriate measures.
• Do not use it together with a defibrillator. Doing so
– Replace the transducer cover after each
may cause performance degradation or failure of
examination.
the system.
– Be sure to comply with the prescribed conditions
•• • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••
for the chemical solutions. Otherwise, there is a
risk of infection due to insufficient cleaning and
disinfection.
• Do not make an impact on the transducer. Doing
so may cause an electric shock.
• Do not make a strong impact on the transducer,
push it to a hard thing forcibly, or drop it. Also do
not forcibly bend, pull, or twist its cable.
• Do not pour a liquid on its connector. Doing so may
cause an electric shock, a short-circuit, a fire, or a
breakdown.
• Do not use the transducer when it is broken or dam-
aged. Doing so may cause an electric shock or injury.
– Before and after an examination, check that the
transducer has no abnormality, such as a scratch
and a crack.
• Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the trans-
ducer. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
– To perform repair, special techniques are required.
Contact your service representative.
• Do not expose the transducer to fluids that contain
organic solvents (excluding, however, the cleaners
and disinfectants described in this manual).
Doing so may damage it. There is also a risk of
electric shock.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

244
 8.1 Transducer

CAUTION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Do not use a transducer whose acoustic lens or
housing is abnormally hot. Doing so may cause a
burn injury.
• Do not use a hard brush for cleaning or disinfecting
the transducer. Doing so may damage it.
• Do not immerse the transducer in a disinfection so-
lution longer than a specified time. If doing so, the
performance of the transducer could deteriorate.
• Do not use non-specified chemicals (for disinfec-
tion or cleaning). Doing so may cause the perfor-
mance of transducers to decrease.
• Turn OFF the system before attaching / detaching
or replacing a transducer.
– When the transducer has to be laid down
temporarily during a study, place it on a stable and
level surface to prevent it from falling.
• Do not connect anything other than transducers or
Three-Port Probe Unit designed for this system to
the transducer connector on the main unit.
• When transporting a transducer, be sure to disin-
fect the transducer at the beginning, put it into a
plastic bag, and then put the transducer-enclosed
bag in a storage case. If do not doing so, the per-
formance of the transducer could deteriorate.
• Use ultrasound gel that mainly consists of water.
Use of castor oil may deteriorate the transducer
and cause an electric shock.
– Please select and use an appropriate ultrasound
gel on the market.
• Before cleaning or disinfecting the transducer, re-
move it from this system. Otherwise there is a risk
of electric shock.
• Wear protective gloves to prevent infection before
cleaning and disinfecting the transducer.
• Be sure to comply with the usage and storage envi-
ronment conditions of the transducer.
If do not doing so, the performance of the trans-
ducer could deteriorate.
• Disinfect the transducer to prevent infection before
returning it to your service representative.
Chapter 8
• While the main unit is on stand by, be sure to
freeze the main unit.
If the live state is continued, there is a risk that the
transducer will overheat and cause burns.
• Store the ultrasound gel as described in the in-
struction manual. Otherwise, there is a risk of infec-
tion.
• When discarding transducers, disinfect or sterilize
the transducers, and then discard them as indus-
trial waste.
Be sure to follow the rules and regulations of the
local governing body, and request an approved
industrial waste disposal company to discard the
transducers.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••

245
8.1 Transducer

8.1.2 Specifications of Transducer

Transducers available for this system and their specifications are as follows.

zz Convex type (optional)

Name CONVEX PROBE C5-2
Scan system Electronic convex scanning
Biopsy function Available
Weight Approximately 510 g
Cable length Approximately 1950 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C
Operating environment Relative humidity 10 % to 80 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa
Ambient temperature -25 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 0 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

zz Convex type (optional)

Name ENDOCAVITY PROBE EC9-3
Scan system Electronic convex scanning
Biopsy function Not available
Weight Approximately 550 g
Cable length Approximately 2200 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C
Operating environment Relative humidity 30 % to 80 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa
Ambient temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 20 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

246
 8.1 Transducer

zz Convex type (optional)

Name CONVEX PROBE MC10-3
Scan system Electronic convex scanning
Biopsy function Not available
Weight Approximately 410 g
Cable length Approximately 1950 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C
Operating environment Relative humidity 30 % to 80 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa
Ambient temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 20 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

zz Linear type (optional)

Name LINEAR PROBE L18-4
Scan system Electronic linear scanning
Biopsy function Available
Weight Approximately 490 g
Cable length Approximately 1950 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C

Operating environment Relative humidity 30 % to 80 % (no condensation)

Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Ambient temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 20 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

zz Linear type (optional)

Name LINEAR PROBE L14-4
Scan system Electronic linear scanning
Biopsy function Available
Weight Approximately 500 g
Cable length Approximately 1950 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C Chapter 8
Operating environment Relative humidity 30 % to 80 % (no condensation)

Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Ambient temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 20 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

247
8.1 Transducer

zz Linear type (optional)

Name LINEAR PROBE L11-3
Scan system Electronic linear scanning
Biopsy function Available
Weight Approximately 520 g
Cable length Approximately 1950 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C

Operating environment Relative humidity 30 % to 80 % (no condensation)

Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Ambient temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 20 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

zz Linear type (optional)

Name LINEAR PROBE HL18-4
Scan system Electronic linear scanning
Biopsy function Not available
Weight Approximately 420 g
Cable length Approximately 2200 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C

Operating environment Relative humidity 30 % to 80 % (no condensation)

Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Ambient temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 20 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

zz Linear type (optional)

Name LINEAR PROBE WL13-3
Scan system Electronic linear scanning
Biopsy function Not available
Weight Approximately 520 g
Cable length Approximately 1950 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C

Operating environment Relative humidity 30 % to 80 % (no condensation)

Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Ambient temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 20 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

248
 8.1 Transducer

zz Sector type (optional)

Name SECTOR PROBE S4-2
Scan system Electronic sector scanning
Biopsy function Not available
Weight Approximately 420 g
Cable length Approximately 1950 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C

Operating environment Relative humidity 10 % to 80 % (no condensation)

Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Ambient temperature -25 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 0 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

zz Sector type (optional)

Name SECTOR PROBE S4-2A
Scan system Electronic sector scanning
Biopsy function Not available
Weight Approximately 420 g
Cable length Approximately 1950 mm
Ambient temperature 10 °C to 40 °C

Operating environment Relative humidity 30 % to 80 % (no condensation)

Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Ambient temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Shipment and storage conditions Relative humidity 20 % to 90 % (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Chapter 8

249
8.1 Transducer

8.1.3 Transducer Part Names

This section describes the function of each part and immersible range of the transducer.
This transducer is classified as "IPX7" according to the degree of protection against harmful ingress of water (See
drawing below).
The connector is not waterproof or drip-proof. Never immerse the connector in liquids or spill liquids onto it.

zz For C5-2
Connector Waterproof range
Connects to the ultrasound system, and inputs
/ outputs electrical signals.
Acoustic lens
A portion to emit ultra-
sound waves to the body.
Ultrasound gel is applied
here.

Housing
This part serves as both
protection of an electrical
connection and the grip
of the transducer.

Scanning direction mark

There is a side groove
only on one side, which
indicates the direction
that starts scanning.
On the ultrasound image,
the position of scan mark
represents the direction
that starts scanning.

Cable
Electrically connects the
ultrasound system to the
transducer via a connec-
tor.

For MC10-3, L18-4, L14-4, L11-3, S4-2, WL13-3, and S4-2A refer to the corresponding locations.

250
 8.1 Transducer

zz For EC9-3

Waterproof range

Acoustic lens

Housing

Scanning direction mark

The side with the flat edge is
the scan start direction.

Chapter 8

Cable

251
8.1 Transducer

zz For HL18-4
Waterproof range

Scanning direction
The tip is the scan start direc-
tion.

Acoustic lens

Housing

Cable

252

8.1.4 Daily Inspection of Trans-
ducer
To ensure safe use of the transducer, inspection pro-
cedures for the transducer are shown below. Please
make sure to perform an inspection before and after
each use under your responsibility.
If you found any abnormality of the transducer, stop
using it and contact your service representative.
WARNING ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Do not use the transducer when it is broken or
damaged. Doing so may cause an electric shock or
injury.
– Before and after an examination, check that the
transducer has no abnormality, such as a scratch
and a crack.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
CAUTION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Do not use a transducer whose acoustic lens or
housing is abnormally hot. Doing so may cause a
burn injury.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
zz Inspection before use
• Check the acoustic lens, housing, cable and con-
nector surfaces for external defects such as bumps,
tears or cracks.
zz Inspection during use
• Check that the acoustic lens or the housing does not
become abnormally hot.
• Check that the ultrasound image is free from appar-
ent defects such as abnormal noises, intermittent
displays or dark areas.
If anything is wrong with the ultrasound image, the
ultrasound system or the transducer may be broken.
zz Inspection after use
• Check the acoustic lens, housing, cable and con-
nector surfaces for external defects such as bumps,
tears or cracks.
• Keep transducers clean for future use.
253
8.1 Transducer
8.1.5 Usage
Transducers must not be used by persons other than
fully qualified and certified medical personnel.
For information about the operation of the system, see
the corresponding section in this manual.
zz Before use
• Conduct "Inspection before use" to check that the
transducer has no external abnormality.
• Clean and disinfect the transducer.
Reference •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• For details on how to clean the transducer, refer to
"8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection".
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
zz Using the transducer
1 Firmly attach and connect the connector
of the transducer to the transducer con-
nector of the system.
2 Turn ON the power to the system.
3 Follow the operating procedures for the
system to set up / adjust the system prop-
erly.
Reference •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• "2.1.2 Connecting the Transducer"
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
Items to be checked
• Make sure the correct transducer name is displayed
on the screen.
Chapter 8
• Conduct "Inspection during use" to check that the
transducer has no abnormality.
• In a situation where the transducer may come into
contact with blood or other body fluids, always cover
it with the exclusive transducer cover that has been
sterilized.
• Do not expose the transducer to fluids that contain
organic solvents (excluding, however, the cleaners
and disinfectants described in this manual).
4 Put an appropriate amount of ultrasound
gel on the transducer’s acoustic lens and
place the transducer on the surface of the
patient’s body that is being studied.
8.1 Transducer
5 Adjust the angle and position of the trans-
ducer during the diagnostic procedure to
acquire the desired image of the surface
of the patient’s body that is being stud-
ied.
For biopsy procedure
• Make sure to cover the transducer with the sterilized
transducer cover and use the biopsy starter kit for
exclusive use of the transducer. Read the operation
manual for the biopsy starter kit before using.
• The biopsy guideline is displayed on the system
screen.
• Perform a biopsy procedure while carefully guiding
the needle end using images.
IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Before starting any biopsy procedure, make sure
the guideline is aligned with the needle using a wa-
ter tank or the like.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Reference ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• For details of the biopsy, refer to "8.2 Biopsy".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
zz After use
1 Turn the power OFF, and remove the
transducer according to the operating
procedures for the system.
2 Wipe the transducer clean of the ultra-
sound gel or stains with a soft cloth
dipped in hot water (40 °C or less) and air-
dry it.
3 Conduct "Inspection after use" to check
that the transducer has no abnormality.
4 Clean / disinfect the transducer.
5 Keep the transducer in a clean place.
Reference ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• For details on how to clean the transducer, refer to
"8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
254
To transport transducer
When transporting a transducer, be sure to disinfect
the transducer at the beginning, put it into a plastic
bag, and then put the transducer-enclosed bag in a
storage case.
8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection
This section describes the methods and precautions
for cleaning and disinfection of the transducer.
WARNING •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• Do not pour a liquid on its connector. Doing so may
cause an electric shock, a short-circuit, a fire, or a
breakdown.
• Be sure to comply with the prescribed conditions
for the chemical solutions. Otherwise, there is a
risk of infection due to insufficient cleaning and dis-
infection.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
CAUTION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• Do not use a hard brush for cleaning or disinfecting
the transducer. Doing so may damage it.
• Do not immerse the transducer in a disinfection so-
lution longer than a specified time. If doing so, the
performance of the transducer could deteriorate.
• Do not use non-specified chemicals (for disinfec-
tion or cleaning). Doing so may cause the perfor-
mance of transducers to decrease.
• Wear protective gloves to prevent infection before
cleaning and disinfecting the transducer.
• Be sure to comply with the usage and storage envi-
ronment conditions of the transducer.
If do not doing so, the performance of the trans-
ducer could deteriorate.
• Disinfect the transducer to prevent infection before
returning it to your service representative.
• For the effects and procedure of cleaning and dis-
infection, refer to the instruction manuals of chemi-
cals.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
 8.1 Transducer

zz Cleaning zz Disinfection (immersion)

1 Wash off all residues on the transducer 1 Clean the transducer before disinfecting
with purified water. it.

2 Clean the transducer using one of the so- 2 Immerse the transducer in chemical solu-
lutions listed in the table below. tions shown in the table below.
• For the immersion, refer to the waterproof range • For the immersion, refer to the waterproof range
in "8.1.3 Transducer Part Names". in "8.1.3 Transducer Part Names".

3 Rinse off the transducer with sterile water 3 Rinse off the transducer with sterile water
after taking it out from a chemical solu- after taking it out from a chemical solu-
tion. tion.

4 Wipe off the surface of the transducer us-
ing a sterile soft cloth. Then, let the trans-
ducer air-dry.
• When drying the transducer, do not heat or blow
a hot wind over it. Doing so may cause damage.
Chemical type Trade name Method and time
4 Wipe off the surface of the transducer us-
ing a sterile soft cloth. Then, let the trans-
ducer air-dry.
• When drying the transducer, do not heat or blow
a hot wind over it. Doing so may cause damage.
Chemical type Trade name Method and time

Immersion: 1 min. Follow the manufac-

CIDEZYME®
Enzyme Temperature: Room Ortho- ® turer’s instructions.
(0.8 %) CIDEX OPA
temperature phthalalde- Immersion: 12 min.
(0.55 %)
hyde Temperature: Room
Wiping with a sterile
temperature
Isopropyl Isopropyl Alco- gauze
Alcohol hol 70 % Temperature: Room
temperature IMPORTANT • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
Wiping with a sterile • Repeated disinfection of the transducer may cause
Protex™
Benzalkoni- soft cloth discoloration, but it won’t affect the performance of
Disinfectant
um chloride Temperature: Room the transducer.
Wipes
temperature • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
Wiping with a sterile
Protex™
Benzalkoni- gauze ®
um chloride
Disinfectant
Temperature: Room zz Disinfection (trophon EPR)
Spray
temperature
Wiping with a sterile 1 Clean and dry the transducer before disin-
Benzalkoni- Super Sani- soft cloth fecting.
um chloride Cloth® Temperature: Room
temperature
Wiping with a sterile
2 Disinfect the transducer with trophon ®
Benzalkoni- Sani-Cloth® soft cloth EPR
Chapter 8
um chloride HB Temperature: Room • Use a cartridge for high level disinfectants.
temperature • Be sure to refer to the instruction manual pro-
Wiping with a sterile vided from the manufacturer Nanosonics.
Benzalkoni- Sani-Cloth® soft cloth Chemical type Trade name Method and time
um chloride Plus Temperature: Room
temperature Hydrogen trophon® Follow the manufac-
Peroxide NanoNebulant® turer’s instructions.
Wiping with a sterile
Benzalkoni- gauze Hydrogen trophon® Follow the manufac-
PI Spray
um chloride Temperature: Room Peroxide Sonex-HL® turer’s instructions.
temperature

255
 8.2 Biopsy
Biopsy refers to a study procedure that surgically ob-
tains a tissue sample from a part of a patient’s body.
When conducting any biopsy procedure using the
ultrasound system, attaching the biopsy bracket and
needle guide to the transducer allows you to check the
angle and direction of the applicable biopsy needle
during the procedure.
Displaying the image of the biopsy needle being in-
serted into the body in real time, the ultrasound system
helps minimize risks to your patient.
8.2.1 Safety Precautions &
Warnings for Biopsy
When performing a biopsy procedure, use an ap-
proved biopsy bracket and needle guide.
Biopsy procedures should always be performed with
caution to prevent any complications.
It is recommended to use a sterile cover and gel dur-
ing the procedure.
WARNING • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••
• Do not perform biopsy procedures when the sys-
tem is in battery mode. The unit may shut down
unexpectedly causing potential harm to the patient.
• Do not freeze the image when performing a biopsy
procedure. Biopsy procedures may be performed
incorrectly during a frozen image. Do not reuse the
needle guide.
• Ultrasound guided procedures should be per-
formed by a trained physician in accordance with
prevailing medical standards otherwise serious
complications may arise.
• To prevent injury to the patient confirm before
the exam that there are no abnormalities with the
bracket and it properly fits on the transducer.
• Always monitor the biopsy target and the biopsy
needle end while performing a biopsy procedure.
– During a biopsy procedure, the needle may
deviate from the desired course due to the tissue
characteristics or the type of needle. In particular,
needles with small diameters may deviate to a
greater degree.
– The biopsy target may shift due to unexpected
patient motion when the biopsy needle is inserted,
or due to respiratory movement.
– The biopsy guide displayed on the ultrasound
image does not indicate the actual position of
the biopsy needle. It should only be used as a
reference.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
256
WARNING • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• Disinfect the transducer and biopsy bracket before
and after an ultrasound-guided biopsy procedure.
For instructions on how to disinfect the transducer,
refer to "8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection". For in-
structions on how to disinfect the biopsy bracket,
refer to the instruction manual of the biopsy brack-
et. Failure to do so may result in the transducer
and biopsy bracket becoming sources of infection.
• Before a biopsy procedure is performed, confirm
that the selected biopsy guide angle matches the
angle indicated on the biopsy bracket to be used.
Patient injury may result if they are not aligned.
• Before starting a biopsy procedure, confirm the
insertion route of a biopsy needle.
Use the following procedure to make sure that the
insertion route of the biopsy needle fits properly
within the range of the biopsy guideline displayed
on the screen:
– Attach an appropriate biopsy bracket and needle
guide to the transducer.
– Perform a scan in a container filled with water (room
temperature).
– Display the biopsy guideline on the screen.
– Insert a biopsy needle into the needle guide, make
sure the echo from the biopsy needle fits within the
biopsy guideline range.
• Do not perform the biopsy during the pressurization
state.
– Do not perform the biopsy during pressurization of
human tissue in Elastography-mode, etc. There is
a risk of scarring the patient.
• It is possible to use it for a nerve block injection
or biopsy procedure; however, avoid puncturing
the transducer covers with an injection or biopsy
needle. Otherwise, there is a possibility that the
transducer covers are broken and some parts of
broken transducer covers enter the patient's body
or that the needle is clogged.
• Do not expose the transducer to fluids that contain
organic solvents (excluding, however, the cleaners
and disinfectants described in this manual).
Doing so may damage it. There is also a risk of
electric shock.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
 8.2 Biopsy

CAUTION • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••• 3 Cover the transducer with the transducer

cover.
• Position of the biopsy target on the image and
• Secure the cover with the supplied rubber band
actual position of the biopsy needle
to keep it from being displaced.
Even though the biopsy target and the biopsy
needle are identified on the image, a biopsy may
not always be successful due to dispersion of the
ultrasound beam.
• When performing a biopsy on a small structure fol- Transducer cover
low the instructions below.
– Do not rely solely on the echo of the needle end
on the image. Pay careful attention to the target,
which may shift slightly when the biopsy needle
comes into contact with it.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 Attach a needle guide to the biopsy brack-
et over the transducer cover.

8.2.2 Attachment of Biopsy

Bracket and Needle Guide

1 Directly attach a biopsy bracket to the Needle guide

transducer.

HINT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• A needle guide is a sterile, disposable part used to
Biopsy bracket
guide a biopsy needle (needle).
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Before using a biopsy bracket, make sure to read
the instruction manual for the biopsy bracket.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Reference ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• For information on the types of usable biopsy
brackets, refer to "1.6.7 Connectable Transducers
and Biopsy Brackets".
Chapter 8

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

2 Put ultrasound gel in the transducer cov-

er.
• This will prevent air from entering between the
cover and the transducer.

Ultrasound gel

257
8.2 Biopsy

8.2.3 Display of Biopsy Guide

The biopsy guide refers to biopsy guidelines that appear on-screen, and is displayed over a live B-image (including a
color image).
For how to set the Simple Needle Visualization (SNV), refer to "Image Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applica-
tions".

1 Press in the operation button area.

• A message appears, confirming the guide display type and an insertion route of the biopsy needle.

2 Press the [OK] button.

• The default guide display type will be selected and the biopsy pop-up menu will be displayed.
Biopsy pop-up menu Bracket / angle symbols

zz When ending the biopsy guide

Press .

258
 8.2 Biopsy

8.2.4 Layout of Guideline

The layout of a guideline is as follows:

Guideline

Biopsy guideline

Error line

Bracket symbol

Angle symbol

Mount the biopsy bracket and needle guide to the transducer and insert the biopsy needle in the same plane as the
image in the scan direction.
A guide for the biopsy needle is displayed on the screen. If the multi-angle-based biopsy bracket is used, an angle
symbol is also displayed.
The guideline display allows you to adjust spacing between dots and unit display.
Item Functions

Bracket symbol Displays the selected biopsy bracket symbol (text).

Angle symbol Displays the angle symbol for the currently selected biopsy for multi-angle.
Uses a yellow dotted line to display the insertion line for a biopsy procedure.
• Draws smaller dots at 5 mm intervals, and larger ones at 10 mm intervals.
• Also displays the existence area of the biopsy needle, which allows for possible
Guideline insertion angle variations. A combination of the displays can be adjusted using the
menu items.
• The unit display and spacing between dots can also be adjusted using the menu
items.

Chapter 8

259
8.2 Biopsy

8.2.5 Biopsy Pop-up Menu

Pressing in the operation button area will display the biopsy pop-up menu and will turn ON the default biopsy

guide display corresponding to the transducer being connected.

Various parameters such as the guideline display and type selection can be changed from the biopsy pop-up menu.

Button Functions

Enables or disables the biopsy guide display.

• When the biopsy function is started using the [Biopsy] button, this item is also turned ON
[Biopsy Display] automatically, and when it is turned OFF, the biopsy function is ended.
• When the image is frozen with the Biopsy Display inactive, Biopsy Display cannot be made
active. Unfreeze the image before using Biopsy Display.

Changes the guide display angle.

• The angle select menu is displayed, which shows the bracket and angle symbols corre-
[Angle Select] sponding to the transducer.
• Select the desired bracket and angle symbols, or close the list with the [Cancel] button to
return to the biopsy menu.
Changes the display combination of the biopsy guide and variance line as follows:
Displays both the guideline and error lines.
[Type Select]
Displays only the error lines.
Displays only the guideline.
Changes the intervals of the dot marks of the biopsy guide in relation to the direction of
[Dot Interval] insertion of the biopsy needle.
• Pitch: 5 mm ⇔ 10 mm
[Display cm] Shows / Hides the length of the biopsy needle inserted.
Closes only the pop-up menu.
[Close]
• The guide function does not end.

260
 8.2 Biopsy

8.2.6 Simple Needle Visualiza- IMPORTANT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

tion
To improve the visibility of a biopsy needle, the Simple
Needle Visualization (SNV) feature analyzes bright-
ness patterns and changes, and enhances the display
of the biopsy needle on the B image.
WARNING ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To use the Simple Needle Visualization function,
"the Simple Needle Visualization License" is re-
quired. Contact your service representative for de-
tails.
• The Simple Needle Visualization function cannot
be used if the active screen is in Elastography-
mode.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •

• Needle may not be enhanced correctly.

– In some situations when the needle is adjacent to
a highly echogenic structure, an artifact may occur
causing that structure to become enhanced along
with the needle.
– As the enhancement depends on the image quality
of the B-mode image, the SNV feature may not
work as expected if the needle in the B-mode
image is not clear. This applies particularly when
the needle used is thin, the display depth is deep,
the insertion angle of the needle (refer to "8.2.8
Selection of Biopsy Bracket") is closer to vertical to
the transducer plane, or the ultrasound beam is off
the needle.
– Noise components other than the needle may be
enhanced due to the acoustic artifacts (multiple
reflections) produced by the needle. The level of
acoustic artifacts will be greater when the needle
is thick or the insertion angle is closer to parallel to
the transducer plane.
– The biopsy needle enhance display is likely to be
positionally displaced to some degree with respect
to the B-mode image.
– Noise components other than the needle may be
enhanced due to tissue movement. The needle
may not be enhanced well if it moves too fast or too
slow. It is not enhanced when it stops moving (when
the selected SNV type enhances movement).
– If the needle in the image is short, it may be less
enhanced (when the selected SNV type enhances
continuous structure).
– If a different direction from that of the inserted
Chapter 8

needle is selected, the needle may be less

enhanced (when SNV Steer is selected).
• When using the SNV feature, turn off the Color
Flow-, Power Doppler-, 2D-TDI- and SCF-mode and
enter the Split mode. Then, use the window with
needle enhancement as a guide to locate the biopsy
needle, and the one without the needle enhance-
ment as a basis for making your final decision.
• The use of a bracket is recommended with the
SNV function.
• The color of the needle enhancement can be
changed. Do not confuse it with an image of the
Color Flow-, Power Doppler-, 2D-TDI- and SCF-
mode.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••

261
8.2 Biopsy

8.2.7 SNV Pop-up Menu

Pressing in the operation button area will display the SNV pop-up menu.
Various parameters such as the SNV Type, SNV Gain and SNV Steer can be changed from the SNV pop-up menu.
The recommended procedure for using the SNV feature is as follows:

1 Attach the biopsy bracket to a transducer.*1

2 Enable [Biopsy Display] in the biopsy pop-up menu.*1

3 Enable [SNV Display] in the SNV pop-up menu.

4 Enter the Split mode (the mode that displays simultaneous dual display of B-mode and SNV
images).*1
*1: Not essential but recommended.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For details on how to attach a biopsy bracket to the transducer, refer to "8.2.2 Attachment of Biopsy Bracket and
Needle Guide".
• For details on the biopsy pop-up menu, refer to "8.2.5 Biopsy Pop-up Menu".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Turns orange when [SNV Display], [SNV Steer],

or [Clear Image] is enabled.

262
 8.2 Biopsy

Menu Button Functions

Enables or disables the SNV.

[SNV Display]
• SNV cannot be enabled if S4-2, S4-2A, or EC9-3 transducer is used.
Specifies the direction from which the biopsy needle comes into view on the screen.
The enhancement can be increased by specifying the direction in advance.
[Left] : Select this when the biopsy needle will come into view from the left side of
the screen.
[Right] : Select this when the biopsy needle will come into view from the right side
of the screen.
[SNV Steer]
[Auto] : Select this when you cannot select which direction the needle will come
[SNV Menu]
into view from in advance.
• If you want to turn this function off, pressing the highlighted button will remove
your selection.
• When you have selected either Left or Right, the SNV Steer will automatically
rotate as well if you change the Rotate or “Upside/Down” setting in B-mode.
[Clear Image] Adjusts contrast with consideration for the sizes of structures in the image.
[Setting] Switches to Detail Setting menu.
[Close] Closes the pop-up menu.
Selects the color you use for enhancement. If the SNV Type is "7", this button is not
[SNV Color] available.
• SNV Color is only effective when the SNV type other than "7" is selected.
Selects the enhancement method.
[SNV Type] • There are eight patterns (0 to 7) available for the enhancement method such as
movement or continuous structure, etc.
Selects the intensity of enhancement. If the SNV Type is "7", this button is not avail-
able.
[L] : Low
[Setting] Menu [SNV Gain]
[M]: Medium
[H] : High
• SNV Gain is only effective when the SNV type other than "7" is selected.
Selects the image contrast. This is available for SNV types 4 to 7.
[L] : Low
[Contrast] [M]: Medium
[H] : High
• Contrast is effective only when SNV type "4" or higher is selected.
[Back] Exits the Advanced Setting menu and returns to the SNV menu.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• SNV cannot be displayed in M/PW-mode or if M Cursor or the Doppler Gate is displayed. M/PW-mode, M Cursor, or
Doppler Gate cannot be displayed when SNV is active.
• You can also change the setting so that you can disable SNV by pressing in the mode button area. Refer to
“Confirming preset / modifying user preset” in the "Operation Manual: Applications". If you set so, you can turn off [SNV
Chapter 8

Display], [SNV Steer], and [Clear Image] by pressing . Also, the transducer mark turns blue and the SNV pop-
up menu closes.

• You can also display explanations of the SNV type. Refer to "Image Screen" in the "Operation Manual: Applications".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

263
8.2 Biopsy

8.2.8 Selection of Biopsy Bracket

Here is the information about the biopsy bracket symbols and angles corresponding to the transducers to be applied.
Biopsy needle insertion angle (deg)
No. Transducer number Biopsy bracket symbol Depth values in parentheses

θA θB θC

35.1 23.1
(1) C5-2 Multi –
[50 mm] [90 mm]
60.0 47.4 38.5
(2) L18-4 Multi
[15 mm] [25 mm] [35 mm]
54.6 37.2
(3) L14-4 Multi –
[20 mm] [40 mm]
61.1 49.2 37.1
(4) L11-3 Multi
[15 mm] [25 mm] [40 mm]
Example) in the (1) case Example) in the (2), (3) and (4) case

X X

Depth
θ°
Depth θ°

Y Y

264
 8.3 Acoustic Standoff
Attaching the optional Acoustic Standoff to a trans-
ducer enables acoustic coupling by creating an ap-
propriate gap while still allowing close contact between
the patient's body and the transducer, and is helpful in
adjusting focus when examining small parts and mus-
culoskeletal structures near the surface of the body.
(The standoff amount is approx. 5 mm.)
• Do not use it for non-diagnostic purposes.
• Do not allow any person other than the dedicated
staff specified by the medical facilities to use it.
• Maintain / manage it on your own responsibility.
• Acoustic Standoff expires thirty (30) days after it is
opened. Discard Acoustic Standoff if it is past the
expiry date.
• Write the date when you opened the package on the
label on the storage bag.
• The warranty period is thirty (30) days from the date
when the storage bag is first opened. We will replace
it at no cost if any abnormality considered to be
clearly attributable to us, occurs during this period.
• Use it in a safe and proper manner, and take full ad-
vantage of the function.
8.3.1 Safety Precautions &
Warnings for Acoustic
Standoff
Before using, thoroughly read the instruction manual,
and observe the following safety precautions and
warnings.
Typical risks are shown in this document. You should
be careful about other risks as well.
DANGER • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••
• Do not use Acoustic Standoff in a location where
flammable gases or high concentrations of oxygen
gas occur. Otherwise, it may catch fire, explode or
burn.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
265
WARNING • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• Follow the instructions below. There is a risk of in-
fection.
– Keep it from coming into direct contact with any
body part (organ, mucous membrane, blood and
body fluid) other than body surfaces.
– When cleaning or disinfecting it, avoid using
unspecified cleaning / disinfecting agents.
– Make sure to clean / disinfect Acoustic Standoff
before use. Wear gloves before cleaning /
disinfecting it. Before attaching it to the transducer,
wear disinfected / sterilized gloves.
– Always clean it before disinfecting it.
– After cleaning / disinfecting Acoustic Standoff,
thoroughly rinse its surface with sterile water.
– When you have used Acoustic Standoff, be sure to
clean / disinfect it before re-using.
– If there is a possibility that Acoustic Standoff
contacts an organ or mucous membrane or
is soiled with blood or body fluids, attach the
transducer covers. Replace it with a new one if it is
soiled with blood or body fluids.
• When Acoustic Standoff is attached to the trans-
ducer and the system is on standby, make sure to
freeze the image. Keeping the image in a live state
may cause the transducer to generate heat, result-
ing in deterioration or burns of Acoustic Standoff.
• Do not drop or give a shock to the transducer with
Acoustic Standoff. Otherwise, an electric shock or
damage may occur.
• Do not use it for surgical procedures.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
CAUTION • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
• Avoid attaching Acoustic Standoff to the transducer
above the patient. It can cause injury if dropped.
• It is not sterilization-resistant. Do not sterilize it. Chapter 8
Otherwise, Acoustic Standoff may deteriorate.
• It is not plasma processing-ready. Acoustic Stand-
off, if subjected to plasma processing, may deterio-
rate.
• Make sure to observe the specified storage condi-
tions. Otherwise, the performance can degrade and
no longer be covered under the 30-day warranty.
• To store Acoustic Standoff, use the protective film
and bag that were originally supplied with it. If it is
stored in a manner other than that specified herein,
it may deform or discolor contact objects.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • •
8.3 Acoustic Standoff

CAUTION • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••

• Never change or modify Acoustic Standoff. Other-
8.3.2 Usage
wise, the function / performance cannot be guaran-
teed. For the handling of transducers, see "8.1 Transducer".
• Do not use it together with a defibrillator. Other- For the operation of the system, see the corresponding
wise, performance degradation or a failure of the sections in Operation Manuals: Fundamentals / Appli-
transducer can occur. cations.
• Do not use anything (mineral oil, lubricant, lotion,
fluids that contain organic solvents, etc.) other than Attach Acoustic Standoff to one of the following trans-
ultrasound gels for ultrasound imaging and the ducers.
cleaners and disinfectants described in this manu- Do not attach it to any other transducer.
al. Trade name Manufacturer
• Do not stretch Acoustic Standoff unnecessarily, or
attach it in an unspecified manner. Otherwise, it LINEAR PROBE L18-4
Konica Minolta, Inc.
can be broken. LINEAR PROBE L14-4
• Do not apply a strong force to Acoustic Standoff.
Otherwise, it can become deformed / broken. Use and store Acoustic Standoff in the following loca-
• Do not use Acoustic Standoff together with the tions:
biopsy adapter. Forcibly attaching both Acoustic • Where it is not exposed to direct sunlight or radiation
Standoff and the biopsy adapter to the transducer such as X-rays
can result in damage to them. • Where little dust is present
• Be careful to prevent foreign objects from adhering • Where it is free of vibration
to the Acoustic Standoff surface. Clean / disinfect
the surface if any foreign objects. Use of Acoustic Observe the following environmental conditions when
Standoff with adherents remaining on its surface using / storing / transporting Acoustic Standoff:
for an examination can result in an erroneous diag- • Usage environment range
nosis. Temperature: +10 to +40 [°C] (no condensation)
• When the ultrasound gel between the lens and Humidity: 30 to 80 [% RH] (no condensation)
Acoustic Standoff of the transducer being used Atmospheric pressure:
becomes insufficient, temporarily detach Acous- 700 to 1060 [hPa]
tic Standoff, wipe the ultrasound gel off Acoustic Altitude: 3000 m or less
Standoff and the transducer, and then follow the at- • Transportation environment range
tachment procedure in Usage to reattach Acoustic Typical modes of transport (land vehicle, ship and
Standoff. Replenishing ultrasound gel while forcibly aircraft) will be used.
stretching Acoustic Standoff can damage Acoustic Temperature: -20 to +60 [°C] (no condensation)
Standoff and the transducer. Humidity: 20 to 90 [% RH] (no condensation)
• When cleaning Acoustic Standoff, use a piece of Atmospheric pressure:
gauze, soft sponge, etc. and avoid scrubbing it with 700 to 1060 [hPa]
sharp objects. • Storage environment range
• It is possible to use it for a nerve block injection Temperature: -20 to +60 [°C] (no condensation)
or biopsy procedure; however, avoid punctur- Humidity: 20 to 90 [% RH] (no condensation)
ing Acoustic Standoff with an injection or biopsy Atmospheric pressure:
needle. Otherwise, there is a possibility that Acous- 700 to 1060 [hPa]
tic Standoff is broken and some parts of broken
Acoustic Standoff enter the patient’s body or that
zz Before use
the needle is clogged. • Check Acoustic Standoff for any abnormalities such
• Store the ultrasound gel as described in the in- as breakage, cut and deformation. Even before the
struction manual. Otherwise, there is a risk of infec- expiry date, do not use it if something abnormal is
tion. found.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Always clean / disinfect Acoustic Standoff before
use. (It is not cleaned / disinfected by default at the
time of purchase.)
• To attach Acoustic Standoff to the transducer, wear
disinfected / sterilized gloves.

266
 8.3 Acoustic Standoff

zz How to attach Acoustic Standoff 5 Fold Acoustic Standoff over the acoustic
lens surface of the transducer.
1 Open the storage bag of Acoustic Stand-
off, and take out Acoustic Standoff from
the storage bag.

2 Remove a pair of protective films from

Acoustic Standoff.
• Do not discard a pair of protective films as you
will use them in storing Acoustic Standoff.

3 As shown in the figures below, pass the

transducer into one of the two openings
of Acoustic Standoff.
6 Insert your thumb into the other opening
to secure Acoustic Standoff to the side of
the transducer.

7 Fold Acoustic Standoff over the lens

again, and pass the transducer into the
other opening.

4 Apply an appropriate amount of ultra-

sound gel to the lens surface of the trans-
Chapter 8
ducer.

Ultrasound
gel

267
8.3 Acoustic Standoff
8 Appropriately fit Acoustic Standoff so that
it is positioned as shown in the figures
below.
9 Put an appropriate amount of ultrasound
gel on the Acoustic Standoff area on the
lens surface of the transducer, and start
an examination.
268
zz After use
1 Detach Acoustic Standoff from the trans-
ducer.
• Slowly detach it in reverse order of when at-
tached. The ultrasound gel may be spattered.
2 Wipe the ultrasound gel off the transducer
and Acoustic Standoff, and clean / disin-
fect each of them in turn according to the
instructions provided in "8.3.3 Cleaning
and Disinfection of Acoustic Standoff".
3 Wipe sterile water off Acoustic Standoff
with a clean cloth, and let it dry.
4 Cover Acoustic Standoff with a pair of
protective films, and put / store it in the
storage bag.
• Do not leave it on paper, plastic, etc.
• Avoid storing Acoustic Standoff in a place where
it can be exposed to direct sunlight, radiation
such as X-rays, and high temperature / humidity,
and store it in a dark place.
zz Disposal
Please follow the rules and regulations of your relevant
authorities in the disposal of an Acoustic Standoff and
its packing materials.
(The materials used for the Acoustic Standoff are flam-
mable and do not leave any hazardous residue to the
environment after being burned.)
The Acoustic Standoff is categorized as industrial
waste. If you discard without being sterilized after use,
it could be categorized as specially controlled industrial
waste. Be sure to follow the rules and regulations of
the local governing body, and request an approved in-
dustrial waste disposal company to discard the Acous-
tic Standoff.
 8.3 Acoustic Standoff

8.3.3 Cleaning and Disinfection of Acoustic Standoff

Cleaning

1 Wash off all residues on the transducer with purified water.

2 Immerse Acoustic Standoff in one of the following cleaning agents, or wipe it clean with gauze
or soft cloth dampened with the cleaning agent.

3 Rinse off the Acoustic Standoff with sterile water after taking it out from a cleaning agent.

zz Applicable cleaning agents

Chemical type Trade name Method and time

Immersion: 1 min.
Enzyme CIDEZYME® (0.8 %)
Temperature: Room temperature
Wiping with a sterile gauze
Isopropyl Alcohol Isopropyl Alcohol 70 %
Temperature: Room temperature
Wiping with a sterile soft cloth
Benzalkonium chloride Protex™ Disinfectant Wipes
Temperature: Room temperature

Disinfection

1 Clean Acoustic Standoff before disinfecting it.

2 Immerse Acoustic Standoff in one of the following disinfecting solutions.

3 Rinse off the transducer with sterile water after taking it out from a disinfecting solution.

zz Applicable disinfecting solutions

Chemical type Trade name Method and time

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Ortho-phthalaldehyde CIDEX® OPA (0.55 %) Immersion: 12 min.
Temperature: Room temperature Chapter 8

269
270
Chapter
9
MI/TI

271
 9.1 Basic Knowledge of MI/TI

MI/TI are an indication of the potential for biological effects induced by the acoustic output of clinical ultrasound sys-
tems.
• MI: Stands for Mechanical Index.
• TI: Stands for Thermal Index.

(1) Concerns with bioeffects

Diagnostic ultrasound is recognized as being safe. However, it cannot be stated categorically that ultrasound is
100 % safe. Studies have revealed that ultrasound with extremely high intensity is harmful to body tissues.
This rapid advance has generated concerns about the potential risk of bioeffects when new applications or diag-
nostic technologies become available.
(2) Mechanical effects and thermal effects
Studies have revealed that two different kinds of ultrasound characteristics affect human bodies: one is the me-
chanical effect due to cavitation generated when the negative pressure of ultrasound exceeds a certain limit
(generation/destruction of air bubbles), and the other is the effect due to thermal energy generated when tissues
absorb ultrasound.
The levels of these two kinds of effects are represented by indices: the MI (Mechanical Index) and the TI (Thermal
Index), respectively.
(3) MI/TI values
The smaller the MI/TI values are, the less the bioeffects are.
(4) Controlling the ultrasound output
In 1976, the FDA in the U.S.A. established limits to the acoustic output level for diagnostic ultrasound equipment
(Track 1), along with the rapid advance in diagnostic ultrasound technology and the versatile proliferation of its
applications, with the aim of ensuring the safety of patients.
Thereinafter, manufacturers were required to control the acoustic output level below the limits when releasing
new diagnostic ultrasound systems on the market.

<Note>
Ispta.3 may be represented as follows:
Izpta,α (α=0.3 dB/cm/MHz) (IEC 60601-2-37 (2001), Amd.1, Amd.2)
Ispta,α (α=0.3 dB/cm/MHz) (IEC 60601-2-37 (2007))

Maximum acoustic power specified by FDA (Track 1)

Application Ispta.3 (mW/cm2) Isppa.3 (W/cm2) MI

Peripheral blood vessels 720 190 1.9

Cardiovascular systems 430 190 1.9
Fetal and others 94 190 1.9
Eyes 17 28 0.23

272
 9.1 Basic Knowledge of MI/TI

The idea of MI/TI has been introduced recently to increase the diagnostic capability, promoting relaxation of these
acoustic power limits (Track 3).

Maximum limit for MI/TI display (Track 3)

Application Ispta.3 (mW/cm2)
Isppa.3 ≤190 (W/cm2) or MI≤1.9
All regions (except eyes) 720
With this trend, management of the level of acoustic power has been transferred from manufacturers to users.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Note the following in regard to output setting of the acoustic power level.
The FDA allows ultrasound equipment to output acoustic power level Track 3, which is higher than Track 1, provided
that MI/TI values are displayed on the system. This means that users have a higher degree of responsibility for safety
than manufacturers.
Against this background, users are required to understand the ultrasound bioeffects and their cause. They are also
required to understand that the introduction of MI/TI will increase the diagnostic capability.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

(5) ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable)

ALARA refers to a practice to control the ultrasound energy at the lowest possible level that would not affect di-
agnosis. It is required to practice ALARA when using ultrasound energy. Practicing ALARA ensures that the total
energy level is controlled at the lowest possible level that would not affect bodies that are currently being diag-
nosed. The ultrasound energy is controlled by output intensity and total radiation time.
The output intensity necessary for examinations differs depending on the patient and the clinical case.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• It is strictly required that acoustic output is set based on the ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable) principle.
However, not all examinations can be performed with an extremely low level of acoustic energy. Controlling the
acoustic level at an extremely low level leads to low-quality images or insufficient Doppler signals, adversely affecting
the reliability of the diagnosis.
However, increasing the acoustic power more than necessary does not always contribute to an increase in quality of
information required for diagnosis, rather increasing the risk of generating bioeffects.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 9

273
 9.2 MI/TI Display Description

zz Definition of MI
MI (Mechanical Index) is expressed by dividing the peak-rarefactional acoustic pressure Pr,α calculated by con-
sidering the tissue attenuation (α = 0.3 dB/cm/MHz) by the square root of the acoustic working frequency fawf
(Units: MHz). This index can be expressed as follows:

Pr,α
MI =
fawf × CMI

where

CMI=1(MPa/ MHz)

zz Definition of TI
TI (Thermal Index) is the ratio of total acoustic power to the acoustic power required to raise tissue temperature
by 1 degree centigrade under defined assumptions.

TIS (Soft Tissue Thermal Index) is related to heating in abdominal, cardiac and peripheral vascular applications.

TIB (Bone Thermal Index) is related to bone heating, which may be of particular importance in fetal applications.

TIC (Cranial Thermal Index) is related to heating in cephalic applications.

zz Displayed MI/TI values

Accuracy
 The MI and TI values are determined and displayed based on the measured acoustic power data. The displayed
values contain errors due to the following factors.
• Measurement errors in acoustic power measurement
• Variation in the characteristics of the system and transducer
• Ultrasound propagation characteristics
Display conditions
• If MI values are less than 0.1, they are rounded up to two decimal places for display, and MI values of 0.1 or
greater are rounded up to one decimal place for display.
• TI is displayed to one decimal place.

274
 9.3 Parameters Affecting the MI/TI Values

The MI/TI values are affected by transmission conditions (focus, drive frequency, voltage applied to piezoelectric ele-
ments, etc.), scan conditions and settings of the Tx level.

Chapter 9

275
 9.4 Display Layout of MI/TI Values

The system displays the Mechanical and Thermal Indices during real-time imaging, in all imaging modes.
To check MI/TI values, the image on the study screen needs to be in a live state.
• MI/TI values are hidden during frozen state. Press the FREEZE button to cancel the frozen state.
• MI/TI values are dependent on mode and [Tx Level] changes.

Tx Level

Mechanical and Thermal Indices display area

Indices are displayed in the abbreviated form as shown below:
[MI] : Mechanical Index
[TIS] : Soft Tissue Thermal Index
[TIB] : Bone Thermal Index (or [TIC] : Cranial Thermal Index)

276
 9.5 MI/TI Output Display

9.5.1 Transmit Level Control

Adjust the transmit level and the corresponding acoustic pressure delivered through the transducer to the patient by
using the designated control on the system. It is the main system function that determines the transmitted intensity of
ultrasound for the transducer and imaging modes during real-time imaging, though it is not the only function that af-
fects the mechanical and thermal indices.

Tx Level
There are two ways to change the transmit level.
• Touch the first value from the top. The Tx level change pop-up window will ap-
pear, allowing you to change the value by pressing the [up] / [down] button.
• Use the [Menu] button > [Tx Level] in the menu pop-up window to make a
change.

Chapter 9

277
9.5 MI/TI Output Display

9.5.2 Transmit Level Display

The transmit level range is from 10 % to 100 %. Selecting 100 %, in combination with other system controls or func-
tions generates the maximum acoustic intensity and mechanical index for the transducer, where:
Ispta.3 : ≤ 720 mW/cm2 and MI ≤ 1.9

Mechanical and Thermal Indices display area

Starting at the top: [MI], [TIS] and [TIB] (or [TIC]) values, which are displayed only
in a live state.

278
 9.6 Imaging Functions that Change Acoustic Output

Observe the real-time display of mechanical and thermal indices (MI/TI) at all times.
In addition to the adjustment of the transmit level, adjustment of the following imaging functions and/or controls may
affect the acoustic output:
• Switching of each mode (B / M / CFM / PDI / 2D-TDI / SCF / PW / CW / PW-TDI / Update / Simul. / Full / Split)
• B-mode parameter settings (Depth / Zoom / Focus Position / Focus Pattern / Frequency / THI / Density / Trapezoid
/ Compound / FOV)
• M-mode parameter settings (Sweep Speed)
• Color Flow- / Power Doppler- / 2D-TDI- / SCF-mode parameter settings (Scale / C ROI Position, Size / Frequency /
Temporal / Density / Steer)
• PW Doppler- / CW Doppler- / PW-TDI-mode parameter settings (Scale / Gate Position, Size / Frequency)
• Eastography (Frequency / Density / Pressurization Speed)
• New patient
• Selecting Preset
• Freeze
• Screen Saver
• Power ON/OFF
• Gel Pad Use

Chapter 9

279
 9.7 Caution

As a reminder, always practice ALARA. The display provides real-time information and therefore shows the current
acoustic exposure rates to the tissue or structure being insonated.
For inquiries and information, consult your service representative.

zz Acoustic Output — Mechanical and Thermal Indices

The diagnostic ultrasound system incorporates an output display of Mechanical and Thermal Indices to allow you to
monitor, and to limit, the amount of ultrasound energy that is transmitted to the patient.

CAUTION •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Ultrasound procedures should be used for valid reasons, for the shortest period of time, and at the lowest mechani-
cal/thermal index setting necessary to produce clinically acceptable images.
It may injure patients.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

280
 9.8 Acoustic Output

zz Derated Ultrasonic Output Parameters

In order to determine the relevant Ultrasonic Output Parameters, a method is used which allows for the compari-
son of diagnostic ultrasound systems which operate at different frequencies and focus at different depths.
This approach, called "derating" or "attenuating", adjusts the acoustic output as measured in a water tank to ac-
count for the effect of ultrasound propagation through tissue. By convention, a specific average intensity attenua-
tion value is used, which corresponds to a loss of 0.3 dB/cm/MHz.
That is, the intensity of ultrasound will be reduced by 0.3 dB/MHz for every centimeter from the transducer. This
can be expressed by the following equation:
Iatten = Iwater × 10(-0.3/10 × fc × z)
Where Iatten is the attenuated intensity, Iwater is the intensity measured in a water tank (at distance z), fc is the center
frequency of the ultrasound wave (as measured in water), and z is the distance from the transducer.
The equation for attenuating pressure values is similar except that the attenuation coefficient is 0.15 dB/cm/MHz,
or one-half the intensity coefficient. The intensity coefficient is double the pressure coefficient because intensity is
proportional to the square of pressure.
Although the attenuation coefficient chosen, 0.3 dB/cm/MHz, is significantly lower than any specific solid tissue
in the body, this value was chosen to account for fetal examinations. In early trimester ultrasound fetal examina-
tions, there may be a significant fluid path between the transducer and the fetus, and the attenuation of fluid is
very small.
Therefore the attenuation coefficient was lowered to account for this case.

zz Acoustic Output Limits

The derating (or attenuated) approach was incorporated into the FDA Acoustic Output Limits, as listed below. The
acoustic output level is designed to fall below these limits.
FDA Acoustic Output Limits for Track 3 (Attenuated Values)
Application Ispta.3 (mW/cm2)
Isppa.3 ≤190 (W/cm2) or MI≤1.9
All regions (except eyes) 720
In addition, the TI (TIS, TIB and TIC) is designed not to exceed 6.0 for any mode.

zz Differences between displayed and "actual" Thermal and Mechanical effects

The system displays the Thermal Index (TI) and Mechanical Index (MI). These parameters were developed as
general indicators of risk from either thermal or mechanical action of the ultrasound wave. They serve to indicate
to the user whether a particular setting of the system increases or decreases the possibility of Thermal or Me-
chanical effect.
More specifically, they were designed to assist in the implementation of the ALARA principle.
Refer to "9.7 Caution".
They also indicate the changes in acoustic output when the user changes given settings of the system.
Refer to "9.6 Imaging Functions that Change Acoustic Output".
However, the Thermal Index is not the same as temperature rise in the body, for several reasons. First of all, in
order to provide a single display index to the user, a number of simplifying assumptions had to be made.
The biggest assumption was the use of the attenuating formula described above, which is much lower that the
actual value for most tissues within the body. Scanning through muscle or organ tissue, for example, will produce
much higher attenuation than 0.3 dB/cm/MHz. There are also significant simplifications made for the thermal
properties of tissue.
Therefore, scanning through highly perfused tissue, such as the heart or vasculature, will produce significantly
Chapter 9

less thermal effect than that suggested by the Thermal Index.

Similarly, the Mechanical Index was derived to indicate the relative possibility of mechanical (cavitation) effects.
The MI is based on the derated peak rarefactional pressure and the center frequency of the ultrasound wave.
Refer to "9.2 MI/TI Display Description".
The actual peak rarefactional pressure is affected by the actual attenuation caused by tissue in the path between
the transducer and the focal point. Again, all solid tissues within the body have higher attenuation than the pre-
scribed 0.3 dB/cm/MHz value, and therefore, the actual peak rarefactional pressure will be lower.
Further, the actual peak rarefactional pressure will change depending upon the region of the body being scanned.
For these reasons, the TI and MI displays should only be used to assist the user in implementing ALARA at the
time of the patient examination.

281
 9.9 References for MI/TI

For further information on measurement methods and MI/TI, refer to the following documents:
(1) "510 (K) Guide For Measuring and Reporting Acoustic Output of Diagnostic Ultrasound Medical Devices" issued
by FDA in 1993
(2) "Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, Revision 3" issued by AIUM /
NEMA in 2004 (R2009)
(3) "Standard for real-time display of thermal and mechanical acoustic output indices on diagnostic ultrasound equip-
ment, Revision 2" issued by AIUM/NEMA in 2004 (R2009)
(4) "Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound" issued by AIUM in 1993
(5) "Medical Ultrasound Safety" issued by AIUM in 2009
(6) "Information for Manufacturers Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound Systems and Transduc-
ers" issued by FDA in 2008
(7) World Federation for Ultrasound in Medicine and Biology (WFUMB), Conclusions and Recommendations on
Thermal and Non-thermal Mechanisms for Biological Effects of Ultrasound. Report of the 1996 WFUMB Sympo-
sium on Safety of Ultrasound in Medicine. Barnett, S.B. (ed). Ultrasound in Medicine and Biology, Vol 24, suppl 1,
1998

282
 Chapter
10
Acoustic Output

283
 10.1 Acoustic Output Reference

10.1.1 Transducer Technical Data and Acoustic Output

zz Transducer Technical Data and Acoustic Output

Display Resolution and Measurement Accuracy
MI values displayed on the screen are incremented by 0.01 (when MI is less than 0.1) or 0.1 (when MI is 0.1 or
greater), and TI values are incremented by 0.1.
It is important to note that displayed indices are obtained through measurement, and are subject to measurement
errors. Specific measurement uncertainties for acoustic output, acoustic pressure, and center frequency are 19 %,
9.2 %, and 0.58 % respectively. Measurement precision for ultrasonic power, peak rarefactional pressure, and center
frequency from a standard test transducer/driver combination is 19 %, 9.3 %, and 0.62 % respectively. The reported
values assume 90 % population (P) at 90 % confidence level (γ).
Definitions for these parameters can be found in "9.9 References for MI/TI".

zz Default ultrasound output level

The tolerance for the ultrasound output level differs according to the exam type.
In order to avoid the danger of unnecessary high output ultrasound being inadvertently irradiated from the transduc-
er, set the default transmit level to any value lower than the maximum settable value (100 %).
When changing the patient or the exam type, set the output level to the default setting by selecting an appropriate
EXAM.
Default ultrasound output level

Transmit level of all EXAMs 75 %

284
 10.1 Acoustic Output Reference

zz Transducers and Intended Applications

EMC Note: Operating the transducer in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic fields, such as radio
transmitter stations or similar installations, may lead to temporary degradation or interference visible on the monitor
screen. A lightening of image background may be noticed while visualizing hypoechoic structures, or jitters in the im-
age screen may occur. The transducers that can be connected to the system have been designed and tested to with-
stand such interference, and will not sustain irreversible damage.
Refer to "11.6 Electromagnetic Emissions and Electromagnetic Immunity".
TRANSDUCER NAME SCANNING FREQUENCY MODES OF OPERATION MAIN INDICATIONS FOR USE

B, M, Color Flow, Power, SCF*1,

CONVEX PROBE C5-2 2 MHz to 5 MHz Abdomen
PW Doppler

B, M, Color Flow, Power, SCF*1, Peripheral vascular,

LINEAR PROBE L18-4 4 MHz to 18 MHz
PW Doppler, Elastography*2 Superficial, Musculoskeletal

B, M, Anatomical M,
SECTOR PROBE S4-2 2 MHz to 4 MHz Color Flow, Power, 2D-TDI, PW Cardiac, Abdomen
Doppler, CW Doppler, PW-TDI

B, M, Color Flow, Power, PW Peripheral vascular,

LINEAR PROBE L14-4 4 MHz to 14 MHz
Doppler Superficial, Musculoskeletal

ENDOCAVITY PROBE B, M, Color Flow, Power, PW

3 MHz to 9 MHz Transvaginal
EC9-3 Doppler

B, M, Color Flow, Power, PW Peripheral vascular,

CONVEX PROBE MC10-3 3 MHz to 10 MHz
Doppler Abdomen, Musculoskeletal

B, M, Color Flow, Power, SCF*1, Peripheral vascular,

LINEAR PROBE L11-3 3 MHz to 11 MHz
PW Doppler, Elastography*2 Superficial, Musculoskeletal

B, M, Color Flow, Power, SCF*1, Peripheral vascular,

LINEAR PROBE HL18-4 4 MHz to 18 MHz
PW Doppler Superficial, Musculoskeletal

B, M, Color Flow, Power, SCF*1, Breast,

LINEAR PROBE WL13-3 3 MHz to 13 MHz
PW Doppler, Elastography*2 Superficial, Musculoskeletal

B, M, Anatomical M,
SECTOR PROBE S4-2A 2 MHz to 4 MHz Color Flow, Power, 2D-TDI, PW Cardiac, Abdomen
Doppler, CW Doppler, PW-TDI
*1: SCF-mode cannot be used in some units.
*2: Elastography-mode cannot be used in some units.

Chapter 10

285
286
Chapter
11
Others

287
 11.1 Troubleshooting

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Confirm the following before conducting any operations in this section.
– Be sure to use the power supply cord that is included with the system, and connect the mains plug (Hospital Grade) to a
wall mounted AC socket outlet. Do not connect the mains plug to a two-pin socket outlet using conversion adapters, etc.
Doing so may cause an electric shock.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
If the system can be turned on, while the system is starting, press simultaneously the four buttons ( EXIT / SET /
User 1 / User 2 ) of the mini console in the figure below. Next, when there is a still image or clip that needs to be
stored, freeze the image if it is in a live state and perform [Print] / [Still Store] / [Clip Store] / [Cine Clip Store] by con-
trolling the displayed trackball pointer to operate the trackball and using the SET button.
If the trackball pointer is not displayed, display it by pressing the three buttons ( EXIT / SET / F2 (Push)) simultane-
ously.
EXIT button SET button F2 (Push) button

SET F2 F1 Gain
EXIT

1
User FREEZE

2
User

User 1 button User 2 button

Then check the following items. If the problem persists, please contact your service representative.

Problems What to check

• Check that the battery status indicator LED on the mini console is lit or
blinking.
• Check that the power switch LED is lit.
• Check that the AC adaptor LED is lit.
• Check that the power code and the AC adaptor are connected cor-
The system cannot be turned ON.
rectly.
• Check that the power supply cord is connected to a wall mounted AC
socket outlet correctly.
• Remove the AC adapter and battery, reinsert them after 10 seconds or
more, and then press the power switch.

• Check that the transducer is correctly connected to the transducer

Characters are displayed but no images are dis-
connector and locked in place.
played.
• Check the Tx Level setting.

• When an SD memory card is inserted for the first time the system
needs to perform a registration, therefore this may take some time.
Time of recognition will be shorter for the second and subsequent con-
nections.
• Use the following procedure to connect the SD memory card to the
An SD memory card cannot be recognized. system for the first time.

1. Shut down the system.

2. Disconnect all external storage media and peripheral devices from
the system.
3. Insert the SD memory card into the SD memory card slot.
4. Start up the system.

288
 11.1 Troubleshooting

Problems What to check

• Check that the transducer is correctly connected to the transducer

Transducers connected to the Three-Port Probe Unit connector and locked in place.

Chapter 11
cannot be switched. • Check that the Three-Port Probe Unit is correctly connected to the
transducer connector of the system and locked in place.

• Use the following procedure to connect the printer to the system.

1. Shut down the system.

2. Disconnect all external storage media and peripheral devices from
A printer cannot be recognized. the system.
3. Using a USB cable, connect the printer to the connector.
4. Turn on the printer and wait until the printer completes initialization.
5. Start up the system.

1. When a phenomenon occurs where any character cannot be entered

into an input field such as the patient information input field, select
a different input field and then reselecting the desired input field and
enter a character(s). (For example, if an ID cannot be entered in the
ID input field, select the name input field first and then reselect the
ID input field.)
2. After moving the trackball, check whether the touch panel has be-
come responsive.
3. If there are sources of vibrations in the vicinity of the system, make
sure that the vibrations do not transfer to the system. Vibrations may
cause the trackball to move, leading to an unresponsive touch panel.
4. If the system is in Touch invalidation mode, press EXIT to exit
Touch invalidation mode, and check if the touch panel is responsive.

* After checking the following, shut down the system. Do the following
before shutting down the system.
On the mini console, press the 4 buttons, EXIT / SET / User 1 /
User 2 at the same time.
A log is saved for analysis. Also, the trackball pointer appears.
Next, if a clip or still image must be stored, freeze the image if you
are in a live state. Use the trackball pointer that appears to perform
[Print], [Still Store], [Clip Store], or [Cine Clip Store] via trackball
and SET button operations to store the image.
If the trackball pointer does not appear, pressing the 3 but-
tons, EXIT / SET / F2 (Push) at the same time makes it appear.
Touch operation cannot be enabled.
5. If touch operation cannot be enabled after using a cloth to wipe the
surface of the monitor while it is running, turn the power off, and then
back on. Do not wipe the surface of the monitor while it is running.
6. Check that there is no protective sheet, debris, or dirt stuck to the
surface of the LCD monitor. If something is stuck to the surface of
the LCD monitor, shut down the system before removing the protec-
tive sheet, debris, or dirt, and then restart it.
7. The touch panel may not operate normally if the surface of the LCD
monitor is touched while it is starting up. In this case, shut down the
system, and then start it without touching it with your hands.

If touching still does not work after doing the steps above, contact your
service representative.

[Shutdown procedures for when touching does not work]

• Pressing the power button causes a shutdown dialog and the trackball
pointer to appear. Move the pointer onto the shutdown button, and the
press the SET button to shut down.
• If there are DICOM jobs left to be transferred, a dialog indicating such
is displayed. Using the trackball pointer and the SET button, press the
[OK] button and select the shutdown button from the shutdown dialog
that reappears.
• If you cannot operate the trackball pointer with the trackball, press the
power button twice in succession.

Continued on the next page

289
11.1 Troubleshooting
Problems
Reaction in an area different from where you touch.
Connection is cut due to low signal strength of wire-
less LAN.
"Error: DICOM Status" is displayed.
Error code "CA00017" is displayed on the monitor.
What to check
* After checking the following, shut down the system. Do the following
before shutting down the system.
On the mini console, press the 4 buttons, EXIT / SET / User 1 /
User 2 at the same time.
A log is saved for analysis. Also, the trackball pointer appears.
Next, if a clip or still image must be stored, freeze the image if you
are in a live state. Use the trackball pointer that appears to perform
[Print], [Still Store], [Clip Store], or [Cine Clip Store] via trackball and
SET button operations to store the image.
If the trackball pointer does not appear, pressing the 3 but-
tons, EXIT / SET / F2 (Push) at the same time makes it appear.
1. Check that there is no protective sheet, debris, or dirt stuck to the
surface of the LCD monitor. If something is stuck to the surface of the
LCD monitor, shut down the system before removing the protective
sheet, debris, or dirt, and then restart it.
2. If the reaction continues to occur in an area different from where you
touch after doing step 1 above, check whether the power plug of the
power cable that was included with the system is directly connected
to the mains plug (hospital grade ). For instance, if you are using a
connector for 3-pin to 2-pin conversion, an area different from where
you touch may react. In this case, stop using the connector for 3-pin
to 2-pin conversion.
If touching still does not work after doing the steps above, contact your
service representative.
[Shutdown procedures for when an area different from where you touch
reacts]
Do the [Shutdown procedures for when touching does not work] written
in the cell for what to check in "Touch operation cannot be enabled".
• Reconnect with the following procedure.
1. Move to a place where the wireless LAN signal strength is high.
2. If the wireless LAN connection is not recovered in step 1 above,
switch to the wired network (if available) by touching the wired LAN
network in the network status dialog.
Refer to "Network Screen" of the "Operation Manual: Applications".
This is an error issued by the connected device.
For details on the error, check the instruction manual of the connected
device.
Turn off the system and detach the transducer from the transducer con-
nector.
If you have spray type air duster, remove foreign objects adhered to
the pin of the transducer connector by using it. Do not use cloth, tissue
paper, or brush, which will result in adhesion of foreign objects.
Attach the transducer to the system and start up. If an error has oc-
curred again, please contact your service representative.
290
 11.2 Error Code List

If the following error messages appear, follow their respective solutions.

Chapter 11
If any error message does not appear, or if you have implemented the solution and are still having trouble, contact
your service representative.
Error code Display message Phenomenon / Solution

Please connect the AC adapter, otherwise the

CA00001 Please connect the AC adapter.
system will shutdown within 2 minutes.
Please start the system after the battery is charged or con-
CA00002 Low Battery. Shutting down.
nected to the AC adapter.
External storage device was failed to be ejected.
Please disconnect the external storage device after shutting
CA00003 Please disconnect the external storage device
down the system.
after shutting down the system.
The display connection Error!!
Please stop use of the system, and contact your service
CA00004 Please contact your service representative to
representative to schedule maintenance.
schedule maintenance.
The battery Error!!
Please contact your service representative to schedule
CA00005 Please contact your service representative to
maintenance.
schedule maintenance.
Disk space is almost full.
Please erase patient data or study data to make more free
CA00006 Please delete Patient / Study data in internal
space.
storage database.
The system has been unstable.
Please reboot.
CA00007
If an error has occurred again after rebooting,
Please contact your service representative. Please reboot.
If an error has occurred again after rebooting, please con-
The system has been unstable. tact your service representative.
Please reboot.
CA00008
If an error has occurred again after rebooting,
Please contact your service representative.
Ultrasound images will not be affected, but there is no guar-
The CMOS Battery has expired.
antee that the time and date settings are kept intact.
CA00009 Please contact your service representative to
Please contact your service representative to schedule
schedule maintenance.
maintenance.
Fan Error!!
CA00010 Please contact your service representative to
schedule maintenance.
System temperature Error!!
Check that the vent holes are not blocked.
The system will soon shutdown.
CA00012 If you still have the error even after checking, please stop
Please contact your service representative to
use of the system, and contact your service representative
schedule maintenance.
to schedule maintenance.
CPU temperature Error!!
The system will soon shutdown.
CA00013
Please contact your service representative to
schedule maintenance.
The battery temperature Error!!
The system will soon shutdown. Please contact your service representative to schedule
CA00014
Please contact your service representative to maintenance.
schedule maintenance.

Continued on the next page

291
11.2 Error Code List

Error code Display message Phenomenon / Solution

CA00015
A system error has occurred.
Please reboot.
CA00016
If an error has occurred again after reboot,
please contact your service representative. Please reboot.
CA00017 If an error has occurred again after reboot, please contact
your service representative.
An error has occurred in booting.
Please reboot the system.
CA00018
If an error has occurred again after rebooting,
please contact your service representative.
Restart the system. If an error reoccurs after restarting the
An error has occurred in application software.
CA00019 system, stop using the system and contact your service
Please contact your service representative.
representative.
An error has occurred in firmware. Please stop use of the system, and contact your service
CA00020
Please contact your service representative. representative.
Please remove the extension probe port after Please turn off the power of the system. Then remove the
CA00021
power Off. extension probe port.
AC adapter connector is not inserted properly.
CA00022 Please make sure to fully insert the AC adapter Insert the AC adapter connector all the way to its base.
connector.
System software fails to bootup.
Please stop use of the system, and contact your service
CA07001 Please contact service representative for assis-
representative.
tance.
Perform Check Disk.
Once you perform Check Disk, the system is automatically
Please shut down the system.
rebooted. Then the screen goes dark for a few minutes,
Check Disk
CA07002 which is the normal reboot routine.
Check Hard disk : System drive
If you still have the error after performing Check Disk,
Check Hard disk : Data drive
please stop use of the system, and contact your service
representative.
The system could not be restored. Please contact
service representative for assistance. Please stop use of the system, and contact your service
CA07003
Continued system use is possible but not recom- representative.
mended.
An error has occurred during start-up.

CA07009 Please reboot the system.

If an error has occurred again after rebooting,
please contact your service representative. Please reboot the system.
If an error has occurred again after rebooting, please con-
System error has occurred. tact your service representative.

CA07010 Please reboot the system.

If an error has occurred again after rebooting,
please contact your service representative.
Application is busy. Application may not have been ended successfully.
CA07011
System shut down to force. Please confirm patient data and study data.

292
 11.2 Error Code List

Error code Display message Phenomenon / Solution

Boot system error.

CA07012
Error code = 0xXXXX

Chapter 11
Boot system error.
CA07013
Error code = 0x1005
Boot system error.
CA07014
Error code = 0x1008
Boot system error.
CA07015
Error code = 0x1009
Boot system error.
CA07016
Error code = 0x100A
Boot system error.
CA07017
Error code = 0x100B
Boot system error.
CA07018
Error code = 0x100C
Boot system error.
CA07019
Error code = 0x100D
Boot system error.
CA07020
Error code = 0x1011
Boot system error. Please stop use of the system, and contact your service
CA07021
Error code = 0x2012 representative.
Boot system error.
CA07022
Error code = 0x2013
Boot system error.
CA07023
Error code = 0x2014
Boot system error.
CA07024
Error code = 0x2015
Boot system error.
CA07025
Error code = 0x2016
Boot system error.
CA07026
Error code = 0x2017
Boot system error.
CA07027
Error code = 0x2018
Boot system error.
CA07028
Error code = 0x2019
Boot system error.
CA07029
Error code = 0x201A
Boot system error.
CA07030
Error code = 0x201B

Continued on the next page

293
11.2 Error Code List

Error code Display message Phenomenon / Solution

Boot system error.

CA07031
Error code = 0x201C
Boot system error.
CA07032
Error code = 0x201D
Boot system error.
CA07033
Error code = 0x201E
Boot system error.
CA07034
Error code = 0x0001
Boot system error.
CA07035
Error code = 0x0002
Boot system error.
CA07036
Error code = 0x0003
Boot system error.
CA07037
Error code = 0x0004
Boot system error.
CA07038
Error code = 0x0005
Boot system error.
CA07039
Error code = 0x0006 Please stop use of the system, and contact your service
Boot system error. representative.
CA07040
Error code = 0x0007
Boot system error.
CA07041
Error code = 0x0008
Boot system error.
CA07042
Error code = 0x0009
Boot system error.
CA07043
Error code = 0x000A
Boot system error.
CA07044
Error code = 0x000F
Boot system error.
CA07045
Error code = 0x0010
Boot system error.
CA07046
Error code = 0x0011
Boot system error.
CA07047
Error code = 0x0012
Boot system error.
CA07048
Error code = 0xAAAA
Application is busy.
CA07049 Please reboot the system.
System shut down to force.
• During examination
End the examination and then select Shutdown again.
• At other times
Application is busy.
Check that no other dialog box is displayed. If another
CA07050 Shutdown process has been canceled.
dialog box is displayed, close it and then select Shutdown
Wait for a while, please try to shut down again.
again.
If the examination screen is not displayed, display the
examination screen and then select Shutdown again.
• During examination
End the examination and then select Standby again.
• At other times
Application is busy.
Check that no other dialog box is displayed. If another
CA07051 Standby process has been canceled.
dialog box is displayed, close it and then select Standby
Wait for a while, please try to standby again.
again.
If the examination screen is not displayed, display the
examination screen and then select Standby again.

294
 11.2 Error Code List

Error code Display message Phenomenon / Solution

Failed to export.
CA0A001 Please output after rebooting the system.
This System is busy.

Chapter 11
CA0A002 The device is not ready. Please remove and insert the device again.
Please confirm the lock/unlock status of the device. If
CA0A003 The specified device cannot be writen.
locked, please unlock the device and reinsert it.
CA0A004 There is not enough free space on the device. Please make more free space and then reinsert the device.
Please try again. If an error has occurred again, please try
CA0A005 Failed to delete. Please try again.
again after rebooting the system.
A command with the same name has been registered. Do
CA10001 A command with the same name already exists.
the registration again.
CA10002 Intonation file settings failed. Failed to set intonation file. Do the registration again.
The number of registered commands has reached the up-
CA10003 Can't add any more commands. per limit. Delete other commands and then do the registra-
tion again.
DO NOT use the Biopsy during the battery-pow-
CA16001 Please connect the AC adapter and then use the Biopsy.
ered operation.
System may exceed the MI/TI/Ispta.3 described
The system can be used as is. If you have the error again,
CA1F001 in the user’s manual. Transmission voltage was
please contact your service representative.
lowered.
System error has occurred.
CA1F002 Please contact your service representative.
please contact your service representative.
The system has failed to load User Account Set-
tings files. The system has been unstable.
CA2B001 Please select [Yes] and set User Account again.
Are you sure you want to restore to the default
setting?
An internal error has occurred.
CA60001 If an error has occurred again after rebooting,
please contact your service representative. Please reboot the system.
If an error has occurred again after rebooting, please con-
Database connection was failed. tact your service representative.
CA60002 So that system is unstable, please reboot the
system.
External storage device was failed to be ejected.
Please disconnect the external storage device after shutting
CA60003 Please disconnect the external storage device
down the system.
after shutting down the system.
The required tag or data is not found.: [tag name]
CA61001 Please contact your service representative.
Please check the connected device.
Internal parameter error has occurred.
CA61002 Please contact your service representative.
Please contact your service representative.
Please start a new study to store images. If a store error
CA62003 Store Error.
occurs again, try again after rebooting the system.

Continued on the next page

295
11.2 Error Code List

Error code Display message Phenomenon / Solution

Print failure.
CA62004 A print job is full. Wait for a while, please try to print again.
Please print again.
Printer error.
CA62005 A printer error occurs. Please confirm a printer.
Please confirm a printer.
Printer error.
CA62007 Paper jam. Please remove the jammed paper.
Please remove a paper jam.
Printer error.
CA62008 Paper has run out. Please supplement paper for the printer.
Please supplement paper.
Printer error.
CA62009 Door is opened. Please close the door of the printer.
Please Close the door.
Printer error.
Printer is not connected. Make sure the printer cable correctly connected. Turn the
CA62010
Make sure the printer cable correctly connected. printer power Off and On.
Turn the printer power Off and On.
Printer error.
CA62011 The printer does not respond. Turn the printer Off and On.
Turn the printer Off and On.

296
 11.3 Accuracy of Measurement

The measured value varies with the properties of ultrasound, conditions of the subject being studied for ultrasound,

Chapter 11
measurement tools, algorithm, system settings, transducer type and user operation.
Before using the system, make sure to confirm the following information regarding the causes of measurement errors
and the optimization of measurement.

11.3.1 Causes of Measurement Errors

zz Image resolution
The resolution of ultrasound images may be limited by the observed region.
• Errors caused by the range of signals can be minimized through focus adjustments.
Optimize focus settings to increase the resolution of measurement areas.
• Basically, the transverse resolution power is lower than the longitudinal resolution power. It is therefore advised to
carry out a measurement along the ultrasound beam axis so that more accurate values can be obtained.
• The resolution is directly affected by the gain. Operate the Gain button to adjust the gain in each mode.
• In general, the resolution increases with ultrasound frequency.

zz Pixel size
• The ultrasound images generated by the system are composed of pixels.
• Since one pixel is the most basic unit of an image, a margin of measurement error of approximately plus or minus
one pixel may be observed in relation to the original image size.
• This margin of error should be noted when image measurement is limited to a narrow range.

zz Velocity of ultrasound
• The mean velocity of the ultrasound used for measurement is normally 1532 m/s, velocity at 42 °C.
• The velocity varies depending on the characteristics of the tissue of a subject being measured.
• It can have a margin of error of approximately 2 % to 5 % depending on the structure of each tissue (approx. 2 %
for normal tissues, approx. 5 % for fat tissues).

zz Doppler signal adjustment

• During a velocity measurement, an error may be introduced into the Doppler angle between the direction of blood
flow and the ultrasound beam.
• For Doppler velocity measurement, it is said that the ultrasound beam should be aligned as parallel to the direction
of blood flow as possible to obtain the most accurate value.
• If it is difficult to align the ultrasound beam parallel to the direction of blood flow, adjust the angle of the ultrasound
beam using the Angle Change function.

zz Aliasing
• In PW Doppler- / CW Doppler- / PW-TDI-mode, a signal processing technique to calculate the frequency (or veloc-
ity) spectrum is used.
• To minimize aliasing, adjust the baseline or the velocity scale. A lower frequency transducer is more likely to re-
duce aliasing.

zz Calculating formula
• Calculating formulas used for medical purposes have their roots in hypotheses or approximations.
• All those calculating formulas are based on medical reports and papers.

zz Human error
• Human errors can occur due to improper use or a lack of experience or skill.
• Such human errors can be minimized through a full understanding and observance of the document.

297
11.3 Accuracy of Measurement

11.3.2 Accuracy of Each Clinical Measurement Parameter

The table below shows the accuracy of the measurements that can be performed by the system. Make sure of the
measurement accuracy check results falling within their respective ranges specified in the table. Except for certain
applications or transducers, make sure that each of the results obtained by measurement of straight line distance
can be kept within its own accuracy range below.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To ensure accurate measurement, perform accuracy checks at least once every year. If measurement accuracy falls
outside the range specified in the table below, contact your service representative.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

zz Accuracy of Each Clinical Measurement Parameter

Parameter Ranges Accuracy

10 mm to 400 mm
The maximum depth depends on the
Image Depth Scale < +/- 3 % of full scale
transducer used
(or the exam type).

1 s: 2 ms (max)
ECG / Image Time 2 s: 4 ms (max)
1, 2, 4, 8 s
Scales 4 s: 8 ms (max)
8 s: 16 ms (max)

Two-dimensional Measurements
Distance / Depth Up to 999 mm < +/- 2 % relative to the display depth
2
Area Up to 999 cm < +/- 4 % relative to the square of the display depth

Less than +/- 3 % (2.7°) relative to a 90 degree angle

Angle 0 to 180 degrees (1/2 segment)
1 segment = 180° is assumed.

Time Motion (TM) Measurements

Less than +/- 3 % if 33 mm < D ≤ 280 mm
Depth Up to 280 mm
Less than1 mm if D ≤ 33 mm

Time Up to 16 s < +/- 2 % relative to the time required for 1 sweep

HR 15 to 999 bpm < +/- 5 %

Velocity Up to 999 cm/s < +/- 5 %

• bpm: Abbreviation of "beats per minute".

Volume Measurements
Volume (Area, Length, Less than +/- 9 % if 36 cm3 < V ≤ 999 cm3
Up to 999 cm3
Diameter) Less than 3.3 cm3 if V ≤ 36 cm3

298
 11.3 Accuracy of Measurement

zz Range of Accuracy
These measurements will hold the accuracies stated above over the entire selected field of view. The accuracy stat-
ed is either the measured value or calculated for worst case conditions.
The condition for this accuracy is 1532 m/s, velocity at 42 °C.

Chapter 11
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Even though the maximum value of the viewing depth of S4-2, S4-2A, or C5-2 is 400 mm, above-mentioned accu-
racy is limited within the range described in the table.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

299
 11.4 Conformance Standards

(1) AAMI/ANSI ES60601-1:2005/(R)2012 And A1:2012, C1:2009/(R)2012 And A2:2010/(R)2012

Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential performance
(2) IEC 60601-1:2005+AMD1:2012
Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential performance
(3) IEC 60601-2-37:2007
Medical electrical equipment - Part 2-37: Particular requirements for the basic safety and essential performance
of ultrasonic medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment. (Radiology)
(4) IEC 60601-1-2:2014
Medical electrical equipment -Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential performance -Col-
lateral Standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests
(5) NEMA UD 2-2004:R2009
Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment Version 3 (Radiology)

300
 11.5 Safety Classification

This system is classified with respect to safety characteristics.

Chapter 11
(1) According to the type of protection against electric shock:
• System: CLASS I EQUIPMENT

(2) According to the degree of protection against electric shock:

EQUIPMENT WITH TYPE BF APPLIED PARTS

(3) According to the degree of protection against harmful ingress of water:

• Mainframe: IPX0 (enclosed EQUIPMENT without protection against ingress of water)
• Transducer: IPX7
Refer to "8.1.3 Transducer Part Names".
• Foot Switch: IPX8

(4) According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of FLAMMABLE

ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE:
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or
WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE

(5) According to the mode of operation:

CONTINUOUS OPERATION

301
 11.6 Electromagnetic Emissions and Electromagnetic Immunity

This product complies with the EMC standard IEC 60601-1-2 : 2014.

zz Compliance level of Electromagnetic Emission and Electromagnetic Immunity (applied to IEC

60601-1-2:2014)
Refer to "Important Information" for information of intended use.

Electromagnetic Emissions
Phenomenon EMC standard Emission compliance level

Conducted and radiated

CISPR 11 Group 1 Class B
RF EMISSIONS

Harmonic distortion IEC 61000-3-2 Class A*

Voltage fluctuations
IEC 61000-3-3 Complies*
and flicker

*: These test items are not applied to the product with nominal voltage less than AC 220 V.

Electromagnetic Immunity
Phenomenon EMC standard Immunity compliance level

±8 kV condact
Electorostatic Discharge IEC 61000-4-2
±2 kV, ±4 kV, ±8 kV, ±15 kV air

Radiated RF EM fields IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m, 80 MHz~2.7 GHz, 80 % AM at 1 kHz

27 V/m, 385 MHz, Pluse modulation 18 Hz

Proximity fields from RF
wireless communications
equipment
28 V/m, 450 MHz, FM±5 kHz deviation 1 kHz sine
9 V/m, 710, 745, 780 MHz, Pulse modulation 217 Hz
IEC 61000-4-3 28 V/m, 810, 870, 930 MHz, Pulse modulation 18 Hz
28 V/m, 1720, 1845, 1970 MHz, Pulse modulation 217 Hz
28 V/m, 2450 MHz, Pulse modulation 217 Hz
9 V/m, 5240, 5500, 5785 MHz, Pulse modulation 217 Hz

Electrical fast transients / ±2 kV for power supply lines, 100 kHz repetition frequency
IEC 61000-4-4
bursts ±1 kV for input/output lines, 100 kHz repetition frequency

±0.5 kV, ±1 kV Line-to-line

Surges IEC 61000-4-5
±0.5 kV, ±1 kV, ±2 kV Line-to-ground

3 Vrms,
Conducted disturbances 0.15 MHz~80 MHz,
IEC 61000-4-6
induced by RF fields 6 V in ISM and amateur radio bands between 0.15 MHz and
80 MHz a), 80 % AM at 1 kHz

Rated power frequency

IEC 61000-4-8 30 A/m, 50 Hz or 60 Hz
magnetic fields

0 % UT ; 0.5 cycle,
At 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270° and 315°

Voltage dips IEC 61000-4-11 0 % UT ; 1 cycle

and
70 % UT ; 25/30 cycle b),
Single phase: at 0°

Voltage interruptions IEC 61000-4-11 0 % UT ; 250/300 cycle b)

NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
a): The ISM (industrial, scientific and medical) bands are 6.765 MHz to 6.795 MHz; 13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz;
26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
Amateur radio bands are 1.8 MHz to 2.0 MHz; 3.5 MHz to 4.0 MHz; 5.3 MHz to 5.4 MHz; 7.0 MHz to 7.3 MHz;
10.1 MHz to 10.15 MHz; 14.0 MHz to 14.2 MHz; 18.07 MHz to 18.17 MHz; 21.0 MHz to 21.4 MHz; 24.89 MHz to 24.99 MHz;
28.0 MHz to 29.7 MHz; and 50.0 MHz to 54.0 MHz.
b): E.g. 10/12 means 10 periods at 50 Hz or 12 periods at 60 Hz.

302
 11.6 Electromagnetic Emissions and Electromagnetic Immunity

zz Essential performance of this system

• Free from noise on a waveform or artefacts or distortion in an image or error of a displayed numerical value which cannot be at-
tributed to a physiological effect and which may alter the diagnosis.
• Free from the display of incorrect numerical values associated with the diagnosis to be performed.

Chapter 11
• Free from the display of incorrect safety-related indications.
• Free from the production of unintended or excessive ultrasound output.
• Free from the production of unintended or excessive TRANSDUCER ASSEMBLY surface temperature.
Notice1: "artifact" means "noise" that generates acoustically.
Notice2: "incorrect" in the sense that the displayed value differs from what is calculated (having been altered during
data transfer), or the calculation itself is not correct.

zz List of transducers for conformance standard of EMC

Transducer name Shielded/Unshielded Length

C5-2 Shielded <3m

L18-4 Shielded <3m

S4-2 Shielded <3m

L14-4 Shielded <3m

EC9-3 Shielded <3m

L11-3 Shielded <3m

HL18-4 Shielded <3m

MC10-3 Shielded <3m

WL13-3 Shielded <3m

S4-2A Shielded <3m

zz List of cables for conformance standard of EMC

Cable name Shielded/Unshielded Ferrite core Length

Power supply cord

Unshielded Not exist ≤ 3.5 m
(Hospital Grade)

USB cable Shielded Exist ≤ 2.0 m

LAN cable Shielded Not exist ≤ 10 m

DVI cable Shielded Exist ≤ 2.0 m

ECG cable Shielded Exist ≤ 3.5 m

303
 11.7 Check List for Maintenance Check: Before and after use

Before and after use, inspect this system, according to the following check list.
Name:
• Check the items below before turning on the system. Date of Maintenance:

No. Item Check off

(1) The system has been put/kept under the specified environmental conditions.

Ambient temperature, relative humidity, and atmospheric pressure should meet the system require-
(2)
ments.

(3) There should be no condensation.

(4) There should be no deformation, damage, or dirt on the system.

(5) There should be no loosening of screws.

(6) There should be no damage or connector loosening in the power supply cord.

There should be no dirt and abnormality (projection, cracking, chasm, sharp edge or peeling) on the
(7)
surface of the transducer, cable, or connector.

There should be nothing blocking the air vent of the system and no obstacles near the transducer
(8)
cable, the wall mounted AC socket outlet and mains plug.

(9) The system should be placed in a stable position during operation.

• Check the items below after turning on the power.

No. Item Check off

(1) There must be no abnormal noise, abnormal smell, or heating.

(2) No error message must be displayed.

(3) There must be no intermittent display or dark areas on the ultrasound image.

(4) The date and time must be indicated correctly.

The acoustic lens surface and housing of the transducer must not become abnormally hot. (Check
(5)
by touching the lens surface)

(6) The touch panel must function normally.

(7) The operation sound must not be overly loud.

• Check the items below after turning off the power.

No. Item Check off

(1) There should be no deformation, damage, or dirt on the system.

(2) There should be no loosening of screws.

(3) There should be no damage or connector loosening in the power supply cord.

There should be no dirt and abnormality (projection, cracking, chasm, or peeling) on the surface of
(4)
the transducer, cable, or connector.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Please refer to "7.2.2 Cleaning Procedures" before cleaning dirt on the system.
• Please refer to "8.1.6 Cleaning and Disinfection" before washing off residues on the transducer.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

304
305
306
Konica Minolta Healthcare Americas, Inc.
411 Newark-Pompton Turnpike, Wayne, NJ 07470,
U.S.A.
TEL. 973-633-1500
EU Authorized Representative:
Konica Minolta Business Solutions
Europe GmbH
Capellalaan 65,2132 JL, Hoofddorp,
The Netherlands
TEL. +31-20-658-4100
Konica Minolta Business Solutions (Canada)
Ltd.
5875 Explorer Drive, Mississauga,
Ontario, L4W 0E1, Canada
TEL. 905-890-6600
Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic (SHANGHAI)
Co., Ltd.
Room1602, Tower B, Hongwell International Plaza,
1602 West Zhongshan Road, Xuhui District,
Shanghai 200235 China
TEL. 021-6422-2626

Konica Minolta Healthcare India Private Ltd.

Office No.201, 2nd Floor, Atrium 2,
Next to Courtyard Marriott Hotel, Andheri Kurla Road,
Chakala, Andheri (East), Mumbai - 400093, India
TEL. +91-22-61916900

AD3TBA01EN01
2020-02-28
(AI)